Laser Marker
Serial Communication Guide
LP-M SERIES
LP-S SERIES
LP-Z SERIES
ME-LPMSZ-SR-4 No.9000-0046-80V
2014.10
panasonic.net/id/pidsx/global
Preface
Thank you for purchasing Laser Marker.
For full use of this laser marker safely and properly, please read this manual carefully.
This product has been strictly checked and tested prior to its delivery. However, please make sure that this product
operates properly before using it. In case that the product becomes damaged or does not operate as speciied in this
manual, contact the dealer you purchased from or our sales ofice.
⿎ General terms and conditions of this manual
1. Before using this product, or before every starting operation, please conirm the correct functioning and performance
of this product.
2. Contents of this manual could be changed without notice.
3. This manual must not be partially or totally copied or revised.
4. All efforts have been made to ensure the accuracy of all information in this manual. If there are any questions, mistakes, or comments in this manual, please notify us.
5. Please remind that we assume no liability for any results arising out of operations regardless of the above clauses.
⿎ Disclaimer
The applications described in the manual are all intended for examples only. The purchase of our products described in
the manual shall not be regarded as granting of a license to use our products in the described applications. We do NOT
warrant that we have obtained some intellectual properties, such as patent rights, with respect to such applications, or that
the described application may not infringe any intellectual property rights, such as patent rights, of a third party.
⿎ Trademark
• Windows is a registered trademark or trademark of Microsoft Corporation in U.S.A and other countries.
• QR Code is a registered trademarks of DENSO WAVE INCORPORATED.
• “Adobe ®”, “Adobe ® Logo”, “Adobe Reader ®”, and “Adobe ® Illustrator ®” are registered trademarks of U.S.A. Adobe
Systems Incorporated and other countries.
• All other product names and companies provided in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of their
respective companies.
Cautions in Handling
ALWAYS FOLLOW THESE IMPORTANT
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS!
To reduce the risk of injury, loss of life, electric shock, ire, malfunction, and damage to equipment or property, always
observe the following safety precautions.
The following symbols are used to classify and describe the level of hazard, injury, and property damage caused when the
denotation is disregarded and improper use is performed.
DANGER
Denotes a potential hazard that will result in serious injury or death.
WARNING
Denotes a potential hazard that could result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION
Denotes a hazard that could result in minor injury.
The following symbols are used to classify and describe the type of instructions to be observed.
This symbol is used to alert users to a speciic operating procedure that must not be performed.
This symbols is used to alert users to a speciic operating procedure that must be followed in order to
operate the unit safely.
This symbols is used to alert users to a speciic operating procedure that must be performed carefully.
2
This laser marker falls into Class 4 laser (marking laser) and Class 2 laser (guide laser) based on the classiications of
the Safety of laser products (JIS C 6802) / FDA standards 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11/IEC60825-1. Perform the safety
protection measure before using the system. Refer to Safety / Setup / Maintenance Guide for details.
DANGER
Never look at laser beam directly, through lens or through any other optical components.
Laser beam radiation into the eye causes blindness or serious damage to the eye.
Not only the direct beam of laser, but also diffused relected beam is harmful.
Never touch laser beam and avoid human skin, clothing and any other lammable object from laser beam
exposure directly.
Burning into deep skin might result and there is a risk of ire.
WARNING
Never disassemble the product.
Doing so may cause exposure to the laser beam or electric shock.
Take laser protection measures required to use Class 4 laser products subject to the local laws and regulations
of the country or region in which the laser marker is used.
Refer to Safety / Setup / Maintenance Guide for details.
Wear the speciied laser protective goggles for operator's eyes.
The goggles should be used against scattered beam, so avoid to direct beam or relection beam.
In order to prevent unexpected exposures from object to be marked or its peripherals, set protective enclosure
with proper relectance, durability and thermal resistance to enclose the laser radiation area.
Construct an interlock systems such as a function to stop laser radiation for the maintenance door of the
protective enclosure.
Read all packaged guides and manuals thoroughly, and do not operate, install and connect the laser marker
with any other methods except the instructions provided in the manuals.
If the product is used in a manner not speciied by the instruction, the safety protection and functions provided
by the device may be impaired and it may cause injury, electrical shock or exposure of laser beam.
Remove the dust and/or gas which may be generated during the laser radiation with dust collector or exhauster.
Use an appropriate dust collector or exhauster for dust or gas generated.
Depending on the material of the objects, harmful dust and/or gas to the human body and the laser marker may
be generated.
Prior to wiring, cable connecting and/or maintenance work, ensure that all the power switches are turned off.
Otherwise, electrical shock may result.
Connect ground wire before using.
A failure or leak that occurs when the unit is not properly grounded may result in electric shock.
3
How to Read this Manual
■ Target Laser Marker
This manual is subject to the following Laser Marker models.
If the setting contents or speciications vary by models, the target models are speciied in the text.
In the text, multiple models may be described collectively, as shown in the table below.
Note that the illustration may vary with model.
Target model
Description in the text
LP-M200, LP-M200-CHN, LP-M200-S, LP-M200-S-CHN
LP-M200 LP-M2xx LP-Mxx0
LP-M500, LP-M500-CHN, LP-M500-S, LP-M500-S-CHN
LP-M500 LP-M5xx
LP-M205, LP-M205-CHN, LP-M205-S, LP-M205-S-CHN
LP-M205 LP-M2xx LP-Mxx5
LP-M505, LP-M505-CHN, LP-M505-S, LP-M505-S-CHN
LP-M505 LP-M5xx
LP-Mxxx
LP-Mxxx-S
LP-M
Series
LP-MA05, LP-MA05-CHN, LP-MA05-S, LP-MA05-S-CHN LP-MA05 LP-MAxx
LP-MA06, LP-MA06-CHN, LP-MA06-S, LP-MA06-S-CHN LP-MA06 LP-MAxx
LP-S Sries
LP-Sxxx
LP-Sxxx-SF LP-Sxxx(W)
LP-S200, LP-S200-CHN, LP-S200-SF
LP-S200 LP-S2xx LP-Sxx0
LP-S500, LP-S500-CHN, LP-S500-SF
LP-S500 LP-S5xx
LP-S202, LP-S202-CHN, LP-S202-SF
LP-S202 LP-S2xx LP-Sxx2
LP-S502, LP-S502-CHN, LP-S502-SF
LP-S502 LP-S5xx
LP-S205, LP-S205-CHN, LP-S205-SF
LP-S205 LP-S2xx LP-Sxx5
LP-S505, LP-S505-CHN, LP-S505-SF
LP-S505 LP-S5xx
LP-S500W, LP-S500W-CHN
LP-S500W
LP-Sxx0(W) LP-SxxxW
LP-S505W, LP-S505W-CHN
LP-S505W
LP-Sxx5(W)
LP-Z130, LP-Z130-A, LP-Z130-C, LP-Z130-CHN
LP-Z130
LP-Zxx0
LP-Z250, LP-Z250-A, LP-Z250-C, LP-Z250-CHN
LP-Z250
LP-Z256, LP-Z256-A, LP-Z256-C, LP-Z256-CHN
LP-Z256
LP-Zxxx
LP-Z Series
LP-Zxx6
■ Symbol Indications
Notice
Reference
4
“Notice” denotes any instructions or precautions for using this product. To prevent the damage or
malfunction of the product, observe these precautions fully.
“Reference” denotes any hints for operation, detail explanations, or references.
■ Summary of Each Manual
This laser marker is prepared for the following manuals. Read the corresponding manual for the target, and operate this
laser marker fully. Also, store these manuals after reading them.
Safety / Setup / Maintenance Guide
This manual describes the safety precautions and the items required for the introduction, installation and maintenance of
the laser marker.
• Precautions and safety measures: All users shall be required for reading this part.
• Speciications and outer dimensions
• Setup and connecting method
• I/O control method (signal layout, I/O rating, timing chart etc.)
• Maintenance
• Troubleshooting
Operation Manual
This manual describes the topics regarding how to operate the laser marker.
The basic active operation, screen operation for setting marking contents, and measurement for error are described in
this manual.
Mainly the users that operate this laser marker for actual marking procedure shall be required for reading this manual.
Serial Communication Guide (This Manual)
This manual describes the communication commands to control the laser marker externally using the serial
communication (RS-232C/Ethernet). It describes the communication conditions, communication data formats,
communication commands, and the control samples.
Mainly the machine builder and system integrator shall be required for reading this manual.
Reference
• Operation Manual and Serial Communication Guide are included on an attached CD-ROM “Laser Marker Utility”. The
hardcopy versions of the manuals are available for pay. For details, please contact our sales ofice.
• To read the PDF manual, Adobe Reader (Version 7 or later) of Adobe Systems Incorporated is required.
5
Contents
Preface ……………………………………………………………………………… 2
Cautions in Handling ………………………………………………………………… 2
How to Read this Manual …………………………………………………………… 4
1 Before External Control …………………………… 9
1-1 Operation Method by External Control ………………………………………10
1-2 Operation Procedure of Laser Marker ……………………………………… 11
1-3 Shift to Remote Mode …………………………………………………………12
1-4 DIP Switch ……………………………………………………………………… 13
1-5 Timing Chart ……………………………………………………………………14
1-5-1 Basic Input/Output …………………………………………………………… 14
1-5-2 Safety Function Input (Laser Stop 1) ……………………………………… 16
1-5-3 Safety Function Input (Laser Stop 2) ……………………………………… 17
1-5-4 Safety Function Input (Interlock) …………………………………………… 18
2 Basics of Serial Communication (RS-232/Ethernet) …21
2-1 Before the Serial Communication Control ……………………………………22
2-2 Connection for Serial Communication ………………………………………23
2-2-1 RS-232C ……………………………………………………………………… 23
2-2-2 Ethernet ……………………………………………………………………… 25
2-3 Command Reception Condition ………………………………………………28
2-4 Connection Check ………………………………………………………………29
2-5 Control Sample …………………………………………………………………30
2-6 Communication Data Format …………………………………………………34
2-6-1 Command Data ……………………………………………………………… 34
2-6-2 Response Data ……………………………………………………………… 35
2-7 Communication Sequence ……………………………………………………38
3 Communication Command and Function …………41
3-1 Command at standard mode …………………………………………………42
3-1-1 Command List ………………………………………………………………… 42
3-1-2 Command Description ……………………………………………………… 46
3-2 LP-F10/F10W Mode ………………………………………………………… 118
3-2-1 Selecting DIP Switch ………………………………………………………… 118
3-2-2 LP-F10/F10W Mode Command List ……………………………………… 119
3-2-3 Each Command Description in LP-F10/F10W Mode …………………… 122
6
Troubleshooting……………………………………… 167
Troubleshooting …………………………………………………………………… 168
Error Indication …………………………………………………………………… 180
Alarm ………………………………………………………………………………… 180
Warning ……………………………………………………………………………… 184
Character Code Table ……………………………… 191
ASCII Code ………………………………………………………………………… 192
Original Font ……………………………………………………………………… 193
JIS Level-1 Font …………………………………………………………………… 194
JIS Level-2 Font …………………………………………………………………… 200
User Registration Character Font ……………………………………………… 208
Index ………………………………………………… 209
Index ……………………………………………………………………………… 210
7
MEMO
8
1 Before External Control
1-1 Operation Method by External Control
CAUTION
• It is obligated by IEC/FDA/JIS that laser products shall incorporate a keyactuated master control. Actuation of our laser marker is basically controlled by the key switch located on the front of the controller box. However,
in considering situations when the laser marker is operating as a part of a
larger system, the laser marker turns on if the key switch is already in ON
position, and power is supplied. In this case, be sure that the external system controls the operation of the laser marker with a key-actuated master
control.
In case of controlling the laser marker with the external control device, the following connecting methods are applicable.
External Control using I/O *1
(Remote Mode)
External Control using
serial communication *1
(Remote Mode)
External control of marking starting
signal (trigger) only (RUN Mode *2)
I
C
B
A
D
C
B
A
*1 It is available to combine I/O and the serial communication for external control.
*2 In this mode, set the laser marker by manual screen operation and operate the marking starting signal (trigger) by an
external signal from a sensor or a switch.
Manual Marking (Test Mode)
Other than external control, the manual marking can be performed using the console (option) or the personal computer
installed Laser Marker NAVI plus. Use this method when setting the marking condition for installation or performing
maintenance.
Reference
• For the details of external control by I/O and run mode, refer to "Safety / Setup / Maintenance Guide".
10
1-2 Operation Procedure of Laser Marker
Flow Chart
This section describes the basic operation procedures using external control.
Turn ON key switch of laser marker controller
External Control using serial
communication
External Control using I/O
s
s
RUN Mode
(Manual setting by screen operation)
Sift to Remote Mode
Refer to “1-3 Shift to Remote Mode” (P.12).
s
s
Select File
Select File
Select ile No. using external control.
Select ile by manual screen
operation.
s
s
Start Laser pumping
Start Laser pumping
Turn ON the laser pumping using the external control.
Turn ON the laser pumping
switch on the controller.
* It takes about 15 to 20 seconds from starting the laser pumping to completion of pumping.
s
s
Open shutter
Start RUN mode
Turn ON the shutter using the internal control.
Select “RUN” on the monitor
screen, and Press “START”.
Refer to "Safety / Setup /
Maintenance Guide" for detail.
s
s
READY Output ON
Laser marker is ready for receiving the marking starting signal (trigger).
For LP-Mxxx-S type, open the laser gate to turn ON the ready signal.
s
Trigger Input ON
The product starts marking.
s
Marking
Reference
• It is available to combine I/O and the serial communication for external control.
11
1-3 Shift to Remote Mode
To control the laser marker externally using I/O or serial communication commands, set the laser marker to the remote
mode in one of the following methods:
Press remote switch in front of controller.
* Check that DIP switch No. 5 is OFF.
“1-4 DIP Switch” (P.13)
Turn ON “Remote Input” from the terminal block.
* Check that DIP switch No. 5 is ON.
“1-4 DIP Switch” (P.13)
Reference
• During DIP switch No. 5 is ON, the remote switch in front of the controller is inoperative.
Turn ON the key switch of the controller, and shift the mode of the laser marker into the
remote one automatically.
* Check that DIP switch No. 5 is OFF, and No. 6 is ON.
“1-4 DIP Switch” (P.13)
Reference
• During DIP switch No. 6 is ON, it is also possible to control the remote status with the remote switch in front of the
controller.
12
1-4 DIP Switch
• The DIP switch is located in rear of the controller. Refer to “Safety / Setup / Maintenance Guide” for detail.
• The all DIP switch is set to OFF side at factory shipment.
• Switch the DIP switch with the power be shut down.
No.1
Switch for system reservation. Keep OFF of this switch.
No.2
Selects external control method of “Laser Pumping”, “Shutter Control” and “Guide Laser
Control”.
No.3
ON
indicates “Laser Pumping”, “Shutter Control” and “Guide Laser Control” are externally
controlled using serial communication command.
OFF
indicates “Laser Pumping”, “Shutter Control” and “Guide Laser Control” are controlled
using input terminal.
Turn on this switch when using the following communication commands.
• Laser check radiation (SPT) • Test marking (TST) • Laser power measurement (PWM)
• Power check (PWR)
Sets buzzer for error occurrence.
No.4
ON
This setting does not sound buzzer when occurring error.
OFF
This setting sounds buzzer when occurring error.
Selects valid/invalid for password lock when shifting screen from operation to each setting one.
No.5
ON
Sets invalid for password lock.
OFF
Sets valid for password lock.
Refer to “When password is forgotten” for the detail.
Selects shifting method for the remote mode.
No.6
ON
Controls switching to the remote mode from the input terminal block.
OFF
In case of shifting mode into remote mode using the remote switch on the front of the
controller. (To set No.6 to ON, set No.5 to OFF.)
Selects status when the key switch is turned ON.
ON
Shifts to the remote mode by setting the key switch to ON.
OFF
Does not shift to the remote mode by turning the key switch ON.
(To set No.5 to ON, set No.6 to OFF.)
CAUTION
If the DIP switch No.5 or No.6 are used while turned on, construct a system for
re-pumping the laser manually as safety protection measures after the stop of
the laser radiation due to an emergency stop or an interlock.
According to the combination of No. 7 and No. 8, serial communication command mode
switches. Turning on one of No. 7 or No. 8 gives command format compatibility with older
models.
No.7
No.8
Standard Mode
LP-F10 Mode
LP-F10W Mode
No.7…OFF
No.8…OFF
No.7…ON
No.8…OFF
No.7…OFF
No.8…ON
Notice
• Even with the use of LP-F10/F10W mode, there is a difference in communication processing time and I/O operation
timing between older model of LP-F10/LP-F10W and LP-M/LP-S/LP-Z series.
13
1-5 Timing Chart
Reference
• ON/OFF on the timing chart does not intend to High/Low of voltage level. It intends to ON/OFF of operation.
• In the following timing charts, the timing of output operation corresponding to the each input has a small delay of 0ms
or more.
1-5-1 Basic Input/Output
[Input]
*4
ON
KEY SWITCH
REMOTE INPUT
(Remote SW)
LASER IN
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
SHUTTER
CONTROL
INPUT B
SHUTTER
CONTROL
INPUT A
(Open) ON
(Close) OFF
(Open) ON
*1
(Close) OFF
ON
T4
TRIG. IN
OFF
[Output]
STANDBY
ON
T1
OFF
ON
REMOTE OUT
LASER OUT
SHUTTER
*2, *3
ALARM
(Active Low)
WARNING
(Active Low)
READY
OFF
ON
T2
OFF
(Open) ON
(Close) OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
T3
T3
T3
ON
OFF
MARKING
MARK END
ON
OFF
ON
T5
OFF
*1
*2
*3
*4
14
:
:
:
:
Shutter control input A is accepted and the shutter opens only when shutter control input B ON.
Shutter output signal has max. 1 sec. delay from each input signal for the shutter open / close operation time.
The operation behavior of Shutter 2 output on LP-Mxxx and LP-Sxxx-SF type is the same as Shutter output.
Turn off the key switch with the laser pumping turned off or with the shutter closed.
Item
Time
Remarks
T1
approx. 70 sec.
System Starting Time. Change to the remote mode after system start-up.
T2
about 20
seconds/about
15 seconds
The time from turning ON the pumping input to completion of pumping.
LP-Mxxx / LP-Sxxx / LP-Zxxx: about 20 seconds, LP-SxxxW: about 15 seconds
T3
―
1. When laser pumping is completed
Period for creating marking data. It varies depending on the quantity of data to be
marked.
2. When laser pumping is not completed
Period for creating marking data or period until the laser pumping is completed. The
longer one of the two above is employed.
T4
10ms or more
Keep the ON status for 10ms or more.
T5
2 to 510ms
This is a one-shot output. Set the one-shot time on the environment setting screen.
There is a small margin of error for the setting value.
Reference
• LP-Mxxx-S type requires the laser gate open / close control to operate the laser marker. Refer to “LP-M series Safety /
Setup / Maintenance Guide” for detail.
15
1-5-2 Safety Function Input (Laser Stop 1)
[Input]
ON
LASER IN
OFF
SHUTTER CONTROL
INPUT A
SHUTTER CONTROL
INPUT B
TRIG. IN
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
T2
ON
ALARM RES.
OFF
LASER STOP
INPUT 1
(Close) ON
(Open)
[Output]
OFF
ON
T3
OFF
ON
T4
READY
LASER OUT
OFF
(Open) ON
SHUTTER *1, *2
(Close) OFF
Marking Interrupted
ON
MARKING
OFF
ON
T1
MARK END
OFF
WARNING
(Active Low)
ON
ALARM
(Active Low)
ON
OFF
OFF
*1 : Shutter output signal has max. 1 sec. delay from each input signal for the shutter open / close operation time.
*2 : The operation behavior of Shutter 2 output on LP-Mxxx and LP-Sxxx-SF type is the same as Shutter output.
Item
Time
Remarks
T1
2 to 510ms
Even when the marking is interrupted due to the laser stop input, the mark end outputs.
This signal is a one-shot output. Set the one-shot time on the environment setting screen.
There is a margin for the setting value.
T2
100ms or more
Keep the ON status for 100ms or more.
T3
―
Period until the laser pumping is completed or period for creating marking data. The
longer one of the two above is employed.
T4
about 20 seconds/
about 15 seconds
The time from turning ON the laser pumping input to completion of pumping.
LP-Mxxx / LP-Sxxx / LP-Zxxx: about 20 seconds, LP-SxxxW: about 15 seconds
Reference
• If LASER STOP INPUT 1 is released when laser is not radiating, the shutter is closed keeping the laser pumping on.
(Warning status)
• If LASER STOP INPUT 1 is released when laser is radiating, the laser pumping is turned off, and the shutter is closed.
(Alarm status)
• For release method of alarm and warning, refer to “Release Method of Alarm” (P.180) and “Release Method of Warning”
(P.184), respectively.
16
1-5-3 Safety Function Input (Laser Stop 2)
[Input]
ON
LASER IN
OFF
SHUTTER CONTROL
INPUT A
ON
SHUTTER CONTROL
INPUT B
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
TRIG. IN
OFF
ON
ALARM RES.
T1
T1
T1
T2
T2
T3
T3
OFF
LASER STOP
INPUT 2A
LASER STOP
INPUT 2B
[Output]
(Close) ON
(Open) OFF
(Close) ON
(Open) OFF
ON
T2
READY
OFF
ON
LASER OUT
T3
OFF
SHUTTER *1, *2
(Open) ON
(Close) OFF
Marking
Interrupted
ON
MARKING
OFF
MARK END
ON
T4
OFF
ALARM
(Active Low)
ON
OFF
*1 : Shutter output signal has max. 1 sec. delay from each input signal for the shutter open / close operation time.
*2 : The operation behavior of Shutter 2 output on LP-Mxxx and LP-Sxxx-SF type is the same as Shutter output described
above.
Item
Time
Remarks
T1
100ms or more
Keep the ON status for 100ms or more.
T2
―
Period until the laser pumping is completed or period for creating marking data. The
longer one of the two above is employed.
T3
about 20 seconds/
about 15 seconds
The time from turning ON the laser pumping input to completion of pumping.
LP-Mxxx / LP-Sxxx / LP-Zxxx: about 20 seconds, LP-SxxxW: about 15 seconds
T4
2 to 510ms
Even when the marking is interrupted due to the laser stop input, the mark end outputs.
This signal is a one-shot output. Set the one-shot time on the environment setting screen.
There is a margin for the setting value.
Reference
• If LASER STOP INPUT 2 is released, the laser pumping is turned off and the shutter is closed, regardless of whether
or not the laser is radiating. (Alarm status)
• For release method of alarm, refer to “Release Method of Alarm” (P.180) .
17
1-5-4 Safety Function Input (Interlock)
[Input]
ON
LASER IN
OFF
SHUTTER CONTROL
INPUT A
ON
SHUTTER CONTROL
INPUT B
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
TRIG. IN
OFF
CLOSE
INTERLOCK
INPUT *1
OPEN
ON
ALARM RESET
INPUT
T1
T1
OFF
[Output]
ON
READY
T2
T2
T3
T3
OFF
ON
LASER OUT
OFF
SHUTTER *2, *3
(Open)
ON
(Close)
OFF
Marking Interrupted
ON
MARKING
OFF
ON
T4
MARK END
OFF
ALARM
(Active Low)
ON
OFF
*1 : Control Interlock 1 and 2 on LP-M series and LP-Sxxx-SF type with the same low as the Interlock input above described.
*2 : Shutter output signal has max. 1 sec. delay from each input signal for the shutter open / close operation time.
*3 : The operation behavior of Shutter 2 output on LP-Mxxx and LP-Sxxx-SF type is the same as Shutter output described above.
Item
Time
Remarks
T1
100ms or more
Keep the ON status for 100ms or more.
T2
―
Period until the laser pumping is completed or period for creating marking data. The
longer one of the two above is employed.
T3
about 20 seconds/
about 15 seconds
The time from turning ON the laser pumping input to completion of pumping.
LP-Mxxx / LP-Sxxx / LP-Zxxx: about 20 seconds, LP-SxxxW: about 15 seconds
T4
2 to 510ms
Even when the marking is interrupted due to the laser stop input, the mark end outputs.
This signal is a one-shot output. Set the one-shot time on the environment setting screen.
There is a margin for the setting value.
Reference
• If interlock is opened, the laser pumping is turned off and the shutter is closed, regardless of whether or not the laser is
radiating. (Alarm status)
• For release method of alarm, refer to “Release Method of Alarm” (P.180).
• For the detail of Interlock 1 and 2 on LP-M series and LP-Sxxx-SF type, refer to "Safety / Setup / Maintenance Guide".
18
Laser Marker Operation at Inputting the Safety Function
Safety Function
Laser Marker Operation *4
Release Method
Laser Stop1 *1
CLOSE to OPEN
[Laser stop1 input during laser emission]
• Laser Pumping: OFF
• Internal Shutter: CLOSE
• Status: Alarm E011 *2
Close Laser Stop1 and
input alarm reset.
[Laser stop1 input at non-emitting status]
• Laser Pumping: Hold ON
• Internal Shutter: CLOSE
• Status: Warning E811 *2
Close Laser Stop1.
The power supply of
laser source is shut down
through the internal circuit
by the software control.
Laser Stop 2
CLOSE to OPEN
• Laser Pumping: OFF
• Internal Shutter: CLOSE
• Status: Alarm E004 *2
Close Laser Stop2 and
input alarm reset.
Interlock Connector *3
CLOSE to OPEN
• Laser Pumping: OFF
• Internal Shutter: CLOSE
• Status: Alarm E260 *2
Push Emergency stop
switch
• Laser Pumping: OFF
• Internal Shutter: CLOSE
• Status: Alarm E002 *2
Close interlock connector The power supply of
and input alarm reset.
laser source is shut
down through the relay
operation by the hardware
control.
Push emergency stop
switch and input alarm
reset.
*1 : The operation behavior of Laser Stop 1 varies depending on the laser emission ON / OFF status.
(Inputting Laser Stop 2, Interlock and Emergency Stop Switch, regardless laser emission ON/OFF status, the laser is
powered OFF and the shutter is closed.)
*2 : Under the test marking mode or run mode when the shutter is closed (non-emitting status), the error does not occur.
*3 : The operation behavior of Interlock 1 and 2 on LP-M series and LP-Sxxx-SF type is the same as this Interlock.
*4 : The laser gate equipped on LP-Mxxx-S type, can be opened / closed only by the external signal control.
Construct the safety system to close the laser gate automatically using safety PLC etc., when the safety function is
input or the laser marker is in the alarm or warning status.
19
MEMO
20
2 Basics of Serial Communication
(RS-232/Ethernet)
2-1 Before the Serial Communication Control
With the serial communication (RS-232C or Ethernet) the laser marker can be controlled externally. This section describes
the external control method using the serial communication.
Flow
1. Check DIP Switch.
When "Laser Pumping", "Shutter Control" and "Guide Laser Control" are controlled by serial communication,
check that the No.2 DIP switch is in the ON position.
When "Laser Pumping", "Shutter Control" and "Guide Laser Control" are controlled by I/O, turn OFF the No.2
DIP switch.
2. Turn on the power switch for external device.
3. Turn ON the key switch of laser marker.
4. Coordinate the communication conditions between
laser marker and external device.
“2-2 Connection for Serial Communication” (P.23)
5. Set Remote Mode
“1-3 Shift to Remote Mode” (P.12).
6. Externally control the laser marker.
Control the laser marker in accordance with the description in this section.
Reference
• For communication with external devices, select either RS-232C or Ethernet port. (They cannot be used at the same
time, or switched.) The tab selected in the environment setting screen indicates the valid communication port.
Combined Control by Serial Communication and I/O
• The control method for "Laser Control", "Shutter Control", and "Guide Laser Control" should be selected from either the
serial communication or I/O. Turn the No.2 DIP switch on the back surface of controller before turning on the power to
select the control (serial communication or I/O).
• Those commands can be used only when the DIP switch No.2 is set to ON:
Laser pumping(LSR), Shutter(SHT), Guide LD indication(GID), Laser check radiation(SPT), Test marking(TST), Laser
power measurement(PWM), Power check (PWR)
22
2-2 Connection for Serial Communication
To control the laser marker externally by using communication command, RS-232C or Ethernet can be used.
Reference
• For communication with external devices, select either RS-232C or Ethernet port. (They cannot be used at the same
time, or switched.) The port selected in the environment setting screen indicates the valid communication port. For
details of the environment setting screen, please refer to the Operation Manual.
2-2-1 RS-232C
⿎ Interface speciications and connection
To control laser marker by communication command with RS-232C, connect the RS-232C port on the rear of the controller
to the external control device.
1
Laser marker
controller side
(male)
5
The connector shape is common to RETURN OUT and RS-232C.
6
9
Laser Marker Side Connector Type
User Side Connector Type
[Recommended accessory] User Side Connector
[Recommended accessory] User Side Connector Cover
:
:
:
:
Male D-sub 9 pin (No. 4-40UNC-inch screw, female)
Female D-sub 9 pin (No. 4-40UNC-inch screw, male)
17JE-13090-02(D1)
DDK Ltd.
17JE-09H-1C4-CF or 17JE-09H-1C-CF
Terminal No.
Signal
Function
1*
DCD (CD)
Carrier detection
2
RXD (RD)
Receiving data: Connect TXD (SD) of the external control device.
3
TXD (SD)
Transmission data: Connect RXD (RD) of the external control device.
4*
DTR (ER)
Data terminal ready
5
GND (SG)
Signal ground: Connect GND (SG) of the external control device.
6*
DSR (DR)
Data set ready
7*
RTS (RS)
Transmission request
8*
CTS (CS)
Clear to send
9*
RI (CI)
Ring indicator
* Not used on laser marker
Reference
• The signal “GND” of RS-232C connector is common to the body of the laser marker.
23
⿎ RS-232C Communication conditions
Connector (laser marker side)
D-sub 9-pin, male
Synchro system
Start-stop method
Communication
Full-duplex transmission
Stop Bit
1 bit / 2 bit
Data Length
8-bit ixed
Baud Rate
1200 / 2400 / 4800 / 9600 / 19200 / 38400 bps
Parity
None / Even / Odd
Check Sum
OFF / ON
Delimiter
CR+LF / CR
Reception timer
Timeout monitoring (10 sec)
⿎ Communication Condition Setting
Set the communication conditions of the laser marker in the
environment setting screen. Refer to the operation manual.
Default settings are as follows:
• Baud Rate: 9600 bps
• Parity: None
• Stop Bits: 1 bit
• Delimit: CR
• Check Sum: None
⿎ Connecting to external control devices
• Connect only 3 signals of RXD, TXD and GND and do not use other signals on the laser marker side.
• The external controller may need a signal line connection (loop back line) other than RXD, TXD, or GND on the
external control device side depending on the speciications of the external control device. Read the instruction manual
of the external control device and connect it to the laser marker appropriately.
• To connect the laser marker to the PC for control, use a commercially available RS-232C cross cable (9-pin).
• In case of connecting to PLC, a type of the cable (straight or cross) differs depending on a manufacturer or a model.
Please follow the PLC manual.
Connection example
RS-232C Connector
(Laser Marker)
External Controller
Terminal No. Signal
2
3
5
Signal Terminal No.
RXD
TXD
GND
*
RXD
TXD
GND
DCD
DTR
DSR
RTS
CTS
2
3
5
1
4
6
7
8
* The loop back wiring on the external control device side shown in the above igure is just an example. The wiring
method varies depending on the speciications of each external control device. Read the instruction manual of the
external control device and connect it to the laser marker appropriately.
24
2-2-2 Ethernet
⿎ Port speciications
When Ethernet perform communication control of the laser marker, use an Ethernet port.
Green LED
Orange LED
Connector Type: RJ-45 8-pole connector
Light color
Description
Green
The indicator lights up while connected normally. It blinks during communication.
Orange
The indicator lights up only when baud rate is 1,000 megabits (1 gigabit) per second.
Reference
• Although the cable length between the devices is speciied as 100 m at maximum in the Ethernet standard, use of
cable length below 10 m is recommended to avoid communication failure caused by noise and device malfunction.
⿎ Ethernet Communication conditions
Communication protocol
TCP/IP
Connector
RJ-45 8-pole connector
Standard
IEEE802.3ab (1000BASE-T)/IEEE802.3u (100BASE-TX)/IEEE802.3 (10BASE-T)
Applicable cable
Category 5e or higher
To connect an external device and the laser marker directly : Cross cable
To connect an external device and the laser marker one to many by using a HUB or a router :
Straight cable
Applicable HUB (or router) Compatible with 1000BASE-T / 100BASE-TX / 10BASE-T
IP Address
1.0.0.0 to 223.255.255.255 (except 127 in the 1st octet) [Initial Value: 192.168.1.5]
Subnet Mask
128.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.254 [Initial Value: 255.255.255.0]
Default Gateway
1.0.0.0 to 223.255.255.255 (except 127 in the 1st octet) [Initial Value: None (blank)]
Port
1025 to 65534 (except 9090) [Initial Value: 9094]
Reception timer
Timeout monitoring (10 sec)
25
⿎ Communication Condition Setting
Set the communication conditions of the laser marker in the
environment setting screen. Refer to the operation manual.
Default settings are as follows:
• IP Address: 192.168.1.5
• Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0
• Default Gateway: None
• Port: 9094
Reference
• The communication control of the laser marker through the Ethernet should be performed in a secure network
environment.
• Depending on the combination, there are cases where IP Address and Subnet Mask values cannot be set even if they
are within the setting range.
• Make sure that the IP address for the laser marker on the network is not overlapping the IP address for the PC.
Otherwise, a system error with below message occurs.
26
⿎ Connecting to external control devices
<To connect an external device and the laser marker directly one to one>
Use a Category 5e or higher cross cable for connection.
Cross cable
External control device
Laser marker controller
<To connect an external device and the laser marker one to many through a HUB or a router >
Use a HUB (or a router) that supports 1000BASE-T/100BASE-TX/10BASE-T and Category 5e or higher straight cables for
connection.
PC
Straight cable
HUB (or router)
Laser marker controllers
(connected more than one unit)
Example of communication environment setting:
Make sure that the IP address for the laser marker on the network is not overlapping the IP address for the PC.
IP Address
PC
Laser Marker A
Laser Marker B
Laser Marker C
Laser Marker D
192.168.1.10
192.168.1.5
192.168.1.6
192.168.1.7
192.168.1.8
9094
9094
Subnet Mask
255.255.255.0
Default Gateway
Port
None
-
9094
9094
27
2-3 Command Reception Condition
Command Reception Permission
When transmitting the communication command including an action to update the laser marker data, commands are
refused in the marking ready ON status or the shutter open. If "reception mode ON" is set for "command reception
permission (MKM command)" before transmitting a command, marking ready is set to OFF and commands get acceptable.
Set "reception mode OFF" for "command reception permission (MKM command)" to set marking ready ON before marking.
Reference
• Commands are acceptable by closing the shutter instead of “command reception permission (MKM command)”.
However, it is recommended to use the “command reception permission (MKM command)” when the number of open
and close of the shutter is a lot.
• The command reception permission (MKM command) does not include actual opening/closing operation of the shutter.
Commands Acceptable only with Shutter Closed
(Unacceptable commands when "reception mode ON" is set for command reception permission (MKM command))
• Laser power measurement (PWM)
• Power check (PWR)
• Test marking (TST)
Commands that do not need the Command Reception Permission (MKM Command)
The following commands can be transmitted while the shutter is opened.
(There is no need to set "reception mode ON" for "command reception permission (MKM command)".
• File change (speciied with a number) (FNO)
• File change (speciied with a comment) (FNN)
• Shutter (close only) (SHT)
• Command reception permission (MKM)
• Laser pumping (LSR)
• Counter reset (CTR)
• Status request (STS)
• Marking trigger (MRK)
• Serial offset (SEO)
• Serial data input (SIN)
Commands acceptable during warning/alarm occurrence
The laser marker accepts only the following commands while an alarm or warning occurs.
• Alarm
Status request (STS)
• Warning
Status request (STS)
Shutter (close only) (SHT)
Command reception permission (MKM) (reception mode ON and reception mode readout)
Reference
• The laser marker should be in the remote status when controlling it by serial communication.
• The Shutter (SHT) command is not acceptable when the No.2 DIP switch on the back surface of controller is turned to
OFF.
• To release the warning (except error codes E800 to E811) by serial communication control, close the internal shutter
by Shutter (SHT) command or set the “command reception mode ON” by Command reception permission (MKM)
command, and remove the cause of warning.
• An alarm can not be released by serial communication control.
28
2-4 Connection Check
Flow
Check the connection between laser marker and external control device if they are correctly connected.
1. Turn on the power switch for external device.
2. Turn ON the key switch of laser marker.
3. Coordinate the communication conditions between
laser marker and external device.
Refer to “2-2 Connection for Serial Communication” (P.23)
4. Shift to remote mode.
Refer to "1-3 Shift to Remote Mode" (P.12) in detail.
5. Transmit the “File No. Change (code: FNO)” command.
Start Code
(Fixed)
STX
Command Code
File No. Change
FNO
02
46 4E 4F
Sub Command
Data Setting or
Operation
S
53
Data
File No.
2047
Check Sum
*1
Delimiter *2
Data End Identiication
Code
CR+LF
32 30 34 37
30 35
0D 0A (HEX)
6. Check the response from laser marker.
The laser marker sends the response data ACK or NAK when the connection to external device is correctly
performed.
(Response data: Normal)
ACK
00
Check Sum
Delimiter
06
30 30
36 36
0D 0A (HEX)
Response Code
Check Sum
(Response data: Abnormal)
NAK
15
Delimiter
0D 0A (HEX)
*1 Check sum (Can be speciied only in case of RS-232C.)
In check sum, the characters from start code to data end are converted to the code by hexadecimal numeral (binary) by
ASCII code chart to add them.
02(HEX) + 46(HEX) + 4E(HEX) + 4F(HEX) + 53(HEX) + 32(HEX) + 30(HEX) + 34(HEX) + 37(HEX) = 205(HEX)
Lower two characters (lower 1-byte) = 05(HEX)
This is indicated 30 35(HEX) by two characters for ASCII code.
*2 Delimiter ... Select [CR] or [CR+LF] in case of RS-232C. [CR] is ixed in case of Ethernet.
Reference
• The laser marker does not send a response data if the connection is wrong. Check the connecting procedures 1 to 5
again.
29
2-5 Control Sample
This paragraph gives the sample of low chart for control of laser marker by serial communication.
Remote control ON
1
Laser pumping (ON)
LSR command
2
Marking character string setting MCS command or STR command
3
General condition setting ALC command
4
Character condition setting
STC command
5
Laser power setting
LPW command
6
Scan speed setting
SSP command
7
Shutter (open) setting
SHT command
8
Status request
STS command
No
The interval between "1 Laser
pumping ON" and "9 Marking
trigger" should be about 20
seconds or more with the
LP-Mxxx / LP-Sxxx / LP-Zxxx
type, and about 15 seconds or
more with the LP-SxxxW type.
Send STS command
again after a while.
“READY”: ON
Yes
9
Marking trigger
Change setting contents
MRK command
Changes
the setting.
Completes
the setting.
10 Command reception mode ON
MKM command
11 Various conditions setting Various command
12 Command reception mode OFF MKM command
13
Shutter setting (close)
SHT command
14
Laser pumping (OFF)
LSR command
When "10. Command reception
mode ON" is transmitted, the
commands unacceptable during
shutter open become settable and
various conditions can be set.
After setting various conditions, set
marking ready ON by "12.
Command reception mode OFF".
Remote control OFF
Reference
• For LP-Mxxx-S type, open the laser gate to turn ON the ready signal.
Laser gate can be controlled with any timing regardless of the command sequence by the external signal input.
30
Control Sample 1-1 : Changing the marking characters
Remote control ON
1
Laser pumping (ON)
2
command
Marking character string setting or MCS
STR command
3
Shutter setting (open)
SHT command
4
Status request
STS command
LSR command
Send the character
to be marked.
Send STS command
again after a while.
No
“READY”: ON
Yes
5
Marking trigger
Marks same
character.
MRK command
Changes the character
to be marked.
Changes the
character.
Completes
marking
6
Command reception mode ON
7
command
Marking character string setting or MCS
STR command
8
Command reception mode OFF MKM command
Shutter setting (close)
SHT command
10 Laser pumping (OFF)
LSR command
9
Remote control OFF
MKM command
* To memorize the last marked
character into the laser marker,
save it with “File Overwriting
Registration (FOR)”.
Reference
• Other than STR and MCS command, SIN command can be used for changing character of marking command. SIN
command is recommended to use in case faster processing is required.
• For LP-Mxxx-S type, open the laser gate to turn ON the ready signal.
Laser gate can be controlled with any timing regardless of the command sequence by the external signal input.
31
Control Sample 1-2: Changing the marking characters for each marking
Remote control ON
１ Laser pumping (ON)
LSR command
２ Select file No.
FNO command
３ Shutter setting (open)
SHT command
Select the file in that Serial data marking function is set.
*Before sending SIN data, keep 20 sec. (LP-Mxxx / LP-Sxxx / LP-Zxxx) or 15 sec. (LP-SxxxW)
after turnig ON the laser pumping, and 1 sec. after the opening shutter.
4 Serial Data Input
5
SIN command
Status request
STS command
No
“READY”: ON
Send STS command
again after a while.
*"READY" will turn ON after the SIN command reception.
Yes
6
Send the character data to be marked.
Marking trigger
MRK command
Changes the
character.
“READY”: OFF
Completes
marking
7 Serial Data Input
7 Shutter setting (close)
SHT command
8 Laser pumping (OFF)
LSR command
SIN command
Remote control OFF
Reference
• For using this command, set “serial data” of function characters at setting screen beforehand.
• When using this function (serial data), transmit this command by every marking. Otherwise it does not become marking
ready condition, and marking is not available.
• Only when the internal shutter is opened during the remote control, the serial data can be transmitted to the laser
marker.
• When transmit this command without any data, marking ready become ON, then nothing to be marked with serial data
input.
• For resetting the data, set the “reception mode ON” for command reception permission (MKM command) or close the
shutter.
• For LP-Mxxx-S type, open the laser gate to turn ON the ready signal.
Laser gate can be controlled with any timing regardless of the command sequence by the external signal input.
32
Control Sample 2 : Changing the marking iles
Remote control ON
1
Laser pumping (ON)
LSR command
2
Change File No.
FNO command
3
Shutter setting (open)
SHT command
4
Status request
STS command
No
Send STS command
again after a while.
“READY”: ON
Yes
5
Marking trigger
Marks same
file.
MRK command
Changes the
file.
Changes the file
to be marked.
Completes
marking
6
Change File No.
7
Shutter setting (close)
SHT command
8
Laser pumping (OFF)
LSR command
FNO command
Remote control OFF
Reference
• For LP-Mxxx-S type, open the laser gate to turn ON the ready signal.
Laser gate can be controlled with any timing regardless of the command sequence by the external signal input.
33
2-6 Communication Data Format
Use the ASCII code basically and the shift JIS code partially as characters for communication when controlling the laser
marker by external device.
The characters (or character strings) enclosed with double quotation marks (“ ”) in the description below indicates that
they uses the ASCII code.
When using the shift JIS code, it is described in each case.
2-6-1 Command Data
The word “command” means the instruction which is sent to the laser marker from external device. Command data is
created with the speciied format. Remote control of laser marker or execution of speciied procedures are possible by
sending the command data to laser marker.
• Command data format
Start Code
Single Character
Command
Three Characters
Sub Command
Single Character
Data
Variable length
Check Sum
Two Characters
Delimiter
Two Characters/
Single Character
Head
End
Code
Description
Start Code
A start code is a code to identify the data head. STX (code: 02(HEX)) ixed.
Command
A command is speciied with three characters. Refer to “3 Communication Command and
Function” (P.41)
Sub Command
A sub command is an instruction of setting/readout complementary added to a command.
Speciies one of the characters below.
“S”…Data setting or operation (Set)
“R”…Readout of setting data (Read)
(Note) “S” or “R” cannot be selected for some commands.
Data
Data speciied per command
The content to be speciied varies per command. Refer to “3 Communication Command
and Function” (P.41)
Check Sum *1
Check sum indicates the lower 1-byte of adding result of value (binary) from the start code
to the last data by converting it to two characters by ASCII code.
Where the command is “ABC”, sub command is “S” and data is “000”
02(HEX)+41(HEX)+42(HEX)+43(HEX)+53(HEX)+30(HEX)+30(HEX)+30(HEX)=1AB(H
EX)
AB(HEX), the lower 1-byte of 1AB(HEX) is converted to 41(HEX)+42(HEX) to two
characters by ASCII code.
ON/OFF of check sum can be selected on the environment setting of laser marker.
Refer to Operation Manual for the details.
Delimiter *2
Delimiter is a code to identify the end of data.
CR+LF (0D(HEX) 0A(HEX)) or CR(0D(HEX)).
Selects CR+LF or CR on the console. Refer to Operation Manual for the details.
*1 : A check sum can be added in case of RS-232C.
*2 : You can select [CR] or [CR+LF] for a delimiter in case of RS-232C. [CR] is ixed in case of Ethernet.
Reference
• The laser marker recognizes the data from the start code (STX) to the delimiter (CR or CR+LF) as one command data.
If there exists an unnecessary character string before the start code or after the delimiter, it is ignored (neither an
abnormal response data is returned).
• When using the external device set by 2byte, NUL(00 (HEX)) can be used.
• Add to NUL before STX or after delimiter.
34
2-6-2 Response Data
Response data is data which is returned from the laser marker for the command sent by an external device and consists of
the following three types.
1. Response data for normal receiving
The data starts with the start code “ACK”. It returns when the command transmitted is normal or the command
processing has been completed normally.
2. Response data for abnormal receiving
The data starts with the start code “NAK”. It returns when the command transmitted is abnormal or the command
processing has been completed abnormally.
3. Readout data
The data starts with the start code “STX”. It returns when the command transmitted is normal and the sub command
is speciied to "R".
• Response data format for normal receiving
Start Code
Single Character
Response Code
Two Characters
Head
Check Sum
Two Characters
Delimiter
Two Characters/
Single Character
End
Code
Description
Start Code
ACK (code: 06(HEX)) ixed. A start code is a code to identify the data head and to indicate
that the data is a response data for normal receiving.
Response Code
Two characters "00" is returned if the start code is ACK.
Check Sum *1
Check sum indicates the lower 1-byte of adding result of value (binary) from the start code
to the response code by converting it to two characters by ASCII code.
(ex): 06(HEX)+30(HEX)+30(HEX)=66(HEX)
66(HEX) is converted to 36(HEX)+36(HEX), to two characters by ASCII code.
ON/OFF of check sum can be selected on the environment setting of laser marker.
Refer to Operation Manual for the details.
Delimiter *2
Delimiter is a code to identify the end of data.
CR+LF (0D(HEX) 0A(HEX)) or CR(0D(HEX)).
Selects CR+LF or CR on the console. Refer to Operation Manual for the details.
*1 : A check sum can be added in case of RS-232C.
*2 : You can select [CR] or [CR+LF] for a delimiter in case of RS-232C. [CR] is ixed in case of Ethernet.
35
• Response data format for abnormal receiving
Start Code
Single Character
Response Code
Two Characters
Head
Check Sum
Two Characters
Delimiter
Two Characters/
Single Character
End
Code
Description
Start Code
NAK (code: 15(HEX)) ixed. A start code is a code to identify the data head and to indicate
that the data is a response data for abnormal receiving.
Response Code
Two characters is returned if the start code is NAK.
"01"…Inappropriate STX has been received.
"02"…Inappropriate delimiter has been received.
"03"…Unacceptable command because the shutter is opened or "command reception
mode ON" is not set for the MKM command
"04"…No applicable command
"05"…Incorrect check sum
"06"…Incorrect length of receiving data
"07"…Unacceptable command due to priority of input terminal
"08"…Incorrect sub command
"09"…Incorrect receiving data
"10"…Alarm or warning occurs
"11"…Serial data input is not acceptable because of following conditions.
• Internal shutter status is close
• Transmitting Serial data input twice or more to the same number of serial data
• No setting of Serial data input (command: SIN) on character string
"12"…The ile cannot be saved due to lack of capacity in the lash disk
"14"…This command is not supported with the LP-F10/LP-F10W mode.
"15"…This function or setting value is not supported with the LP-F10/LP-F10W mode.
"99"…Others
Check Sum *1
Check sum indicates the lower 1-byte of adding result of value (binary) from the start code
to the response code by converting it to two characters by ASCII code.
(ex): where the response code is "20",
15(HEX)+32(HEX)+30(HEX)=77(HEX)
77(HEX) is converted to 37(HEX)+37(HEX), to two characters by ASCII code.
ON/OFF of check sum can be selected on the environment setting of laser marker.
Refer to Operation Manual for the details.
Delimiter *2
Delimiter is a code to identify the end of data.
CR+LF (0D(HEX) 0A(HEX)) or CR(0D(HEX)).
Selects CR+LF or CR on the console. Refer to Operation Manual for the details.
*1 : A check sum can be added in case of RS-232C.
*2 : You can select [CR] or [CR+LF] for a delimiter in case of RS-232C. [CR] is ixed in case of Ethernet.
36
• Readout data format
Start Code
Single Character
Command
Three Characters
Sub Command
Single Character
Data
Variable length
Check Sum
Two Characters
Delimiter
Two Characters/
Single Character
Head
End
Code
Description
Start Code
A start code is a code to identify the data head. STX(code:02(HEX)) ixed.
Command
A command is speciied with three characters. Refer to “3 Communication Command and
Function” (P.41)
Sub Command
A sub command is an instruction of setting/readout complementary added to a command.
Speciies one of the characters below.
“S”…Data setting or operation (Set)
“R”…Readout of setting data (Read)
(Note) “S” or “R” cannot be selected for some commands.
Data
Data speciied per command
The content to be speciied varies per command. Refer to “3 Communication Command
and Function” (P.41)
Check Sum *1
Check sum indicates the lower 1-byte of adding result of value (binary) from the start code
to the last data by converting it to two characters by ASCII code.
ex): where the command is “ABC”, sub command is “A” and data is “000”
02(HEX)+41(HEX)+42(HEX)+43(HEX)+41(HEX)+30(HEX)+30(HEX)+30(HEX)=199(HEX)
99(HEX), the lower 1-byte of 199(HEX) is converted to 39(HEX)+39(HEX), to two
characters by ASCII code.
ON/OFF of check sum can be selected on the environment setting of laser marker.
Refer to Operation Manual for the details.
Delimiter *2
Delimiter is a code to identify the end of data.
CR+LF (0D(HEX) 0A(HEX)) or CR(0D(HEX)).
Selects CR+LF or CR on the console. Refer to Operation Manual for the details.
*1 : A check sum can be added in case of RS-232C.
*2 : You can select [CR] or [CR+LF] for a delimiter in case of RS-232C. [CR] is ixed in case of Ethernet.
37
2-7 Communication Sequence
The communication sequence of this product mainly consists of the sequence where the laser marker transmits the
response data for the (command) data requested from external devices.
As an exception, the laser marker transmits the response data automatically if you have set the response permission of the
marking end veriication (MST) command.
⿎ Reception timeout
The time-out duration of this product is set to 10 seconds from receiving the telegraphic message from the head till the end
transmitted from the external device.
If a reception timeout occurs, the telegraphic message transmitted will be discarded and the laser marker will not transmit
the response data.
To resume the communication, transmit the correct telegraphic message once again.
⿎ Communication sequence of setting/readout request data
When the requested data was received normally from the external device, the laser marker transmits response data for
normal receiving to the setting request data and transmits readout data to the readout request data.
After sending the command, conirm the response data from the laser marker. Do not send the next command until
receiving the response.
External device
Laser marker
Command (setting request data)
Send
Response for normal receiving (ACK)
Receive
Command (readout request data)
Send
Readout response
Receive
Receive
Send
Receive
Send
⿎ Communication sequence when the request data for setting/readout cannot be accepted
When the request data transmitted from the external device to the laser marker are not acceptable, the laser marker
transmits response data for abnormal receiving.
External device
Send
Receive
38
Laser marker
Command (setting/readout request data)
Response for abnormal receiving (NAK)
Receive
Send
Communication sequence at transmission prohibition/permission for marking status
Generally in the communication sequence, “the laser marker returns the response to the command from external device”.
However, the marking operation (mark end or warning under some marking conditions) timing of the laser marker can be
checked from the laser marker when the Marking Status Sending Enable is set to on (“3 Communication Command and
Function” (P.41)).
• Communication sequence where “transmission prohibited” is set for marking status sending enable command
External Device
Laser Marker
Marking Status Sending Enable Command
(Specify Transmission Prohibited)
Normal Receiving Response (ACK)
Shutter (Shutter Open) Command
Normal Receiving Response (ACK)
Marking Trigger Command
Normal Receiving Response (ACK)
The next
command
transmission may
be restricted
during marking
operation.
Warning occured
according to the
setting of marking
condition during
marking
operation.
Shutter (Shutter Close) Command
Normal Receiving Response (ACK)
• Communication sequence where “transmission permitted” is set for marking status sending enable command
External Device
Laser Marker
Marking Status Sending Enable Command
(Specify Transmission Permitted)
Normal Receiving Response (ACK)
Shutter (Shutter Open) Command
Normal Receiving Response (ACK)
Marking Trigger Command
Normal Receiving Response (ACK)
The next
command is
transmitted,
waiting the
marking status
from laser
Marking is being
performed.
Marking Status Response
(Marking Completer Normally)
Marking Trigger Command
Normal Receiving Response (ACK)
In case of occurring
alarm or warning*
Marking Status Response (Error Code)
Shutter (Shutter Close) Command
Normal Receiving Response (ACK)
*When the alarm or warning occurs before Marking Trigger receipt, Marking Status Response (Error Code) is sent to the
external devices at the timing of the error generation.
39
MEMO
40
3 Communication Command and
Function
3-1 Command at standard mode
3-1-1 Command List
Character Input
File
Operation Control
Category
42
Name
Code
Function
Description
Command Reception
Permission
MKM
Controls the reception permission (reception mode
ON/OFF) for setting and readout of communication
commands.
P.46
Laser Pumping
LSR
Controls the laser pumping ON/OFF.
P.46
Shutter
SHT
Controls the internal shutter opening/closing.
P.47
Status request
STS
Requires the operation status of laser marker, such
as ready status and error occurrence status.
P.47
Marking Status Sending
Permission
MST
Enables automatic response of marking result (e.g.
normal end, and error occurrence, etc.) at the end of
marking.
P.48
Marking Trigger
MRK
Inputs marking trigger (laser radiation startup
trigger).
P.49
Guide LD Display
GID
Controls radiation of red guide laser for marking
position conirmation.
P.49
File Change (No. Speciied)
FNO
Speciies the ile No. to change the ile.
P.50
File Change (Comment
Speciied)
FNN
Speciies the ile name (comment) to change the ile.
P.50
File Overwriting Registration
FOR
Overwrite and register the ile under editing.
P.50
File Registration
FRG
Register the ile under editing to the speciied No.
P.51
File Name
FNM
Sets name (comment) of ile under editing.
P.51
Marking Character String
(ASCII Code Speciied)
MCS
Sets the marking character string by ASCII code.
(For alphanumeric characters only)
P.52
Marking Character String
(Shift JIS Code Speciied)
STR
Sets the marking character string by shift JIS code.
(For characters including KANA, KANJI and function
characters)
P.52
Serial Data Input
SIN
Sets the character string speciied for "Serial Data
Function" to change characters for each marking.
P.54
Rank Condition
RKC
Sets input conditions of "Rank Function" to switch
characters using I/O input.
P.56
Rank Character String
RKS
Sets character string used for "Rank Function" to
switch characters using I/O input.
P.56
Processing
Logo
(Image Data)
Bar Code / 2D Code
Function Character
Category
Name
Code
Function
Description
Counter Condition
CNT
Sets the counter conditions.
P.57
Counter Reset
CTR
Resets the current counter value to the initial value.
P.58
Expiry Date/Time Condition
LMT
Sets the expiry date/time condition.
P.59
Lot Condition
LTC
Sets the condition of "Lot Function" to change
characters depending on date/time and counter
values.
P.59
Lot Character String
LTS
Sets the character string used for "Lot Function"
to change characters depending on date/time and
counter values.
P.60
Bar Code Marking Data
(ASCII Code Speciied)
BCS
Sets character string to be encoded as a bar code
or 2D code by ASCII code. (For alphanumeric
characters only)
P.61
Bar Code Marking Data
(Shift JIS Code Speciied)
BRS
Sets character string to be encoded as a bar code or
2D code by shift JIS code. (For characters including
control code, KANA, KANJI and function characters)
P.62
Bar Code Marking Condition
BRF
Sets the marking condition for bar code and 2D
code.
P.63
Human Readable Text
BRV
Sets the marking condition for the Human Readable
Text to be added to a bar code or 2D code.
P.72
Bar Code Common
Condition
BCC
Sets the marking pitch and direction of the bar code,
and 2D code skip marking.
P.74
2D Code Pattern
BRP
Sets 2D code module marking pattern.
P.75
Logo File
CDF
Sets the logo ile.
P.76
VEC Logo Conditions
CDC
Sets the marking condition of VEC (work shape
converted for laser marker) logo ile.
P.77
DXF Logo Conditions
CDD
Sets the marking condition of DXF logo ile.
P.78
Processing Element
FIG
Sets the processing element type (straight line,
circle, arc) and coordinates.
P.79
Processing Condition
LAY
Sets X/Y coordinate offset and laser power
correction ratio, etc. for the speciied processing
condition No.
P.82
Arbitrary Point Radiation
Coordinate and Time
PRD
Sets arbitrary point radiation X/Y coordinates,
radiation time and laser power correction ratio.
P.83
Arbitrary Point Radiation
Conditions
PRF
Sets X/Y coordinate offset and laser power
correction ratio, etc. for the speciied arbitrary point
radiation condition.
P.84
43
Laser Condition
Layout / Position Adjustment
Category
44
Name
Code
Function
Description
General Condition
ALC
Sets the conditions related to whole ile.
P.85
Character Condition
(Shorted Form)
SPC
Sets the condition for marking character string per
line.
(X/Y coordinates and laser power correction ratio
only)
P.86
Character Conditions
STC
Sets the condition for marking character string per
line.
P.87
Common Character
Condition
SCC
Sets the marking pitch for bold character and kerning
for marking proportional character.
P.90
Layer Condition
[LP-Mxxx / LP-Zxxx only]
SUF
Sets the layer condition for 3D marking for LP-M /
LP-Z series.
P.91
Serial Offset
SEO
Sets the coordinates speciied for "Serial Offset
Function" to change coordinates for each marking.
P.94
External Offset Condition
OFC
Sets input conditions of "External Offset Function" to
switch coordinates using I/O input.
P.96
External Offset Coordinates
OFS
Sets offset coordinates used for "External Offset
Function" to switch coordinates using I/O input.
P.96
Step & Repeat Condition
SRC
Sets the condition of "Step & Repeat" to mark the
same marking contents on multiple locations in one
ile.
P.97
Step & Repeat FineAdjustment
SRA
Sets the ine adjustment of "Step & Repeat" to mark
the same marking contents on multiple locations in
one ile.
P.98
Laser Power
LPW
Sets the laser power.
P.100
Scan Speed
SSP
Sets the scan speed of the laser.
P.100
Laser Pulse Cycle
[LP-Mxxx / LP-Sxxx / LPZxxx only]
MPL
Sets the marking pulse cycle of laser.
P.101
Line Width
WDC
Sets the width necessary to avoid crossing at
marking intersection.
P.102
Marking Quality Adjustment
WTC
Sets laser start point, end point, edge and curve
adjustments, etc.
P.103
Work Distance
[LP-SxxxW only]
WRD
Sets the Work Distance.
P.104
Environment
Maintenance
Flying Object
Category
Name
Code
Function
Description
Trigger Condition
[LP-Mxxx / LP-Sxxx / LPZxxx only]
TRG
Sets the lying object/static object marking, and the
condition of lying object.
P.104
Delay
DLY
Sets the delay time and distance from trigger input
to marking startup.
P.105
Marking Interval
[LP-Mxxx / LP-Sxxx / LPZxxx only]
INT
Sets the marking interval (distance) in "Equidistant
Marking" setting for lying object marking.
P.106
Flying Object Wait
[LP-Mxxx / LP-Sxxx / LPZxxx only]
MWT
Sets the waiting time for marking corresponding to
the line speed for lying object marking.
P.106
Line Speed
[LP-Mxxx / LP-Sxxx / LPZxxx only]
LSP
Sets the line speed in lying object marking.
P.107
Encoder Signal
[LP-Mxxx / LP-Sxxx / LPZxxx only]
ENC
Sets the encoder pulse value for use of the encoder
in lying object marking.
P.107
Laser power measurement
[LP-M5xx / LP-M2xx / LPSxxx only]
PWM
Measures the current laser power value [W] and the
rate [%] compared to the default setting.
P.108
Power Check
[LP-Zxxx/ LP-SxxxW only]
PWR
Measures the current power ratio [%] in comparison
with the default laser power.
P.110
Low Power Detect Level
[LP-M5xx / LP-M2xx / LPSxxx / LP-SxxxW only]
PWL
Sets thresholds for determination of whether the
result of the power measurement or the power check
is in the normal range.
P.112
Marking Energy Indicating
[LP-Mxxx / LP-Sxxx only]
MEM
Displays the measurement results of marking
energy[mJ] and time on the setting screen when Test
Marking is inished.
P.112
Marking Energy Range
[LP-Mxxx / LP-Sxxx only]
MEN
Sets thresholds for determination of whether the
result of marking energy measurement is in the
normal range.
P.113
Test Marking
[LP-Mxxx / LP-Sxxx only]
TST
Performs the test marking and measures the
marking energy [mJ] and period.
P.114
Laser Check Radiation
SPT
Controls "Laser Check Radiation" for laser radiation
at the center of the marking area.
P.115
Year/Month/Date/Time
YMD
Sets year, month, date, time for system.
P.116
Era Year
ERA
Sets era year.
P.116
Week Setting
WKM
Sets the update timing of week number and sets the
deinition of the irst week of the year.
P.117
I/O Environment
ENV
Sets the operating environment of the input/output
terminal.
P.117
45
3-1-2 Command Description
Reference
• The laser marker sends a response data after setting/readout command is transmitted. Refer to “2-6 Communication
Data Format” (P.34)
Command Reception Permission (Code: MKM)
Controls the reception permission (reception mode ON/OFF) for setting and readout of communication commands.
• Setting / Readout data of command reception mode
STX
MKM
Sub
Command
[Command reception mode]
1-byte
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Sub command is "S" at the time of setting and "A" for response data at the time of readout.
• Readout request of command reception mode
STX
MKM
R
(Check Sum)
Data Length
[byte]
Name
Command reception mode
1
Delimiter
Outline
Description
In the shutter open or marking ready ON status, set
"reception mode ON" when transmitting the communication command including an action to update the laser marker data. To resume the ready ON status after
command transmission, set "reception mode OFF".
“0”…Reception mode ON (Start
command reception in the
marking ready OFF status)
“1”…Reception mode OFF
(Finish command reception and resume
the marking ready ON
status)
Reference
• For details on command reception permission, refer to "3-1-6 Command Reception Condition" on page 54.
Laser Pumping (Code: LSR)
Controls the laser pumping ON/OFF.
• Setting / Readout data of laser pumping
STX
LSR
Sub
Command
[Laser Pumping]
1-byte
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Sub command is "S" at the time of setting and "A" for response data at the time of readout.
• Readout request of laser pumping state
STX
LSR
R
Name
Data Length
[byte]
Laser Pumping
1
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Outline
Laser pumping status is indicated.
Description
“0”…Laser pumping OFF
“1”…Laser pumping ON
Reference
• Control of laser pumping by this command is unavailable when the No.2 DIP switch on the back surface of controller is
turned to OFF.
• It takes about 20 seconds for LP-Mxxx / LP-Sxxx / LP-Zxxx and about 15 seconds for LP-SxxxW from turning ON the
laser pumping to the completion of pumping.
46
Shutter (Code: SHT)
Controls the internal shutter opening/closing.
• Setting of shutter
STX
SHT
[Shutter Status]
1-byte
S
Name
Data Length
[byte]
Shutter Status
1
(Check Sum)
Outline
Delimiter
Description
“0”…close
“1”…open
The control of shutter is indicated.
Reference
• Control of shutter by this command is unavailable when the No.2 DIP switch on the back surface of controller is turned to
OFF.
• Response data for abnormal receiving (NAK03) is returned when shutter open command is transmitted in shutter open
status.
• If the shutter close command is transmitted during marking, the internal shutter is closed after the marking is completed.
Status Request (Code: STS)
Requires the operation status of laser marker, such as ready status and error occurrence status.
• Status Request
STX
STS
R
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
• Response to status request
STX
STS
A
[Error Occurrence Status] [Laser Pumping Status]
[Command Reception Status] [Marking Ready Status]
[Trigger Status]
5-byte
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Name
Data Length
[byte]
Error Occurrence
Status
1
The status of error occurrence is indicated.
“0”…no error
“1”…error occurrence
Laser Pumping
Status
1
The status of laser pumping is indicated.
“0”…laser pumping OFF
“1”…laser pumping
“2”…laser pumping completed
Command Reception Status
1
Shutter and command reception mode (MKM
command) status is indicated.
Use this for determination of whether various
commands can be transmitted. For details,
refer to "Command Reception Condition".
“0”…Shutter close or command
reception mode ON (including
while the shutter is opened)
“1”…Shutter open (excepting when
the command reception mode is
ON)
Marking Ready
Status
1
The status of marking trigger acceptability is
indicated.
“0”…marking disable (ready OFF)
“1”…marking enable (ready ON)
Trigger Status
1
The status of trigger input (TRIG.IN) is
indicated when “equidistant marking” is
selected at trigger condition.
“0”…trigger OFF
“1”…Trigger ON
Outline
Description
Reference
• When the response data is either “02110” or “02111”, marking is enable.
• For LP-Mxxx-S type, open the laser gate to turn ON the ready signal.
47
Marking Status Transmission Permission (Code: MST)
Enables automatic response of marking result (e.g. normal end, and error occurrence, etc.) at the end of marking.
• Setting / Readout data of marking status transmission permission
STX
MST
Sub
Command
[Trans-mission Permission/Prohibition]
1-byte
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Sub command is "S" at the time of setting and "A" for response data at the time of readout.
• Readout request of transmission permission/prohibition of response
STX
MST
R
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Name
Data Length
[byte]
Outline
Description
Trans-mission
Permission/
Prohibition
1
The status of transmission permission for response is
indicated.
“0”…Transmission prohibited
“1”…Transmission permitted
• Data transmission after setting marking status transmission permission
The status is transmitted if the marking failure occurs when marking is normally completed or when character string is set
outside the marking area transmission permission when receiving a marking trigger by the serial communication command
after marking status transmission permission is set.
STX
MST
Name
Status
Marking Energy
Measurement
(Effective only
LP-Mxxx /
LP-Sxxx)
Marking Energy
Value
(Effective only
LP-Mxxx /
LP-Sxxx)
[Status] [Marking Energy Measurement]
[Marking Energy Value]
14-byte (LP-Mxxx / LP-Sxxx), 4-byte (LP-SxxxW/LP-Zxxx)
A
Data Length
[byte]
4
(1)
(9)
Outline
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Description
The status after marking operation is indicated.
“0000”…Marking is normally
completed.
Others: Error code at marking
operation
Indicates the result of marking energy measurement.
(Not transmitted for LP-SxxxW/LP-Zxxx.)
“0”: Marking Energy Correct
“1”: Marking Energy Incorrect
“2”: Determination Impossible
(when an error other than
E710 occurs or after the
power check or laser power
measurement completes.)
Indicates the marking energy.
(Not transmitted for LP-SxxxW/LP-Zxxx.)
“000000100” to “999999999”
[mJ]
It is valid in the correct
operation and E710. In
other cases, “000000000” is
indicated.
Reference
• When marking status function is used, set the transmission permission before every shifting to the remote mode.
• When the remote mode is released, the marking status transmission is returned to the transmission prohibition.
• For the error code at marking operation, refer to “Error Indication” (P.180).
48
Marking Trigger (Code: MRK)
Inputs marking trigger (laser radiation startup trigger).
• Setting of marking trigger
STX
MRK
[Marking Trigger]
1-byte
S
Data Length
[byte]
Name
Marking Trigger
1
(Check Sum)
Outline
Delimiter
Description
Marking operation is started when this command is
accepted.
<LP-Mxxx / LP-Sxxx / LP-Zxxx only>
During "equidistant" status at marking to lying
object, the instruction of marking start/stop is
executed.
“0”…stop
(available only with equidistant
status)
“1”…start
Reference
• Marking is performed at command reception, regardless of the setting in “marking trigger” when “equidistant marking” is
set at the trigger type.
• When this command is sent when the marking trigger cannot be accepted (Ready is OFF), abnormal receiving response
is returned from laser marker.
Guide LD Display (Code: GID)
Controls radiation of red guide laser for marking position conirmation.
• Setting of Guide LD Display:
STX
GID
Name
Display
method
S
Data Length
[byte]
1
[Display method] [Scan Speed ] [Z Offset]
Max. 14-byte
(Check Sum)
Outline
Speciies the display method of the guide
LD.
Description
“0”: Display stop
“1”: Marking area
“2”: Marking Character
“3”: Work Image Display
“4”: Dual pointer
Model type*
Scan Speed
Z Offset
(Effective
only LP-M /
LP-Z series)
(5)
(8)
The moving speed of the guide indication is
indicated. (omissible)
<LP-Sxxx/LP-SxxxW>
As this item is not available for the LP-S
series, set to "+000.000" or no data.
<LP-Mxxx / LP-Zxxx>
Being effective when the display method
is "1": Marking Area or "4": Dual Pointer, it
indicates Z displacement of guide display
in comparison to the base work distance.
(omissible)
Delimiter
Setting range [mm/s]
LP-Sxx0/LP-Sxx5/
LP-Mxx0/LP-Mxx5/
LP-Zxx0
LP-SxxxW/LP-Sxx2
LP-Mxx6/LP-Zxx6
Model type*
LP-Sxx(W)
LP-Mxxx
LP-Zxxx
"00001" to "06000"
"00001" to "03000"
"00001" to "04000"
Setting range [mm]
"+000.000"(ixed)
"-022.000" to "+022.000"
"-025.000" to"+025.000"
* For the detail of the model type, refer to “Target Laser Marker” (P.4).
Reference
• Omit the Z Offset too if omitting the scan speed setting.
• This command that controls the red guide LD become unavailable when DIP switch (No.2) on the back of the controller is
turned OFF.
• This command can be transmitted only when the shutter is closed or when the "command reception mode ON" is set by
Command reception permission (MKM) command.
• The guide indication is stopped automatically after 1 minute.
49
File Change [No. Speciied] (Code: FNO)
Speciies the ile No. to change the ile.
• Setting / Readout data of File No.
STX
Sub
Command
FNO
[File No.]
4-byte
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Sub command is "S" at the time of setting and "A" for response data at the time of readout.
• Readout request of ile No.
STX
FNO
R
Name
Data Length
[byte]
File No.
4
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Outline
Description
The ile number to be used and the ile number
currently being used is indicated at ile No.
change and readout of ile No. respectively.
“0000” to “2047”
“9999”…new ile
File Change [Comment Speciied] (Code: FNN)
Changes ile No. according to the ile name (comment).
• Change File No.
STX
FNN
[File Name]
Max. 20-byte
S
Data Length
[byte]
Name
File Name
Max 20
Outline
Specify the ile name with 10 or less
characters of shift JIS code or 20 or less
characters of ASCII code. When the same
ile name exists, change the ile No. to the
smaller one.
File Overwriting Registration (Code: FOR)
Overwrite and register the ile under editing.
Overwriting is possible when the ile number has been already determined.
• Overwriting of ile
STX
50
FOR
S
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Description
Ex) When changing to a ile name
(comment) with “ABCD”
(hexadecimal numeral)
When specifying the ile name in shift JIS
code
82,60,82,61,82,62,82,63(HEX)
When specifying the ile name in ASCII
code
41,42,43,44(HEX)
File Registration (Code: FRG)
Register the ile under editing to the speciied ile number.
• Registration of ile
STX
FRG
[File No.]
4-byte
S
(Check Sum)
Name
Data Length
[byte]
Outline
File No.
4
Register the ile currently used to the ile of speciied
number and change the ile number currently being
edited to the speciied number.
Delimiter
Description
“0000” to “2047”
File Name (Code: FNM)
Sets name (comment) of ile under editing.
• Setting / Readout data of ile name
STX
FNM
Sub
Command
[File Name]
Max. 20-byte
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Sub command is "S" at the time of setting and "A" for response data at the time of readout.
• Readout request of ile name
STX
FNM
Name
File Name
R
Data Length
[byte]
Max 20
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Outline
Specify the ile name of currently speciied
number with 10 or less characters of shift
JIS code or 20 or less characters of ASCII
code. Specify 0 byte to the ile name to be
deleted.
Description
(ex) when specifying the ile name
"ABCD"
When specifying the ile name in shift JIS
code
82,60,82,61,82,62,82,63(HEX)
When specifying the ile name in ASCII
code
41,42,43,44(HEX)
51
Marking Character String (ASCII Code Speciied) (Code: MCS)
Sets the marking character string by ASCII code. (For alphanumeric characters only)
• Setting / Readout data of marking character string
STX
MCS
Sub
Command
[Line No.] [Marking Character String]
Max. 32-byte
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Sub command is "S" at the time of setting and "A" for response data at the time of readout.
• Readout request of marking character string
STX
MCS
[Line No.]
2-byte
R
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Name
Data Length
[byte]
Line No.
2
The line number to be set in the ile is
speciied.
“01” to “99” [row]
Max 30
Speciies the character setting in the
speciied line. Specify 0 byte to the
character string to be deleted.
20 characters within the range from (HEX)
to 7E(HEX) of ASCII code
(functional characters should not be
included)
Marking
Character
String
Outline
Description
Reference
• If readout data includes function characters (such as “%SFT”), the setting character ("%SFT") is read out, but characters
to be actually marked are not.
• If readout data includes characters that cannot be expressed in ASCII code such as Katakana and Kanji (2-byte
character), only these 2-byte characters are read out in shift JIS code.
• If the marking character string contains any function or 2-byte character, the maximum readout data will be 32-byte or
more.
Marking Character String (Shift JIS Code Speciied) (Code: STR)
Sets the marking character string by shift JIS code. (For characters including KANA, KANJI and function characters)
• Setting / Readout data of marking character string
STX
STR
Sub
Command
[Line No.] [Marking Character String]
Max. 62-byte
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Sub command is "S" at the time of setting and "A" for response data at the time of readout.
• Readout request of marking character string
STX
52
STR
R
[Line No.]
2-byte
(Check Sum)
Name
Data Length
[byte]
Line No.
2
The line number to be set in the ile is speciied.
“01” to “99” [row]
Marking
Character
String
Max 60
(When
specifying
in shift JIS
code)
The character string (Up to 30 characters) to be
set in the speciied line is speciied with shift JIS
code.(However, the function character should be
speciied by ASCII code.) Specify 0 byte to the
character string to be deleted.
See the next page.
Outline
Description
Delimiter
Setting method of character string for marking (speciied with shift JIS code)
Use shift JIS code “Character Code Table” (P.191) to set standard characters and registered characters. In case of setting with
ASCII code, use the MCS command.
Functional character (speciied with ASCII code)
Use ASCII code to set the functional character.
N
:
digit number (1 to 6)
MM
:
number of digits (01 to 30)
X
:
Type (Y: dominical year, y: era year, M: month, D: date, H: 24-hour time, h: 12-hour time, m: minute, s:
second, w: week, J: 365 days, C: counter)
n
:
counter number, lot function number (0 to 7), date/time number (0: current date/time, 1 to 8: expiry date/time,
rank function number (0 to 3), serial data function number (0 to 9, A to F), bar code number (0 to 9, A to F)
Y
:
counter offset (+1 to +9) This letter is not used in case of no offset.
Z
:
counter numbering system -1 (1 to 9, A to Z) This letter is not used when decimal number is used.
%0N:XnY/Z
=
with zero
%N-:XnY/Z
=
without zero justify
%INP:n
=
Rank
%_N:XnY/Z
=
right aligned without
zero
%APM:n
=
“AM” (before noon),
“PM” (afternoon)
%MM:Sn
=
Serial Data
%N_:XnY/Z
=
left aligned without
zero
%SFT:n
=
Lot character
%BAR:n
=
Check Digit
(Above "_" represents a space.)
[Examples]
Character setting by shift-JIS code: Marking of “ABCD” (with hexadecimal number)
82,60,82,61,82,62,82,63
Functional character setting by ASCII code:
Marking of “counter 0” by 6 digits, right aligned without zero
25,20,36,3A,43,30…“%_6:C0”
(Above "_" represents a space.)
Shift-JIS character and functional character mixed case:
Marking of current year/month/date with four digits for dominical year, two digits for month
and date respectively, with zero, and of the unit by Kanji.
25,30,34,3A,59,30,94,4E,25,30,32,3A,4D,30,8C,8E,25,30,32,3A,44,30,93,FA…“%04:Y0 Year %02:M0 Month %02:D0 Day”
53
Serial Data Input (Code: SIN)
Sets the character string speciied for "Serial Data Function" to change characters for each marking.
Function characters (serial data) are preset to the marking character string or bar code data. Marking of the transmitted
character string corresponding with the serial data starts.
• Setting of serial data input
STX
SIN
[Serial Data No.] [Marking Data]
Max. 512-byte
S
Name
Data Length
[byte]
Serial Data No.
2
Marking Data
Max 510
(Check Sum)
Outline
Delimiter
Description
Sets the serial data No.
“00” to “15”
Sets the marking characters to the selected serial data No.
For the character, up to 30 characters and
for the code data, up to 255 characters can
be input.
one-byte or double-byte (shift JIS
code) characters less than 255
(mixed not available)
Reference
• Only when the internal shutter is opened during the remote control ("Reception mode ON" is not set for command
reception permission (MKM command)), the serial data can be transmitted to the laser marker.
• For using this command, set “serial data” of function characters at setting screen beforehand.
• When using this function (serial data), transmit this command by every marking. Otherwise it does not become marking
ready condition, and marking is not available.
• When transmit this command without any data, marking ready become ON, then nothing to be marked with serial data
input.
• For resetting the data, set the "reception mode ON" for command reception permission (MKM command) or close the
shutter.
• This input cannot be used with the rank marking, external offset and marking on moving object.
• In case of transmitting character by this command which is differed to the speciied number of digit, the character is
marked with the differed number of digit.
• Refer to the timing chart for this command transmission. (P.55).
• To input the control code for CODE 128, Data Matrix, QR code at binary mode, GS1 DataBar Expanded (only FNC1),
and 2D side of Composite code (only FNC1), use the following alternate codes instead of ASCII code.
Control Code
Alternate code
54
00 (HEX)
F050 (HEX)
to
to
1F (HEX)
F06F (HEX)
7F (HEX)
F071 (HEX)
FNC1
F072(HEX)
Timing Chart for Serial Data Marking
The timing chart for the command for serial data input (SIN) is shown below.
%01:S0, %01:S1 (example when serial data number 0 and 1 are set)
ON
LASER IN
OFF
SHUTTER
CONTROL
INPUT
(Open)
ON
(Close)
OFF
ON
TRIG. IN
OFF
ON
READY
OFF
ON
MARKING
OFF
Command Data
T1
T2
SINS00
Response Data
SINS01
ACK
SINS00
ACK
SINS01
ACK
ACK
Item
Time
Remarks
T1
1 second or more
SIN command cannot be sent until the shutter opens.
The shutter opens approx. 1 second after the shutter open input.
T2
0 ms or more
After conirming the marking output is turned ON, the next SIN command data can be sent.
Reference
• The command for serial data input (SIN) can be transmitted to the laser marker only under remote control, and when the
internal shutter is opened (“Reception mode ON” is not set for command reception mode (MKM command)).
• Whenever marking is performed, data of all set serial data function numbers must be transmitted.
• For LP-Mxxx-S type, open the laser gate to turn ON the ready signal.
Laser gate can be controlled with any timing regardless of the command sequence by the external signal input.
55
Rank Condition (Code: RKC)
Sets input conditions of "Rank Function" to switch characters using I/O input.
• Setting / Readout data of rank condition
STX
RKC
Sub
Command
[Parallel Input]
1-byte
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Sub command is "S" at the time of setting and "A" for response data at the time of readout.
• Readout request of rank condition
STX
RKC
R
(Check Sum)
Name
Data Length
[byte]
Parallel Input
1
Delimiter
Outline
Description
“1”…4-bit × 4
“2”…8-bit × 2
The condition for parallel input is indicated.
Rank Character String (Code: RKS)
Sets character string used for "Rank Function" to switch characters using I/O input.
• Setting / Readout data of rank character string
STX
RKS
Sub
Command
[Rank No.] [Marking Character String]
Max. 21-byte
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Sub command is "S" at the time of setting and "A" for response data at the time of readout.
• Readout request of rank character string
STX
RKS
Name
R
Data Length
[byte]
[Rank No.]
3-byte
(Check Sum)
Outline
Description
Parallel Input
Rank No.
Marking
Character
String
56
3
The number in which the character
string is set is indicated.
The setting range varies depending on
the condition of parallel input.
Max 18
The character string to be marked with
the speciied period is set. (Up to 9
characters)
Specify 0-byte of data length to delete
the character string of period.
Delimiter
8-bit (D15-8)
8-bit (D7-0)
4-bit (D15-12)
4-bit (D11-8)
4-bit (D7-4)
4-bit (D3-0)
Use the shift JIS code.
Setting range
“256” to “511”
“000” to “255”
“048” to “063”
“032” to “047”
“016” to “031”
“000” to “015”
Counter (Code: CNT)
Sets the counter conditions.
• Setting / Readout data of counter condition
STX
CNT
Sub
Command
[Counter No.] [Current Value] [Initial value] [End Value]
[Step] [Count Source] [Flag Reset]
27-byte
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Sub command is "S" at the time of setting and "A" for response data at the time of readout.
• Readout request of counter condition
STX
CNT
R
[Counter No.]
1-byte
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Name
Data Length
[byte]
Counter No.
1
The counter No. to be set or to be read out is
indicated.
“0” to “7”
(“4” to “7”: common counter)
Current Value
6
Current value of counter. No minus number.
“000000” to “999999”
Initial Value
6
Initial value of counter. No minus number.
“000000” to “999999”
End Value
6
End value of counter. No minus number.
“000000” to “999999”
Step
6
Step value of counter. No minus number.
“000000” to “999999”
Outline
Description
Count Source
1
Trigger source to be counted.
“0”…Counter 0
“1”…Counter 1
“2”…Counter 2
“3”…Counter 3
“4”…Counter 4
“5”…Counter 5
“6”…Counter 6
“7”…Counter 7
“8”…Trigger input
Flag Reset
1
ON/OFF of reset at update date.
When the marking on the lying object is valid,
set "0".
“0”…reset OFF at re-dating
“1”…reset ON at re-dating
Reference
• When marking on the lying object is valid, counter reset at re-dating timing cannot be used.
57
Counter Reset (Code: CTR)
Resets the current counter value to the initial value.
• Counter reset
STX
CTR
[counter 0 to 7]
8-byte
S
Name
Data Length
[byte]
Counter 0
1
Counter 1
1
Counter 2
1
Counter 3
1
Counter 4 *
1
Counter 5 *
1
Counter 6 *
1
Counter 7 *
1
(Check Sum)
Outline
Delimiter
Description
“0”…reset OFF
“1”…reset ON
ON/OFF of counter reset is speciied.
* Counters 4 to 7 are common counters.
Expiry Date/Time Condition (Code: LMT)
Sets the expiry date/time condition.
Expiry date/time can be set within the range from January 1, 1980 to December 31, 2099.
• Setting / Readout data of Expiry Date/Time Condition
STX
LMT
Sub
Command
[Expiry No.] [Expiry] [Reference Unit] [Start Date]
7-byte
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Sub command is "S" at the time of setting and "A" for response data at the time of readout.
• Readout request of Expiry date/time Condition
STX
LMT
R
[Expiry No.]
1-byte
(Check Sum)
Name
Data Length
[byte]
Expiry No.
1
The expiry No. to be set or to be read out is
indicated.
“1” to “8”
(“5” to “8”: common expiry date/time)
Expiry
4
The expiry is indicated.
“-999” to “+999”
Outline
Description
Reference Unit
1
The reference unit is indicated.
“0”…year
“1”…month
“2”…day
“3”…hour
“4”…minute
Start Date
1
Possible to be set only when the reference unit
is set to “year” or “month”. Indicating if the date
of “today” is included or not.
“0”…Today not included
“1”…Today included
58
Delimiter
Lot Condition (Code: LTC)
Sets the condition of "Lot Function" to change characters depending on date/time and counter values.
• Setting / Readout data of lot condition
STX
LTC
Sub
Command
[Lot No.] [Period] [Period Unit]
4-byte
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Sub command is "S" at the time of setting and "A" for response data at the time of readout.
• Readout request of lot condition
STX
LTC
R
[Lot No.]
1-byte
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Name
Data Length
[byte]
Lot No.
1
The lot No. to be set or to be read out is
indicated.
“0” to “7”
(“4” to “7”: common lot)
Period
2
The time of period for lot marking is indicated.
“00”…current
“01” to “08”…expiry 1 to 8
“10” to “17”…counter 0 to 7
The unit of period to switch the character string
for marking is indicated.
“0”…year or counter
“1”…month
“2”…day
“3”…Y/M
“4”…M/D
“5”…day of week
“6”…hour
“7”…week
“8”…minute
“9”…hour/min.
Period Unit
1
Outline
Description
Reference
• The settings for all lot characters of the lot functional number are cleared if the lot condition is changed.
59
Lot Character String (Code: LTS)
Sets the character string used for "Lot Function" to change characters depending on date/time and counter values.
• Setting / Readout data of lot character string
STX
LTS
Sub
Command
[Lot No.] [Period Unit] [Start Period]
[End Period] [Marking Character String]
Max. 33-byte
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Sub command is "S" at the time of setting and "A" for response data at the time of readout.
• Readout request of lot character string
STX
LTS
R
[Lot No.] [Period Unit]
3-byte
Name
Data Length
[byte]
Outline
Lot No.
1
The lot No. to be set or to be read out is
indicated.
(Check Sum)
Description
“0” to “7”
(“4” to “7”: common lot)
Period Condition
Period Unit
2
The expiry No. to be set or to be read
out is indicated.
The expiry is indicated.
The setting range varies depending on
the condition of period unit.
Setting range
Year
Month
Day
Y/M
M/D
Hour
Min.
Hour/Min.
Week
Day of Week
Counter
“01” to “60”
“01” to “12”
“01” to “31”
“01” to “60”
“01” to “60”
“01” to “24”
“01” to “60”
“01” to “60”
“01” to “54”
“01” to “07”
“01” to “60”
Period Condition
Start Period
End Period
6
The start/end period of marking
character string for setting is set.
The setting range varies depending on
the condition of period unit.
Set “??????” for both of start and end
period to delete it.
“??????” is indicated if the period which
has not been set is read out.
6
Year
Month
Day
Y/M
M/D
Hour
Min.
Hour/Min.
Week
Day of Week
Counter
Marking
Character
String
60
Max 18
The character string to be marked
with the speciied period is set. (Up to
9 characters) Specify 0-byte of data
length to delete the character string of
period.
Delimiter
Setting range
“198000” to “209900”
“000001” to “000012”
“000001” to “000031”
“198001” to “209912”
“000101” to “001231”
(The higher 4 characters:
month, the lower 2
characters: date)
“000000” to “000023”
“000000” to “000059”
“000000” to “002359”
“000000” to “000054”
“000000” to “000006”
(“000000”: Sunday,
“000006”: Saturday)
“000000” to “999999”
Use the shift JIS code.
Bar Code Marking Data (ASCII Code Speciied) (Code: BCS)
Sets character string to be encoded as a bar code or 2D code by ASCII code. (For alphanumeric characters only)
• Setting / Readout data of bar code marking data
STX
BCS
Sub
Command
[Bar Code No.] [Line No.] [Bar Code Data]
Max. 34-byte
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Sub command is "S" at the time of setting and "A" for response data at the time of readout.
• Readout request of bar code marking data
STX
BCS
[Bar Code No.] [Line No.]
Max. 4-byte
R
Name
Data Length
[byte]
Bar Code No.
2
Line No.
1 or 2
Bar Code Data
Max 30
(Check Sum)
Outline
Delimiter
Description
Speciies bar code No.
“00” to “15”
Speciies the line for data setting.
1D code: “1” to “2”
2D code: “1” to “9”
2D part of Composite: “01” to “09”
Speciies the character setting in the
speciied line.
Specify the data length with 0 byte in order
to delete the character string.
ASCII code characters within the range
from 20(HEX) to 7E(HEX).
(Functional characters should not be
included.)
FNC1 can be entered at 1D(HEX).
Reference
• If readout data includes function characters (such as “%SFT”), the setting character ("%SFT") is read out, but characters
to be actually marked are not.
• If readout data includes characters that cannot be expressed in ASCII code such as Katakana and Kanji (Shift JIS Code
Speciied), only these 2-byte characters are read out in shift JIS code.
• If the marking character string contains any function or 2-byte character, the maximum readout data will be 32-byte or
more.
• Use the BRS command (2-byte character) when bar code data includes a control code.
• When setting bar code marking data in multiple lines, data in each line are jointed in the order of line numbers and bar
code data is generated. (Data are jointed and no line break is inserted for each line.)
• When setting bar code marking data in multiple lines, the total input data should be 510-Byte or less.
• In the case that "GS1 Data Matrix" is selected as bar code type in bar code condition setting, the separator of variable
length AI data is inputted at GS (1D(HEX)) in this command. The separator can be coded as "GS".
• For codes other than GS1 Data Matrix, the separator of variable length AI data is coded as "FNC1" (ixed). FNC1 can be
entered at GS (1D(HEX)).
• If readout data includes a separator of variable length AI data, it is read out as "GS" for all codes regardless of whether
"FNC1" or "GS" is inputted.
61
Bar Code Marking Data (Shift JIS Code Speciied) (Code: BRS)
Sets character string to be encoded as a bar code or 2D code by shift JIS code. (For characters including control code,
KANA, KANJI and function characters)
• Setting / Readout data of bar code marking data
STX
BRS
Sub
Command
[Bar Code No.] [Line No.] [Bar Code Data]
Max. 64-byte
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Sub command is "S" at the time of setting and "A" for response data at the time of readout.
• Readout request of bar code marking data
STX
BRS
[Bar Code No.] [Line No.]
Max. 4-byte
R
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Name
Data Length
[byte]
Bar Code No.
2
Bar code which sets the condition.
“00” to “15”
Line No.
1 or 2
Speciies the line for data setting.
1D code: “1” to “2”
2D code: “1” to “9”
2D part of Composite: “01” to “09”
Bar Code Data
Max 60
(When
specifying
in shift JIS
code)
Outline
Description
Speciies the character string within 30 characters with shift JIS code for setting in the
speciied line.
However, for the functional characters, speciies in ASCII code characters with beginning
with “%” (25(HEX)).
Reference
• For the method to specify bar code data, refer to “Setting method of character string for marking (speciied with shift JIS
code)” (P.53) and “Functional character (speciied with ASCII code)” (P.53).
• To input the control code for CODE 128, Data Matrix, QR code at binary mode, GS1 DataBar Expanded (only FNC1),
and 2D side of Composite code (only FNC1), use the following alternate codes instead of ASCII code.
Control Code
Alternate code
00 (HEX)
F050 (HEX)
to
to
1F (HEX)
F06F (HEX)
7F (HEX)
F071 (HEX)
FNC1
F072(HEX)
• When setting bar code marking data in multiple lines, data in each line are jointed in the order of line numbers and bar
code data is generated.
(Data are jointed and no line break is inserted for each line.)
• When setting bar code marking data in multiple lines, make sure the sum of all barcode data is 510-byte or less.
• If readout data includes function characters (such as “%SFT”), the setting character ("%SFT") is read out, but characters
to be actually marked are not.
62
Bar Code Marking Condition (Code: BRF)
Sets the marking condition for bar code and 2D code.
• Setting / Readout data of bar code marking condition
STX
BRF
Sub
Command
[Bar Code No.] [Layer No.] [Type]
[Setting Data (varies depending on bar code type)]
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Sub command is "S" at the time of setting and "A" for response data at the time of readout.
• Readout request of bar code marking condition
When the code type is other than composite:
STX
BRF
R
[Bar Code No.]
2-byte
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
[Bar Code No.] [1D/2D Selection]
3-byte
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
When the code type is composite:
STX
BRF
R
In [1D/2D Selection] ield, specify "1" for readout of 1D side or "2" for readout of 2D side of composite code.
1. QR Code (Data length: 44-byte)
Name
Data Length
[byte]
Bar Code No.
2
Bar code which sets the condition
“00” to “15”
Layer No.
2
Set the layer number.
“00” to “15”
Type
2
Speciies bar code type
“10”: model 1
“11”: model 2
“12”: micro QR code
System reservation
1
Switch for system reservation.
“0” ixed
Version
2
Speciies version of QR code.
When specifying “00”, it is
automatically speciied.
Model 1: “00” to “14”
Model 2: “00” to “22”
Micro QR: “00” to “04”
Data input mode of QR code
“0”: Number
“1”: Alpha (text)
“2”: Binary
“3”: Kanji
“0”: L (High density level)
“1”: M(Standard level)
“2”: Q (High responsibility level)
“3”: H (Super high responsibility level)
For micro QR, this H: super high reliability
cannot be speciied.
Data Input Mode
1
Outline
Description
Error Correction
Level
1
Error correction level of QR code
X Position
8
X coordinate of center of QR code
Y Position
8
Y coordinate of center of QR code
Rotation Angle
7
Rotation angle of QR code
“-180.00” to “+180.00” [°]
Module H.
5
Interval of module in longitudinal
direction.
“0.001” to “9.999” [mm]
Module W.
5
Interval of module in lateral direction
Model type*
Setting range [mm]
LP-Sxx0(W)
LP-Sxx5(W)
LP-Sxx2
LP-Mxx0 / LP-Zxx0
LP-Mxx5
LP-Mxx6/LP-Zxx6
"-045.000" to "+045.000"
"-080.000" to "+080.000"
"-027.500" to "+027.500"
"-060.000" to "+060.000"
"-110.000" to "+110.000"
"-165.000" to "+165.000"
* For the detail of the model type, refer to “Target Laser Marker” (P.4).
63
2. In case of data matrix code / GS1 data matrix code (Data length: 45-byte)
Name
Data Length
[byte]
Bar Code No.
2
Bar code which sets the condition
“00” to “15”
Layer No.
2
Set the layer number.
“00” to “15”
Type
2
Speciies bar code type
“20”: Data matrix (ECC200)
“21”: GS1 Data Matrix
Human Readable
Text
1
Sets valid or invalid of human
readable text.
“0”… OFF
“1”… ON
(“0” is speciied for the data matrix.)
Data Input Mode
1
Data Input Mode.
“0”: Binary
“1”: Kanji
(“0” is speciied for the GS1 data matrix)
2
Number of module in Y direction
Specifying “00” for number of both
row and column encodes with the
minimum size (square).
“00”, “08” to “88”
(Combination of number of row and column is
limited. *1)
2
Number of module in X direction
Specifying “00” for number of both
row and column encodes with the
minimum size (square).
“00”, “10” to “80”
(Combination of number of row and column is
limited.*1)
Number of Row
Number of column
Outline
X Position
8
X coordinate of center
Y Position
8
Y coordinate of center
Rotation Angle
7
Rotation angle
Module H.
5
Interval of module in longitudinal
direction.
5
Interval of module in lateral
direction
Module W.
Description
Model type*2
LP-Sxx0(W)
LP-Sxx5(W)
LP-Sxx2
LP-Mxx0 / LP-Zxx0
LP-Mxx5
LP-Mxx6/LP-Zxx6
Setting range [mm]
"-045.000" to "+045.000"
"-080.000" to "+080.000"
"-027.500" to "+027.500"
"-060.000" to "+060.000"
"-110.000" to "+110.000"
"-165.000" to "+165.000"
“-180.00” to “+180.00” [°]
“0.001” to “9.999” [mm]
*1: Available combination of number of row and column:
Auto
:
00 × 00
Square
:
10 × 10, 12 × 12, 14 × 14, 16 × 16, 18 × 18, 20 × 20, 22 × 22, 24 × 24, 26 × 26,
32 × 32, 36 × 36, 40 × 40, 48 × 48, 52 × 52, 64 × 64, 72 × 72, 80 × 80, 88 × 88
Rectangle
:
08 × 18, 08 × 32, 12 × 26, 12 × 36, 16 × 36, 16 × 48
*2: For the detail of the model type, refer to “Target Laser Marker” (P.4).
64
3. In case of ITF/CODE39/NW-7
Data length …60-byte (LP-Mxxx / LP-Sxxx / LP-Zxxx), 57-byte (LP-SxxxW)
Name
Data Length
[byte]
Bar Code No.
2
Bar code which sets the condition
“00” to “15”
Layer No.
2
Set the layer number.
“00” to “15”
Type
2
Speciies bar code type
“00”: CODE39
“01”: ITF
“03”: NW-7
System reservation
1
System reservation ield
“0” ixed
Inversion
1
Indicates valid or invalid of inversion
“0”: invalid
“1”: valid
1
In case of CODE39, ITF, specify the
existence of check character.
In case of NW-7, select start and
stop characters from A, B, C and D
and specify the existence of check
character.
In case of CODE39, ITF
“0”: Check character absence
“1”: Check character presence
In case of NW-7
“A” to “D”: Check character absence
“a” to “d”: Check character presence
Check Character/
Start/Stop
Character
Height
Narrow Element
Outline
7
Height of bar code
5
Indicates the width of narrow element of bar and space. Set the larger
value than 'Line width' in laser setting
screen.
Description
Model type*
LP-Sxx0(W)
LP-Sxx5(W)
LP-Sxx2
LP-Mxx0/LP-Zxx0
LP-Mxx5
LP-Mxx6/LP-Zxx6
Setting range [mm]
"001.000" to "090.000"
"001.000" to "160.000"
"001.000" to "055.000"
"001.000" to "120.000"
"001.000" to "220.000"
"001.000" to "330.000"
“0.050” to “1.000” [mm]
Model type*
LP-Sxx0(W)
LP-Sxx5(W)
LP-Sxx2
LP-Mxx0/LP-Zxx0
LP-Mxx5
LP-Mxx6/LP-Zxx6
Setting range [mm]
"-045.000" to "+045.000"
"-080.000" to "+080.000"
"-027.500" to "+027.500"
"-060.000" to "+060.000"
"-110.000" to "+110.000"
"-165.000" to "+165.000"
X Position
8
X coordinate of center of bar code
Y Position
8
Y coordinate of center of bar code
Tilt Angle
7
Tilt angle of bar code.
“-180.00” to “+180.00” [°]
Quiet/
Narrow Element W
4
Ratio of quiet width to narrow
element width.
“00.0” to “20.0”
Wide/
Narrow Element W
3
Ratio of wide element width to narrow
element width
“1.8” to “3.4”
Laser Power
Corrrection
3
Indicates the correction value for
laser power speciied at the laser
setting.
“000” to “999” [%]
Scan Speed
Correction
3
Indicates the correction value for the
scan speed speciied at the laser
setting
“001” to “999” [%]
(3)
Indicates the correction value corresponding with the marking pulse
cycle speciied value here.
(Nothing should be input with the LPSxxxW type.)
“001” to “999” [%]
(Laser Pulse Cycle
Correction)
* For the detail of the model type, refer to “Target Laser Marker” (P.4).
65
4. In case of CODE128, EAN/UPC, composite (1D part) and JAN/UPC/EAN128 (GS1-128)
Data length …57-byte (LP-Mxxx / LP-Sxxx / LP-Zxxx), 54-byte (LP-SxxxW)
Name
Data Length
[byte]
Bar Code No.
2
Function No. of bar code which
speciies the condition
“00” to “15”
Layer No.
2
Set the layer number.
“00” to “15”
Outline
Description
Type
2
Speciies the bar code type.
“02”: CODE128
“04”: EAN/UPC
[CC-A Composite]
“46”: EAN/UPC
“47”: UCC/EAN128
[CC-B Composite]
“56”: EAN/UPC
“57”: UCC/EAN128
[CC-C Composite]
“67”: UCC/EAN128
Human Readable
Text
1
Sets valid or invalid of human
readable
“0”: Invalid
“1”: Valid
Inversion
1
Indicates valid or invalid of inversion
“0”: Invalid
“1”: valid
System reservation
1
Switch for system reservation.
“0” ixed
Height
Model type*
Setting range [mm]
LP-Sxx0(W)
LP-Sxx5(W)
LP-Sxx2
LP-Mxx0/LP-Zxx0
LP-Mxx5
LP-Mxx6/LP-Zxx6
"001.000" to "090.000"
"001.000" to "160.000"
"001.000" to "055.000"
"001.000" to "120.000"
"001.000" to "220.000"
"001.000" to "330.000"
7
Height of bar code
Narrow Element
5
Indicates the width of narrow element of bar and space. Set the larger
value than 'Line width' in laser setting
screen.
X Position
8
X coordinate of center of bar code
Model type*
Setting range [mm]
LP-Sxx0(W)
LP-Sxx5(W)
LP-Sxx2
LP-Mxx0/LP-Zxx0
LP-Mxx5
LP-Mxx6/LP-Zxx6
"-045.000" to "+045.000"
"-080.000" to "+080.000"
"-027.500" to "+027.500"
"-060.000" to "+060.000"
"-110.000" to "+110.000"
"-165.000" to "+165.000"
“0.050” to “1.000” [mm]
Y Position
8
Y coordinate of center of bar code
Tilt Angle
7
Tilt angle of bar code.
“-180.00” to “+180.00” [°]
Quiet/
Narrow Element W
4
Ratio of quiet width to narrow element
width.
“00.0” to “20.0”
Laser Power
Correction
3
Indicates the correction value for laser
power speciied at the laser setting.
“001” to “999” [%]
Scan Speed
Correction
3
Indicates the correction value for the
scan speed speciied at the laser
setting
“001” to “999” [%]
(3)
Indicates the correction value
corresponding with the marking pulse
cycle speciied value here.
(Nothing should be input with the LPSxxxW type.)
“001” to “999” [%]
(Laser Pulse Cycle
Correction)
* For the detail of the model type, refer to “Target Laser Marker” (P.4).
66
5. In case of RSS-14 (GS1 DataBar) Standard & Truncated, RSS (GS1 DataBar) Limited and RSS (GS1
DataBar) Expanded (Including when these codes are 1D part of the composite code.)
Data length …52-byte (LP-Mxxx / LP-Sxxx / LP-Zxxx), 49-byte (LP-SxxxW)
Name
Data Length
[byte]
Bar Code No.
2
Bar code which sets the
condition.
“00” to “15”
Layer No.
2
Set the layer number.
“00” to “15”
Outline
Description
Type
2
Type of RSS code
“30”: RSS-14 STD & Truncated
“33”: RSS Limited
“34”: RSS Expanded
“40”: RSS-14 STD & Truncated CC-A
“43”: RSS Limited CC-A
“44”: RSS Expanded CC-A
“50”: RSS-14 STD & Truncated CC-B
“53”: RSS Limited CC-B
“54”: RSS Expanded CC-B
Human Readable Text
1
Sets valid or invalid of human
readable text
“0”: Invalid
“1”: Valid
Inversion
1
Indicates valid or invalid of
inversion
“0”: Invalid
“1”: Valid
“2”: Valid (with guard)
Model type*
Setting range [mm]
LP-Sxx0(W)
LP-Sxx5(W)
LP-Sxx2
LP-Mxx0/LP-Zxx0
LP-Mxx5
LP-Mxx6/LP-Zxx6
"001.000" to "090.000"
"001.000" to "160.000"
"001.000" to "055.000"
"001.000" to "120.000"
"001.000" to "220.000"
"001.000" to "330.000"
Bar Code Height
7
Height of bar code
Module width
5
Indicates the width of the basic
module
X Position
8
X coordinate of center of bar
code
Y Position
8
Y coordinate of center of bar
code
Tilt Angle
7
Tilt angle of bar code.
“-180.00” to “+180.00” [°]
Laser Power Correction
3
Indicates the correction value
for laser power speciied at the
laser setting.
“000” to “999” [%]
Scan Speed Correction
3
Indicates the correction value for
the scan speed speciied at the
laser setting.
“001” to “999” [%]
(3)
Indicates the correction value
corresponding with the marking
pulse cycle speciied value here.
(Nothing should be input with
the
LP-SxxxW type.)
“001” to “999” [%]
(Laser Pulse Cycle
Correction)
“0.050” to “1.000” [mm]
Model type*
Setting range [mm]
LP-Sxx0(W)
LP-Sxx5(W)
LP-Sxx2
LP-Mxx0/LP-Zxx0
LP-Mxx5
LP-Mxx6/LP-Zxx6
"-045.000" to "+045.000"
"-080.000" to "+080.000"
"-027.500" to "+027.500"
"-060.000" to "+060.000"
"-110.000" to "+110.000"
"-165.000" to "+165.000"
* For the detail of the model type, refer to “Target Laser Marker” (P.4).
67
6. In case of RSS-14 (GS1 DataBar) Stacked, RSS-14 (GS1 DataBar) Stacked Omnidirectional (Including
when these codes are 1D part of the composite code.)
Data length …56-byte (LP-Mxxx / LP-Sxxx / LP-Zxxx), 53-byte (LP-SxxxW)
Name
Data Length
[byte]
Outline
Bar Code No.
2
Bar code which sets the condition.
“00” to “15”
Layer No.
2
Set the layer number.
“00” to “15”
Description
Type
2
Type of RSS code.
“31”: RSS-14 Stacked
“32”: RSS-14 Stacked Omnidirectional
“41”: RSS-14 Stacked CC-A
“42”: RSS-14 Stacked Omnidirectional CC-A
“51”: RSS-14 Stacked CC-B
“52”: RSS-14 Stacked Omnidirectional CC-B
Human Readable
Text
1
Sets valid or invalid of human
readable text.
“0”: Invalid
“1”: Valid
Inversion
1
Indicates valid or invalid of
inversion.
“0”: Invalid
“1”: Valid
“2”: Valid (with guard)
Model type*
Setting range [mm]
LP-Sxx0(W)
LP-Sxx5(W)
LP-Sxx2
LP-Mxx0/LP-Zxx0
LP-Mxx5
LP-Mxx6/LP-Zxx6
"001.000" to "090.000"
"001.000" to "160.000"
"001.000" to "055.000"
"001.000" to "120.000"
"001.000" to "220.000"
"001.000" to "330.000"
Lower Bar Height
(RSS-14 Stacked)
One Bar Code H.
(RSS-14 Stacked
Omnidirectional)
7
Height of bar code.
Separator Height/(W)
4
Ratio of separation pattern height
to width.
“00.0” to “10.0”
Module width
5
Indicates the width of the basic
module.
“0.050” to “1.000” [mm]
X Position
8
X coordinate of center of bar code.
Model type*
Setting range [mm]
LP-Sxx0(W)
LP-Sxx5(W)
LP-Sxx2
LP-Mxx0/LP-Zxx0
LP-Mxx5
LP-Mxx6/LP-Zxx6
"-045.000" to "+045.000"
"-080.000" to "+080.000"
"-027.500" to "+027.500"
"-060.000" to "+060.000"
"-110.000" to "+110.000"
"-165.000" to "+165.000"
Y Position
8
Y coordinate of center of bar code.
Tilt Angle
7
Tilt angle of bar code.
“-180.00” to “+180.00” [°]
Laser Power
Correction
3
Indicates the correction value for
laser power speciied at the laser
setting.
“000” to “999” [%]
Scan Speed
Correction
3
Indicates the correction value for
the scan speed speciied at the
laser setting.
“001” to “999” [%]
Indicates the correction value corresponding with the marking pulse
cycle speciied value here.
(Nothing should be input with the
LP-SxxxW type.)
“001” to “999” [%]
(Laser Pulse Cycle
Correction)
(3)
* For the detail of the model type, refer to “Target Laser Marker” (P.4).
68
7. In case of RSS (GS1 DataBar) Expanded Stacked (Including when this code is 1D part of the composite
code.)
Data length …58-byte (LP-Mxxx / LP-Sxxx / LP-Zxxx), 55-byte (LP-SxxxW)
Name
Data Length
[byte]
Bar Code No.
2
Bar code which sets the
condition.
“00” to “15”
Layer No.
2
Set the layer number.
“00” to “15”
Type
2
Type of RSS code.
“35”: RSS Expanded Stacked
“45”: RSS Expanded Stacked CC-A
“55”: RSS Expanded Stacked CC-B
Human Readable Text
1
Sets valid or invalid of human
readable text.
“0”: Invalid
“1”: Valid
Inversion
1
Indicates valid or invalid of
inversion.
“0”: Invalid
“1”: Valid
“2”: Valid (with guard)
Outline
Description
Model type*
Setting range [mm]
LP-Sxx0(W)
LP-Sxx5(W)
LP-Sxx2
LP-Mxx0/LP-Zxx0
LP-Mxx5
LP-Mxx6/LP-Zxx6
"001.000" to "090.000"
"001.000" to "160.000"
"001.000" to "055.000"
"001.000" to "120.000"
"001.000" to "220.000"
"001.000" to "330.000"
One Bar Code H.
7
Height of bar code.
Separator Height/(W)
4
Ratio of separation pattern
height to width.
“00.0” to “10.0”
Symbol Char.
In row
2
Number of Symbol Character in
lateral direction.
“02” to “20” Only even value applied
Module width
5
Indicates the width of the basic
module
“0.050” to “1.000” [mm]
X Position
8
X coordinate of center of bar
code.
Y Position
8
Y coordinate of center of bar
code.
Tilt Angle
7
Tilt angle of bar code.
“-180.00” to “+180.00” [°]
Laser Power Correction
3
Indicates the correction value for
laser power speciied at the laser
setting.
“000” to “999” [%]
Scan Speed Correction
3
Indicates the correction value for
the scan speed speciied at the
laser setting.
“001” to “999” [%]
(3)
Indicates the correction value
corresponding with the marking
pulse cycle speciied value here.
(Nothing should be input with the
LP-SxxxW type.)
“001” to “999” [%]
(Laser Pulse Cycle
Correction)
Model type*
Setting range [mm]
LP-Sxx0(W)
LP-Sxx5(W)
LP-Sxx2
LP-Mxx0/LP-Zxx0
LP-Mxx5
LP-Mxx6/LP-Zxx6
"-045.000" to "+045.000"
"-080.000" to "+080.000"
"-027.500" to "+027.500"
"-060.000" to "+060.000"
"-110.000" to "+110.000"
"-165.000" to "+165.000"
* For the detail of the model type, refer to “Target Laser Marker” (P.4).
69
8. In case of the composite (2D)
Data length …34-byte (LP-Mxxx / LP-Sxxx / LP-Zxxx), 31-byte (LP-SxxxW)
Name
Data Length
[byte]
Bar Code No.
2
Bar code which sets the condition.
“00” to “15”
Layer No.
2
Set the layer number.
“00” to “15”
Outline
Description
Type
2
Speciies the bar code type.
Composit (CC-A)
“40”: RSS-14 STD & Truncated CC-A
“41”: RSS-14 Stacked CC-A
“42”: RSS-14 Stacked Omnidirectional
CC-A
“43”: RSS Limited CC-A
“44”: RSS Expanded CC-A
“45”: RSS Expanded Stacked CC-A
“46”: EAN/UPC CC-A *1
“47”: UCC/EAN128 CC-A
Composite (CC-B)
“50”: RSS-14 STD & Truncated CC-B
“51”: RSS-14 Stacked CC-B
“52”: RSS-14 Stacked Omnidirectional
CC-B
“53”: RSS Limited CC-B
“54”: RSS Expanded CC-B
“55”: RSS Expanded Stacked CC-B
“56”: EAN/UPC CC-B *1
“57”: UCC/EAN128 CC-B
Composite (CC-C)
“67”: UCC/EAN128 CC-C
Human readable text
for 2D code
1
Sets valid or invalid of human readable text.
“2”: Invalid
“3”: Valid
Composite Row H
5
Height of 2D part.
“0.050” to “9.999” [mm]
Number of Column
2
The number of column of 2D part.
“00”: Auto
“03” to “90” (Limited: *2 )
Number of column
2
The number of row of 2D part.
“00” for CC-A or CC-B
“00” to “30” for CC-C (“00” is Auto)
Separator Height/(W)
4
Ratio of separator hight to narrow element width of 1D part.
“00.0” to “10.0”
Quiet/ (W) Ratio
4
Ratio of quiet width to narrow element
width of 1D part.
“00.0” to “20.0”
Error Correction Level
1
Indicates the error correction level of
composite code.
“0” for CC-A or CC-B
“0” to “9” for CC-C
Laser Power
Correction
3
Indicates the correction value for laser
power speciied at the laser setting.
“000” to “999” [%]
Scan Speed Correction
3
Indicates the correction value for the
scan speed speciied at the laser
setting.
“001” to “999” [%]
Indicates the correction value corresponding with the marking pulse cycle
speciied value here.
(Nothing should be input with the
LP-SxxxW type.)
“001” to “999” [%]
(Laser Pulse Cycle
Correction)
70
(3)
*1: In case of selecting ["46": EAN/UPC CC-A] or ["56": EAN/UPC CC-B] of bar code type, a bar code is automatically
generated according to the input characters in bar code data (1D side).
Input Characters
Bar Code type
Input 12 digit excepting a check digit.”
EAN/JAN-13
Input 7 digit excepting a check digit.
EAN/JAN-8
Input 11 digit excepting a check digit.
UPC-A
Input 6 digit excepting a check digit.
UPC-E
*2: The number of column of bar code is limited according to bar code's type.
Bar Code Type
The Number of Column Available for CC-A Code
The Number of Column Available
for CC-B Code
UPC-E
RSS-14 (GS1 DataBar) Stacked
RSS-14 (GS1 DataBar) Stacked Omnidirectional
5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 12 [column]
8, 11, 14, 17, 20, 23, 26 [column]
EAN-8 / JAN-8
RSS (GS1 DataBar) Limited
4, 5, 6, 7, 8 [column]
6, 8, 10, 12, 15, 20, 26, 32, 38, 44
[column]
EAN-13 / JAN-13
UPC-A
UCC / EAN-128
RSS-14 (GS1 DataBar) Standard / Truncated
RSS (GS1 DataBar) Expanded
RSS (GS1 DataBar) Expanded Stacked
3, 4, 5, 6, 7 [column]
4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 15, 20, 26, 32, 38,
44 [column]
71
Human Readable Text (Code: BRV)
Sets the marking condition for the Human Readable Text to be added to a bar code or 2D code.
• Setting / Readout data of Human Readable Text
STX
BRV
Sub
Command
[Bar Code No.] [Setting Section] [Human Readable Text Setting
(varies depending on bar code type.)]
(Check
Sum)
Delimiter
Sub command is "S" at the time of setting and "A" for response data at the time of readout.
• Readout request of Human Readable Text
STX
BRV
R
[Bar Code No.] [Setting Section]
3-byte
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Reference
• A one-byte character which can not be converted to one-byte, including Katakana, is read out using the corresponding
double-byte character (shift JIS code).
1. In case of the barcode type is other than EAN / UPC
Data length: max. 64-byte
Name
Data Length
[byte]
Bar Code No.
2
Speciies bar code No.
“00” to “15”
Setting
Section
1
If the bar code is not Composite or if the
setting section of the human readable text
is for 1D side of Composite, “1” is speciied
and if the setting section is 2D side of
Composite, “2” is speciied.
(1D should be speciied for GS1 data
matrix.)
“1”: 1D side
“2”: 2D side
X Position
8
Speciies relative coordinate of X position
of human readable text to the center of bar
code.
Y Position
8
Speciies relative coordinate of Y position
of human readable text to the center of bar
code.
Character
Height
7
Speciies the character height of human
readable text.
Character
Width
7
Speciies the character width of human
readable text.
72
Outline
Character
Interval
7
Speciies the character interval of human
readable text.
Font
2
Selects font type of human readable text
from the registered font.
Description
Model type*
Setting range [mm]
LP-Sxx0(W)
LP-Sxx5(W)
LP-Sxx2
LP-Mxx0/LP-Zxx0
LP-Mxx5
LP-Mxx6/LP-Zxx6
"-045.000" to "+045.000"
"-080.000" to "+080.000"
"-027.500" to "+027.500"
"-060.000" to "+060.000"
"-110.000" to "+110.000"
"-165.000" to "+165.000"
Model type*
Setting range [mm]
LP-Sxx0(W)
LP-Sxx5(W)
LP-Sxx2
LP-Mxx0/LP-Zxx0
LP-Mxx5
LP-Mxx6/LP-Zxx6
"000.100" to "090.000"
"000.100" to "160.000"
"000.100" to "055.000"
"000.100" to "120.000"
"000.100" to "220.000"
"000.100" to "330.000"
Model type*
Setting range [mm]
LP-Sxx0(W)
LP-Sxx5(W)
LP-Sxx2
LP-Mxx0/LP-Zxx0
LP-Mxx5
LP-Mxx6/LP-Zxx6
"000.000" to "090.000"
"000.000" to "160.000"
"000.000" to "055.000"
"000.000" to "120.000"
"000.000" to "220.000"
"000.000" to "330.000"
“01” to “10”
Name
Data Length
[byte]
Outline
Description
Model type*
Bold Line
Width
5
Speciies the Bold Line Width of human
readable text.
Setting range [mm]
LP-Sxx0(W)/LP-Sxx2/
LP-Mxx0/LP-Zxx0
LP-Sxx5(W)//LP-Mxx5/
LP-Mxx6/LP-Zxx6
"0.000" to "2.000"
"0.000" to "4.000"
Laser Power
Correction
3
Corrects the laser power for human
readable text marking.
“000” to “999” [%]
Scan Speed
Correction
3
Corrects the scan speed for human readable
text marking.
“001” to “999” [%]
(Laser
Pulse Cycle
Correction)
(3)
The marking pulse cycle set is corrected by
the speciied value here.
(Nothing should be input with the LP-SxxxW
type.)
“001” to “999” [%]
New Line
(1)
Speciies the linefeed at marking human
readable text.
“0”: Same line
“1”: New line
(Only for 2D side or GS1 data matrix)
Line Interval
(7)
(Only for marking of Composite on a new
line on 2D side.)
Speciies the line interval at marking human
readable text on a new line.
Model type*
Setting range [mm]
LP-Sxx0(W)
LP-Sxx5(W)
LP-Sxx2
LP-Mxx0/LP-Zxx0
LP-Mxx5
LP-Mxx6/LP-Zxx6
"000.000" to "090.000"
"000.000" to "160.000"
"000.000" to "055.000"
"000.000" to "120.000"
"000.000" to "220.000"
"000.000" to "330.000"
* For the detail of the model type, refer to “Target Laser Marker” (P.4).
2. In case of the barcode type is EAN / UPC (including when EAN / UPC is 1D part of the composite code)
Data length: max. 19-byte
Name
Data Length
[byte]
Bar Code No.
2
Speciies bar code No.
“00” to “15”
Setting
Section
1
If the bar code is not Composite or if the
setting section of the human readable text is
for 1D side of Composite, “1” is speciied and
if the setting section is 2D side of Composite,
“2” is speciied.
“1”: 1D side
“2”: 2D side
Font
2
Selects font type of human readable text from
the registered font.
“01” to “10”
Outline
Description
Model type*
Bold Line
Width
5
Speciies the Bold Line Width of human
readable text.
Laser Power
Correction
3
Corrects the laser power for human readable
text marking.
“000” to “999” [%]
Scan Speed
Correction
3
Corrects the scan speed for human readable
text marking.
“001” to “999” [%]
(3)
The marking pulse cycle set is corrected by
the speciied value here.
(Nothing should be input with the LP-SxxxW
type.)
“001” to “999” [%]
(Laser
Pulse Cycle
Correction)
Setting range [mm]
LP-Sxx0(W)/LP-Sxx2/
"0.000" to "2.000"
LP-Mxx0/LP-Zxx0
LP-Sxx5(W)//LP-Mxx5/
"0.000" to "4.000"
LP-Mxx6/LP-Zxx6
73
Common Bar Code Condition (Code: BCC)
Sets the marking pitch and direction of the bar code, and 2D code skip marking.
• Setting / Readout data of common bar code condition
STX
BCC
Sub
Command
[Marking Pitch] [Direction] [Skip Marking]
7-byte
(Check Sum)
Sub command is "S" at the time of setting and "A" for response data at the time of readout.
• Readout request data
STX
BCC
R
Data
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Name
Data Length
[byte]
Marking Pitch
5
The marking pitch for the bar code is
indicated.
“0.010” to “2.000”
Direction
1
The scan direction for bar code marking is
indicated.
“0”: One direction
“1”: Bidirection
Skip Marking
1
Sets valid or invalid of skip marking.
“0”: Invalid
“1”: Valid
Outline
Reference
• For details on marking direction and skip marking, refer to the Operation Manual.
74
Description
Delimiter
2D Code Pattern (Code: BRP)
Sets 2D code module marking pattern.
• Setting / Readout data of 2D code pattern
STX
BRP
[Bar Code No.] [Pattern No.] [Character Code]
[Laser Power Correction] [Scan Speed Correction]
[Laser Pulse Cycle Correction]
16-byte (LP-Mxxx / LP-Sxxx / LP-Zxxx), 13-byte (LP-SxxxW)
Sub
Command
(Check
Sum)
Delimiter
Sub command is "S" at the time of setting and "A" for response data at the time of readout.
• Readout request of 2D code pattern
STX
BRP
[Bar Code No.] [Pattern No.]
3-byte
R
Name
Data Length
[byte]
Bar Code No.
2
(Check Sum)
Outline
Delimiter
Description
Bar code which sets the condition
“00” to “15”
1
Speciies the type of pattern
• QR code:
“0”: Margin
“1”: Dark Module
“2”: Light Module
“3”: Alignment
“4”: Finder
• Data Matrix code:
“0”: Quiet Zone:
“1”: Mark Module
“2”: Space Module
“3”: Border
Character code
4
Speciies the character code to be used
as a pattern in JIS code. Set “0000” to no
marking pattern. However, when the alignment inder pattern of the QR code is set
to "0000", marking is performed using the
dark/light module, and when the data matrix code border is set to "0000", marking is
performed using the mark module.
“0000”, “2230” to “2239” or “8121”
to “8152”
Laser Power
Correction
3
Indicates the correction value for laser
power speciied at the laser setting.
“000” to “999” [%]
Scan Speed Correction
3
Performs correction of the set scan speed
at speciied value.
“001” to “999” [%]
Indicates the correction value
corresponding with the marking pulse cycle
speciied value here.
(Nothing should be input with the
LP-SxxxW type.)
“001” to “999” [%]
Pattern No.
(Laser Pulse Cycle
Correction)
(3)
75
Logo File (Code: CDF)
Sets the logo ile.
• Setting / Readout data of logo marking function
STX
CDF
Sub
Command
[Log No.] [Log File Name]
Variable length
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Sub command is "S" at the time of setting and "A" for response data at the time of readout.
• Readout request of logo marking function
STX
CDF
R
Name
Data Length
[byte]
Logo No.
2
Logo File Name
Variable
length
[Logo No.]
2-byte
(Check Sum)
Outline
Delimiter
Description
The logo ile No. to be set or to be read out is
indicated.
“00” to “99”
The logo ile name corresponding to the
speciied number is indicated without extension.
In case of a DXF ile, an extension is required.
For VEC ile, the extension can be omitted (in
this case, the response has an extension.) (in
this case, the response has an extension.)
The logo ile speciication will be deleted unless
the ile name is speciied.
When the ile name is “ABCD.VEC”…
“ABCD” or “ABCD.VEC”
When the ile name is “ABCD.DXF”…
“ABCD.DXF”.
(The long ile name can be speciied.
Except the extended characters,
entry of up to 10 Shift-JIS characters
or 20 ASCII code characters is
recommended.)
Reference
• In the case of specifying logo ile in VEC format, apply CDC command for setting logo condition, and in the case of
specifying logo ile in DXF format, apply CDD command for setting logo condition.
• If readout data includes characters that cannot be expressed in ASCII code such as Katakana and Kanji (2-byte
character), these 2-byte characters are read out in shift JIS code.
76
VEC Logo Conditions (Code: CDC)
Sets the marking condition of VEC (work shape converted for laser marker) logo ile.
• Setting / Readout data of VEC logo condition
STX
CDC
Sub Command
[Logo No.] [Layer No.] [X Scale] [Y Scale] [X Position]
[Y Position] [Rotation Angle] [Laser power correction]
[Scan speed correction] [Laser Pulse Cycle Correction]
52-byte (LP-Mxxx / LP-Sxxx / LP-Zxxx), 49-byte (LP-SxxxW)
(Check
Sum)
Delimiter
Sub command is "S" at the time of setting and "A" for response data at the time of readout.
• Readout request of VEC logo condition
STX
CDC
[Logo No.]
2-byte
R
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Name
Data Length
[byte]
Logo No.
2
The number for logo condition is indicated.
"00" to "99"
Layer No.
2
Set the layer number.
"00" to "15"
X Scale
8
The X magniication with which the logo ile is marked
is indicated.
Y Scale
8
The Y magniication with which the logo ile is marked
is indicated.
X Position
8
Speciies X position of origin.
Y Position
8
Speciies Y position of origin.
Rotation Angle
7
The angle of rotation in counter-clockwise direction,
centering on the origin position of logo ile, is indicated.
"-180.00" to "+180.00" ["]
Laser Power
Correction
3
Indicates the correction value for laser power speciied
at the laser setting.
"000" to "999" [%]
Scan Speed
Correction
3
Performs correction of the set scan speed at speciied
value.
"001" to "999" [%]
(Laser Pulse Cycle
Correction)*
(3)
Indicates the correction value corresponding with the
marking pulse cycle speciied value here.
*(Nothing should be input with the LP-SxxxW type.)
"001" to "999" [%]
Outline
Content
"0010.000" to "1000.000"
[%]
"-330.000" to "+330.000"
[mm]
Reference
• Use the CDD Command for the condition setting of DXF ile.The common parameters with VEC and DXF iles are
changed by either CDC/CDD command.
77
DXF Logo Condition (Code: CDD)
Sets the marking condition of DXF logo ile.
• Setting / Readout data of DXF logo condition
STX
CDD
Sub
Command
[Logo No.] [Layer No.] [Origin] [X Position] [Y Position] [Rotation Angle]
[Size/Speciication] [Width] [Height] [Font][Marking Pitch] [Marking
Direction] [Laser Power Correction]
[Scan Speed Correction] [Laser Pulse Cycle Correction]
Max. 60-byte (LP-Mxxx / LP-Sxxx / LP-Zxxx), Max. 57-byte (LP-SxxxW)
(Check
Delimiter
Sum)
Sub command is "S" at the time of setting and "A" for response data at the time of readout.
• Readout request of DXF logo condition
STX
CDD
R
Darta (Logo No.)
2-byte
(Check Sum)
Name
Data Length
[byte]
Logo No.
2
Speciies the logo No.
Layer No.
2
Set the layer number.
"00" to "15"
“0”: Center
“1”: Left bottom
“2”: Right bottom
“3”: Left top“4”: Right top
“5”: Original graphic
Outline
Content
"00" to "99"
Origin
1
Sets the origin coordinate of graphic.
X Position
8
Speciies X position of origin.
Y Position
8
Speciies Y position of origin.
Rotation Angle
7
Speciies the rotation angle.
"-180.00" to "+180.00" ["]
1
Speciies size speciication method of
DXF ile data.
"0": Height/Width
"1": Width
"2": Height(width ixed)
"3": As original graphic size
(7)
<Only in the case where "0": Height/
Width, "1": Width is speciied at "Size
speciication">
Sets width of logo ile data.
Height
(7)
<Only in the case where "0": Height/
Width, "2": Height is speciied at "Size
speciication">
Sets height of logo ile data.
Font
2
Sets font of logo ile data.
Char. Font "01" to "10"
Marking Pitch
5
Sets marking pitch of DXF ile data.
"0.010" to "2.000"
Marking Direction
1
Sets marking direction of DXF ile data.
"0": Lateral, "1": Longitudinal
Laser Power
Correction
3
Indicates the correction value for laser
power speciied at the laser setting.
"000" to "999" [%]
Scan Speed
Correction
3
Indicates the correction value for the
scan speed speciied at the laser
setting
"001" to "999" [%]
(3)
Indicates the correction value
corresponding with the marking pulse
cycle speciied value here.
(Nothing should be input with the LPSxxxW type.)
"001" to "999" [%]
Size/
Speciication
Width
(Laser Pulse
Cycle
Correction)
Delimiter
"-330.000" to "+330.000"[mm]
Model type*
LP-Sxx0(W)
LP-Sxx5(W)
LP-Sxx2
LP-Mxx0/LP-Zxx0
LP-Mxx5
LP-Mxx6/LP-Zxx6
Setting range [mm]
"000.100" to "090.000"
"000.100" to "160.000"
"000.100" to "055.000"
"000.100" to "120.000"
"000.100" to "220.000"
"000.100" to "330.000"
* For the detail of the model type, refer to “Target Laser Marker” (P.4).
Reference
• Use the CDC Command for the condition setting of VEC ile. The common parameters with VEC and DXF iles are
changed by either CDC/CDD command.
78
Processing Element (Code: FIG)
Sets the processing element type (straight line, circle, arc) and coordinates.
• Setting / Readout data of processing element
STX
FIG
Sub
Command
[Processing Condition No.] [Processing Element No.]
[Element type] [depending on the element type]
Max. 61-byte
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Sub command is "S" at the time of setting and "A" for response data at the time of readout.
• Readout request of processing element
STX
FIG
R
[Processing Condition No.] [Processing Element No.]
5-byte
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
1. In case of straight line: (Data length…Max. 52-byte)
Name
Data Length
[byte]
Outline
Processing
Condition No.
2
Speciies the processing condition No.
“00” to “15”
Processing
Element No.
3
Speciies the processing element No.
“000” to “031”
Element type
1
Speciies the type of the processing
element.
“0”: straight line
X Coordinate of
Start Point
8
Speciies the X coordinate of start
point.
Y Coordinate of
Start Point
8
Speciies the Y coordinate of start
point.
X Coordinate of
End Point
8
Speciies the X coordinate of end
point.
Y Coordinate of
End Point
8
Speciies the Y coordinate of end
point.
Dashed Line:
Length of Solid
Part
Dashed Line:
Length of Blank
Part
(7)
(7)
Speciies the length of the solid part of
the dashed line.
Set the larger value than 'Line width'
in laser setting screen.
To make it not dashed line (solid line),
input nothing.
Speciies the length of the blank part
of the dashed line.
To make it not dashed line (solid line),
input nothing.
Description
Model type*
Setting range [mm]
LP-Sxx0(W)
LP-Sxx5(W)
LP-Sxx2
LP-Mxx0/LP-Zxx0
LP-Mxx5
LP-Mxx6/LP-Zxx6
"-045.000" to "+045.000"
"-080.000" to "+080.000"
"-027.500" to "+027.500"
"-060.000" to "+060.000"
"-110.000" to "+110.000"
"-165.000" to "+165.000"
Model type*
Setting range [mm]
LP-Sxx0(W)
LP-Sxx5(W)
LP-Sxx2
LP-Mxx0/LP-Zxx0
LP-Mxx5
LP-Mxx6/LP-Zxx6
"000.010" to "090.000"
"000.010" to "160.000"
"000.010" to "055.000"
"000.010" to "120.000"
"000.010" to "220.000"
"000.010" to "330.000"
Model type*
Setting range [mm]
LP-Sxx0(W)
LP-Sxx5(W)
LP-Sxx2
LP-Mxx0/LP-Zxx0
LP-Mxx5
LP-Mxx6/LP-Zxx6
"000.000" to "090.000"
"000.000" to "160.000"
"000.000" to "055.000"
"000.000" to "120.000"
"000.000" to "220.000"
"000.000" to "330.000"
For deletion of the processing element, set the element type to straight line, and set X and Y coordinates of both start and
end points to “0”.
* For the detail of the model type, refer to “Target Laser Marker” (P.4).
79
2. In case of circle (Data length…Max. 43-byte)
Name
Data Length
[byte]
Outline
Processing
Condition No.
2
Speciies the processing condition No.
“00” to “15”
Processing
Element No.
3
Speciies the processing element No.
“000” to “031”
Mode
1
Speciies the type of the processing
element.
“1”: circle
Center X
8
Speciies X coordinate of the center.
Y Coordinate of
Center
8
Speciies Y coordinate of the center.
Radius
Dashed Line:
Length of Solid
Part
Dashed Line:
Length of Blank
Part
7
(7)
(7)
Speciies the radius of the circle.
Speciies the length of the solid part of
the dashed line.
Set the larger value than 'Line width' in
laser setting screen.
To make it not dashed line (solid line),
input nothing.
Speciies the length of the blank part of
the dashed line.
To make it not dashed line (solid line),
input nothing.
Description
Model type*
Setting range [mm]
LP-Sxx0(W)
LP-Sxx5(W)
LP-Sxx2
LP-Mxx0/LP-Zxx0
LP-Mxx5
LP-Mxx6/LP-Zxx6
"-045.000" to "+045.000"
"-080.000" to "+080.000"
"-027.500" to "+027.500"
"-060.000" to "+060.000"
"-110.000" to "+110.000"
"-165.000" to "+165.000"
Model type*
Setting range [mm]
LP-Sxx0(W)
LP-Sxx5(W)
LP-Sxx2
LP-Mxx0/LP-Zxx0
LP-Mxx5
LP-Mxx6/LP-Zxx6
"000.010" to "045.000"
"000.010" to "080.000"
"000.010" to "027.500"
"000.010" to "060.000"
"000.010" to "110.000"
"000.010" to "165.000"
Model type*
Setting range [mm]
LP-Sxx0(W)
LP-Sxx5(W)
LP-Sxx2
LP-Mxx0/LP-Zxx0
LP-Mxx5
LP-Mxx6/LP-Zxx6
"000.010" to "090.000"
"000.010" to "160.000"
"000.010" to "055.000"
"000.010" to "120.000"
"000.010" to "220.000"
"000.010" to "330.000"
Model type*
Setting range [mm]
LP-Sxx0(W)
LP-Sxx5(W)
LP-Sxx2
LP-Mxx0/LP-Zxx0
LP-Mxx5
LP-Mxx6/LP-Zxx6
"000.000" to "090.000"
"000.000" to "160.000"
"000.000" to "055.000"
"000.000" to "120.000"
"000.000" to "220.000"
"000.000" to "330.000"
For deletion of the processing element, set the element type to straight line, and set X and Y coordinates of both start and
end points to “0”.
* For the detail of the model type, refer to “Target Laser Marker” (P.4).
80
3. In case of arc (Data length…Max. 61-byte)
Name
Data Length
[byte]
Outline
Processing
Condition No.
2
Speciies the processing condition No.
“00” to “15”
Processing
Element No.
3
Speciies the processing element No.
“000” to “031”
Mode
1
Speciies the type of the processing
element.
“2”: arc
X Coordinate of
Start Point
8
Speciies the X coordinate of start
point.
Y Coordinate of
Start Point
8
Speciies the Y coordinate of start
point.
X Coordinate of
End Point
8
Speciies the X coordinate of end point.
Y Coordinate of
End Point
8
Speciies the Y coordinate of end point.
Radius
7
Speciies the radius of the arc.
“000.010” to “330.000” [mm]
Description
Model type*
Setting range [mm]
LP-Sxx0(W)
LP-Sxx5(W)
LP-Sxx2
LP-Mxx0/LP-Zxx0
LP-Mxx5
LP-Mxx6/LP-Zxx6
"-045.000" to "+045.000"
"-080.000" to "+080.000"
"-027.500" to "+027.500"
"-060.000" to "+060.000"
"-110.000" to "+110.000"
"-165.000" to "+165.000"
Direction
1
Speciies the writing order of the arc.
“0”: CCW
“1”: CW
Open Angle
1
Speciies the center angle of arc.
“0”:180° under
“1”: 180° more
Dashed Line:
Length of Solid
Part
Dashed Line:
Length of Blank
Part
(7)
(7)
Speciies the length of the solid part of
the dashed line.
Set the larger value than 'Line width' in
laser setting screen.
To make it not dashed line (solid line),
input nothing.
Speciies the length of the blank part of
the dashed line.
To make it not dashed line (solid line),
input nothing.
Model type*
Setting range [mm]
LP-Sxx0(W)
LP-Sxx5(W)
LP-Sxx2
LP-Mxx0/LP-Zxx0
LP-Mxx5
LP-Mxx6/LP-Zxx6
"000.010" to "090.000"
"000.010" to "160.000"
"000.010" to "055.000"
"000.010" to "120.000"
"000.010" to "220.000"
"000.010" to "330.000"
Model type*
Setting range [mm]
LP-Sxx0(W)
LP-Sxx5(W)
LP-Sxx2
LP-Mxx0/LP-Zxx0
LP-Mxx5
LP-Mxx6/LP-Zxx6
"000.000" to "090.000"
"000.000" to "160.000"
"000.000" to "055.000"
"000.000" to "120.000"
"000.000" to "220.000"
"000.000" to "330.000"
For deletion of the processing element, set the element type to straight line, and set X and Y coordinates of both start and
end points to “0”.
* For the detail of the model type, refer to “Target Laser Marker” (P.4).
81
Processing Condition (Code: LAY)
Sets X/Y coordinate offset and laser power correction ratio, etc. for the speciied processing condition No.
• Setting / Readout data of processing condition
STX
LAY
Sub
Command
[Processing Condition No.] [Layer No.] [X Offset]
[Y Offset] [Rotation Angle] [Laser Power Correction]
[Scan Speed Correction] [Laser Pulse Cycle Correction]
36-byte (LP-Mxxx / LP-Sxxx / LP-Zxxx), 33-byte (LP-SxxxW)
(Check
Sum)
Delimiter
Sub command is "S" at the time of setting and "A" for response data at the time of readout.
• Readout request of processing condition
STX
LAY
[Processing Condition No.]
2-byte
R
Name
Data Length
[byte]
Processing
Condition No.
2
Speciies the processing
condition No.
“00” to “15”
Layer No.
2
Set the layer number.
“00” to “15”
X Offset
8
Speciies X offset.
Y Offset
8
Speciies Y offset.
Rotation Angle
7
Speciies the rotation angle.
“-180.00” to “+180.00” [°]
Laser Power
Correction
3
Indicates the correction value
corresponding with the marking
pulse cycle speciied value here.
“000” to “999” [%]
Scan Speed
Correction
3
Performs correction of the set
scan speed at speciied value.
“001” to “999” [%]
The marking pulse cycle set is
corrected by the speciied value
here
(Nothing should be input with the
LP-SxxxW type.)
“001” to “999” [%]
(Laser Pulse Cycle
Correction)
(3)
Outline
* For the detail of the model type, refer to “Target Laser Marker” (P.4).
82
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Description
Model type*
Setting range [mm]
LP-Sxx0(W)
LP-Sxx5(W)
LP-Sxx2
LP-Mxx0/LP-Zxx0
LP-Mxx5
LP-Mxx6/LP-Zxx6
"-045.000" to "+045.000"
"-080.000" to "+080.000"
"-027.500" to "+027.500"
"-060.000" to "+060.000"
"-110.000" to "+110.000"
"-165.000" to "+165.000"
Arbitrary Point Radiation Coordinate and Time (Code: PRD)
Sets arbitrary point radiation X/Y coordinates, radiation time and laser power correction ratio.
• Setting of arbitrary point radiation coordinate and time
STX
PRD
Condition No.] [Start Line] [Radiation Time] [Laser Power
Correction] [X Position] [Y Position] [• • •]
[X Position] [Y Position]
15+16n-byte
S
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
• Setting of radiation time, and laser power correction only
STX
PRD
[Condition No.] [Line No.] [Radiation Time] [Laser Power
Correction]
15-byte
S
• Delete of arbitrary point radiation condition
STX
PRD
[Condition No.] [Start Line] [End Line]
8-byte
S
• Readout request of arbitrary point radiation coordinate and time
STX
PRD
[Condition No.] [Line No.]
5-byte
R
• Readout data of arbitrary point radiation coordinate and time
STX
PRD
[Condition No.] [Line No.] [Radiation Time] [Laser Power
Correction] [X Position] [Y Position]
Max. 31-byte
A
When there is no setting data in the selected line, [Radiation Time], [Laser Power Correction], [X Coordinate] and [Y
Coordinate] ields are not existed.
Name
Data Length
[byte]
Condition No.
2
The condition No. to be set or to be
read out is indicated.
“00” to “15”
Line No.
3
Speciies Line No.
“000” to “049”
Start Line
3
Speciies Start Line No.
End Line
3
Speciies End Line No.
Radiation Time
7
Speciies the radiation time.
“00000.1” to “99999.9” [ms]
Laser Power
Correction
3
Indicates the correction value for
laser power speciied at the laser
setting.
“000” to “999” [%]
X Position
8
Speciies X coordinate for radiation.
Outline
Description
“000” to “049”
Model type*
Y Position
8
Speciies Y coordinate for radiation
Setting range [mm]
LP-Sxx0(W)
"-045.000" to "+045.000"
LP-Sxx5(W)
"-080.000" to "+080.000"
LP-Sxx2
"-027.500" to "+027.500"
LP-Mxx0/LP-Zxx0
"-060.000" to "+060.000"
LP-Mxx5
"-110.000" to "+110.000"
LP-Mxx6/LP-Zxx6
"-165.000" to "+165.000"
* For the detail of the model type, refer to “Target Laser Marker” (P.4).
Reference
• The coordinate numbers that can be set or read out at once are max. 50 points.
83
Arbitrary Point Radiation Condition (Code: PRF)
Sets X/Y coordinate offset and laser power correction ratio, etc. for the speciied arbitrary point radiation condition.
• Setting / Readout data of general condition
STX
PRF
Sub
Command
[Condition No.] [Layer No.] [X Offset]
[Y Offset] [Laser Power Correction]
[Laser Pulse Cycle Correction]
26-byte (LP-Mxxx / LP-Sxxx / LP-Zxxx), 23-byte (LP-SxxxW)
(Check
Sum)
Delimiter
Sub command is "S" at the time of setting and "A" for response data at the time of readout.
• Readout request of processing condition
STX
PRF
[Condition No.]
2-byte
R
Name
Data Length
[byte]
Condition No.
2
The condition No. to be set or to
be read out is indicated.
“00” to “15”
Layer No.
2
Set the layer number.
“00” ixed
Outline
Model type*
Setting range [mm]
LP-Sxx0(W)
LP-Sxx5(W)
LP-Sxx2
LP-Mxx0/LP-Zxx0
LP-Mxx5
LP-Mxx6/LP-Zxx6
"-045.000" to "+045.000"
"-080.000" to "+080.000"
"-027.500" to "+027.500"
"-060.000" to "+060.000"
"-110.000" to "+110.000"
"-165.000" to "+165.000"
8
Speciies X offset.
Y Offset
8
Speciies Y offset.
Laser Power
Correction
3
Indicates the correction value for
laser power speciied at the laser
setting.
“000” to “999” [%]
(3)
Indicates the correction value
corresponding with the marking
pulse cycle speciied value here.
(Nothing should be input with the
LP-SxxxW type.)
“001” to “999” [%]
* For the detail of the model type, refer to “Target Laser Marker” (P.4).
Delimiter
Description
X Offset
(Laser Pulse Cycle
Correction)
84
(Check Sum)
General Condition (Code: ALC)
Sets the conditions related to whole ile.
• Setting / Readout data of general condition
STX
ALC
Sub
Command
[X Offset] [Y Offset] [Z Offset]
[Rotation Offset] [Overwriting Frequency]
[Overwriting Interval]
[Mirror (Y Axis Summetry)] [Flip (X Axis Summetry)]
[2D/3D Selection]
Max. 41-byte
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Sub command is "S" at the time of setting and "A" for response data at the time of readout.
• Readout request of general condition
STX
ALC
R
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Name
Data Length
[byte]
X Offset
8
The marking position is offset to the X
direction.
Y Offset
8
The marking position is offset to the Y
direction.
Z Offset
(Effective only
LP-M / LP-Z
series)
8
<LP-Sxxx/LP-SxxxW>
As this item is not available for the LP-S
series, set to "+000.000".
<LP-Mxxx/LP-Zxxx>
The marking position is offset to the Z
direction.
Rotation Offset
7
The marking position is offset to the
rotating direction.
“-180.00” to “+180.00” [°]
Overwriting
Frequency
4
Marking is repeated by the repeat number set. When the marking on the lying
object is valid, set "0001".
“0001” to “9999” [times]
Overwriting
Interval
3
The interval period at overwriting
marking is set.
“0.0” to “9.9” [sec] or “010” to “060" [sec]
Mirror (Y Axis
Summetry)
1
The character marked is inverted to the
Y axis.
“0”…inversion OFF
“1”…inversion ON
Flip (X Axis
Summetry)
1
The character marked is inverted to the
X axis.
“0”…inversion OFF
“1”…inversion ON
(1)
<LP-Sxxx/LP-SxxxW>
As this item is not available for the LP-S
series, set to "0" or no data.
<LP-Mxxx/LP-Zxxx>
Selects 2D/3D marking.
LP-Sxxx(W): "0"
LP-Mxxx/LP-Zxxx:"0"…2D marking
"1"…3D marking
2D/3D Selection
(Effective only
LP-M / LP-Z
series)
Outline
Description
Model type*
Setting range [mm]
LP-Sxx0(W)
LP-Sxx5(W)
LP-Sxx2
LP-Mxx0/LP-Zxx0
LP-Mxx5
LP-Mxx6/LP-Zxx6
"-045.000" to "+045.000"
"-080.000" to "+080.000"
"-027.500" to "+027.500"
"-060.000" to "+060.000"
"-110.000" to "+110.000"
"-165.000" to "+165.000"
Model type*
Setting range [mm]
LP-Sxxx(W)
LP-Mxxx
LP-Zxxx
"+000.000"
"-022.000" to "+022.000"
"-025.000" to "+025.000"
* For the detail of the model type, refer to “Target Laser Marker” (P.4).
Reference
• When marking on the lying object is valid, Overwriting Function cannot be used.
85
Character Condition (Shortened Form) (Code: SPC)
Sets the condition for marking character string per line.
(X/Y coordinates and laser power correction ratio only)
Setting / Readout data of character condition (shortened form)
STX
SPC
Sub
Command
[Condition No.] [X Position] [Y Position] [Laser Power
Correction]
21-byte
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Sub command is "S" at the time of setting and "A" for response data at the time of readout.
Readout request of character condition (shortened form)
STX
SPC
R
Name
Data Length
[byte]
Condition No.
2
[Condition No.]
2-byte
(Check Sum)
Outline
The number for marking condition is
indicated.
Delimiter
Description
“01” to “99”
When the marking form is other than sector
marking
X Position
8
Y Position
8
Laser Power
Corrrection
3
Sets the coordinate (X/Y) of the
character.
The base position of the coordinate
varies from "alignment" setting:
Left: lower left of the irst character
Center: the center of the string
Right: lower right of the last character.
Setting range [mm]
"-045.000" to "+045.000"
"-080.000" to "+080.000"
"-027.500" to "+027.500"
"-060.000" to "+060.000"
"-110.000" to "+110.000"
"-165.000" to "+165.000"
When the marking form is other than sector
marking :
“-999.999” to “+999.999” [mm]
Indicates the correction value
corresponding with the marking pulse
cycle speciied value here.
* For the detail of the model type, refer to “Target Laser Marker” (P.4).
86
Model type*
LP-Sxx0(W)
LP-Sxx5(W)
LP-Sxx2
LP-Mxx0/LP-Zxx0
LP-Mxx5
LP-Mxx6/LP-Zxx6
“000” to “999” [%]
Character Condition (Code: STC)
Sets the condition for marking character string per line.
• Setting / Readout data of character condition
STX
STC
Sub
Command
[Condition No.] [Layer No.] [Start Line] [End Line]
[Marking Shape] [Vary with the Marking Shape]
[Font No.] [Bold Line Width] [Laser Power Correction]
[Scan Speed Correction] [Laser Pulse Cycle Correction]
Max. 85-byte (LP-Mxxx / LP-Sxxx / LP-Zxxx), Max. 82-byte (LPSxxxW)
(Check
Sum)
Delimiter
Sub command is "S" at the time of setting and "A" for response data at the time of readout.
• Readout request of character condition
STX
STC
[Condition No.]
2-byte
R
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
1. When markings from is straight line/proportional/justify
Data length …77-byte (LP-Mxxx / LP-Sxxx / LP-Zxxx), 74-byte (LP-SxxxW)
Name
Data Length
[byte]
Condition No.
2
The number for marking condition is
indicated.
“01” to “99”
Layer No.
2
Set the layer number.
“00” to “15”
Start Line
2
The start line of character string for
marking with this condition is indicated.
“01” to “99” [row]
End Line
2
The end line of character string for
marking with this condition is indicated.
“01” to “99” [row]
Marking
Shape
1
The marking form is indicated.
“0”…straight line
“1”…Proportional
“2”…Justify
Alignment
1
The Alignment is indicated.
“0”…left
“1”…center
“2”…right
Character
Height
7
The height of character for marking is
indicated.
Character
Width
7
The width of character for marking is
indicated.
X Position
8
Y Position
8
Outline
Sets the coordinate (X/Y) of the character.
The base position of the coordinate varies
from "alignment" setting:
Left: lower left of the irst character
Center: the center of the string
Right: lower right of the last character
Description
Model type*
Setting range [mm]
LP-Sxx0(W)
LP-Sxx5(W)
LP-Sxx2
LP-Mxx0/LP-Zxx0
LP-Mxx5
LP-Mxx6/LP-Zxx6
"000.100" to "090.000"
"000.100" to "160.000"
"000.100" to "055.000"
"000.100" to "120.000"
"000.100" to "220.000"
"000.100" to "330.000"
Model type*
Setting range [mm]
LP-Sxx0(W)
LP-Sxx5(W)
LP-Sxx2
LP-Mxx0/LP-Zxx0
LP-Mxx5
LP-Mxx6/LP-Zxx6
"-045.000" to "+045.000"
"-080.000" to "+080.000"
"-027.500" to "+027.500"
"-060.000" to "+060.000"
"-110.000" to "+110.000"
"-165.000" to "+165.000"
87
Data Length
[byte]
Outline
Character
Interval/Character String
Width
7
Straight line: gap between adjacent
characters by their respective reference
points.
Proportional: gap between the right end
of a character and the left end of the next
character.
Justify: the total width of character string
Line Interval
7
The line pitchto mark the next line is
indicated when the character string is
marked over two or more lines.
Tilt Angle
7
The tilt angle for character for marking to
X axis is indicated.
“-180.00” to “+180.00” [°]
Font No.
2
The number corresponding to the 10 fonts
previously registered is indicated.
Char. Font “01” to “10”
Name
Description
Model type*
Setting range [mm]
LP-Sxx0(W)
LP-Sxx5(W)
LP-Sxx2
LP-Mxx0/LP-Zxx0
LP-Mxx5
LP-Mxx6/LP-Zxx6
"000.000" to "090.000"
"000.000" to "160.000"
"000.000" to "055.000"
"000.000" to "120.000"
"000.000" to "220.000"
"000.000" to "330.000"
Model type*
Bold Line
Width
5
The thickness of line for character for
marking is indicated.
LP-Sxx0(W)/LP-Sxx2/
LP-Mxx0/LP-Zxx0
LP-Sxx5(W)/LP-Mxx5/
LP-Mxx6/LP-Zxx6
Laser Power
Corrrection
3
Indicates the correction value for laser
power speciied at the laser setting.
“000” to “999” [%]
Scan
Speed
Correction
3
Indicates the correction value for the scan
speed speciied at the laser setting
“001” to “999” [%]
(3)
Indicates the correction value corresponding with the marking
pulse cycle speciied value here.
(Nothing should be input with the LPSxxxW type.)
“001” to “999” [%]
(Laser Pulse
Cycle Cor.)
Setting range [mm]
"0.000" to "2.000"
"0.000" to "4.000"
* For the detail of the model type, refer to “Target Laser Marker” (P.4).
2. Single ine adjustment
Data length …85-byte (LP-Mxxx / LP-Sxxx / LP-Zxxx), 82-byte (LP-SxxxW)
88
Name
Data Length
[byte]
Condition
No.
2
The number for marking condition is
indicated.
“01” to “99”
Layer No.
2
Set the layer number.
“00” to “15”
Start Line
2
The start line of character string for marking
with this condition is indicated.
“01” to “99” [row]
End Line
2
The end line of character string for marking
with this condition is indicated.
“01” to “99” [row]
Outline
Description
Marking
Shape
1
The marking form is indicated.
“3”… marking outside arc with clockwise
rotation
“4”…marking inside arc with
counterclockwise rotation
Alignment
1
The Alignment is indicated.
“0”…left
“1”…center
“2”…right
Name
Data Length
[byte]
Character
Height
7
The height of character for marking is
indicated.
Character
Width
7
The width of character for marking is
indicated.
Center
Position X
8
The center of X coordinate for arc is
indicated.
Center
Position Y
8
The center of Y coordinate for arc is
indicated.
Radius
8
The radius of arc is indicated.
Outline
Description
Model type*
Setting range [mm]
LP-Sxx0(W)
LP-Sxx5(W)
LP-Sxx2
LP-Mxx0/LP-Zxx0
LP-Mxx5
LP-Mxx6/LP-Zxx6
"000.100" to "090.000"
"000.100" to "160.000"
"000.100" to "055.000"
"000.100" to "120.000"
"000.100" to "220.000"
"000.100" to "330.000"
“-999.999” to “+999.999” [mm]
“+000.000” to “+999.999” [mm]
Model type*
Setting range [mm]
LP-Sxx0(W)
LP-Sxx5(W)
LP-Sxx2
LP-Mxx0/LP-Zxx0
LP-Mxx5
LP-Mxx6/LP-Zxx6
"000.000" to "090.000"
"000.000" to "160.000"
"000.000" to "055.000"
"000.000" to "120.000"
"000.000" to "220.000"
"000.000" to "330.000"
7
The difference of radius from the center
position of marking position to the next line
is indicated when the character string is
marked over two or more lines.
Start Angle
7
The angle from the positive (+) side of X
coordinate with counter-clockwise at the
irst character in character string for marking
is indicated.
“-180.00” to “+180.00” [°]
Angle of
Character
Interval
7
The angle between the center of character
and the center of next character is indicated.
“-180.00” to “+180.00” [°]
Font No.
2
The number corresponding to the 10 fonts
previously registered is indicated.
Char. Font “01” to “10”
Radius of
Line Interval
Model type*
Bold Line
Width
5
The thickness of line for character for
marking is indicated.
LP-Sxx0(W)/LP-Sxx2/
LP-Mxx0/LP-Zxx0
LP-Sxx5(W)/LP-Mxx5/
LP-Mxx6/LP-Zxx6
Laser Power
Corrrection
3
Indicates the correction value for laser
power speciied at the laser setting.
“000” to “999” [%]
Scan
Speed
Correction
3
Indicates the correction value for the scan
speed speciied at the laser setting
“001” to “999” [%]
Indicates the correction value corresponding with the marking
pulse cycle speciied value here.
(Nothing should be input with the LP-SxxxW
type.)
“001” to “999” [%]
(Laser Pulse
Cycle Cor.)
(3)
Setting range [mm]
"0.000" to "2.000"
"0.000" to "4.000"
* For the detail of the model type, refer to “Target Laser Marker” (P.4).
Reference
• At marking of bold characters, set the values so ratio of character height to character width be within 1/10 to 10.
• Set the Bold Line Width to 1/2 or less of the character height or the character width, whichever is smaller.
89
General Character Condition (Code: SCC)
Sets the marking pitch for bold character and kerning for marking proportional character.
• Setting / Readout data of general character condition
STX
SCC
Sub
Command
[Marking Pitch] [Kerning]
6-byte
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Sub command is "S" at the time of setting and "A" for response data at the time of readout.
• Readout request of general character condition
STX
SCC
R
Name
Data Length
[byte]
Marking Pitch
5
Kerning
90
1
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Outline
Description
The marking pitch for the bold character is
indicated.
“0.010” to “2.000” [mm]
The minimum value of character interval
with proportional form is speciied.
“1” … level 1
(Minimize the base point of the character
interval with this condition. The letterspacing of the letter “i” and “l” (small letter
“L”) are recognized as “0”.)
“2” … level 2
(Set the origin point of the character
with intermediate degree between the
character interval set with Level 1 and
Level 3.The character widths of “i” and
“l” (small letter “L”) become 1/4 of each
character width.)
“3” … level 3
(Maximize the origin point of the character
interval with this condition. The character
widths of “i” and “l” (small letter “L”)
become 5/8 of each character width.)
Layer Condition (Code: SUF)
[Supported models: LP-Mxxx/LP-Zxxx]
Sets the layer condition for 3D marking for LP-M / LP-Z series.
• Setting/Readout data of layer condition/response data at the time of readout
STX
SUF
Sub
Command
[Layer No.] [Work Shape]
[Setting Data (varies depending on work shape)]
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Sub command is "S" at the time of setting and "A" for response data at the time of readout.
• Readout request of layer condition
STX
SUF
[Layer No.]
2-byte
R
1. Plane and Cylinder (Data length…70-byte)
Name
Data Length
[byte]
Layer No.
2
Set the layer number.
"00" to "15"
Work Shape
1
Work shape is indicated.
"0": Plane
"1": Cylinder convex
"2": Cylinder concave
Center Position X
8
The center of X coordinate for work is
indicated.
Center Position Y
8
The center of Y coordinate for work is
indicated.
Center Position Z
8
The center of Z coordinate for work is
indicated.
Rotation Angle X
7
The rotation angle X is indicated.
"-090.00" to "+090.00" [°]
Rotation Angle Y
7
The rotation angle Y is indicated.
"-090.00" to "+090.00" [°]
Rotation Angle Z
7
The rotation angle Z is indicated.
"-180.00" to "+180.00"[°]
7
<When the work shape is "0": Plane>
Plane length (vertical) is indicated.
<When the work shape is "1", "2":
Cylinder>
Cylinder length (height) is indicated.
Height
Width or Diameter
Defocus
7
8
Outline
<When the work shape is "0": Plane>
The width (lateral) of plane is indicated.
<When the work shape is "1", "2":
Cylinder>
The diameter of cylinder is indicated.
The defocus value is indicated.
Description
Model type*
Setting range [mm]
LP-Mxx0/LP-Zxx0
LP-Mxx5
LP-Mxx6/LP-Zxx6
"-060.000" to "+060.000"
"-110.000" to "+110.000"
"-165.000" to "+165.000"
Model type*
Setting range [mm]
LP-Mxx0/LP-Zxx0
LP-Mxx5
LP-Mxx6/LP-Zxx6
"001.000" to "120.000"
"001.000" to "220.000"
"001.000" to "330.000"
Model type*
Setting range [mm]
LP-Mxxx
LP-Zxxx
"-022.000" to "+022.000"
"-025.000" to "+025.000"
* For the detail of the model type, refer to “Target Laser Marker” (P.4).
Reference
• Set the defocus value so that the sum of the Z coordinate to be actually marked and the defocus value is in the range of
the interwork distance (speciication value) +/-22.000mm (LP-M) or +/-25.000mm (LP-Z).
91
2. Vertical Cone (Data length…77-byte)
Name
Data Length
[byte]
Layer No.
2
Outline
Description
Set the layer number.
"00" to "15"
"3": Horizontal cone convex
"4": Horizontal cone concave
"5": Vertical cone convex
"6": Vertical cone concave
Work Shape
1
Work shape is indicated.
Center Position X
8
The center of X coordinate for work is
indicated.
Center Position Y
8
The center of Y coordinate for work is
indicated.
Center Position Z
8
The center of Z coordinate for work is
indicated.
Rotation Angle X
7
The rotation angle X is indicated.
"-090.00" to "+090.00" [°]
Rotation Angle Y
7
The rotation angle Y is indicated.
"-090.00" to "+090.00" [°]
Rotation Angle Z
7
The rotation angle Z is indicated.
"-180.00" to "+180.00"[°]
Length/Height
7
Vertical cone length (lateral) or height
(vertical) is indicated.
Diameter 1
7
The diameter of the top end (+ side
direction) of vertical cone is indicated.
Diameter 2
7
The diameter of the bottom end (- side
direction) of vertical cone is indicated.
Defocus
8
The defocus value is indicated.
Model type*
Setting range [mm]
LP-Mxx0/LP-Zxx0 "-060.000" to "+060.000"
LP-Mxx5
"-110.000" to "+110.000"
LP-Mxx6/LP-Zxx6 "-165.000" to "+165.000"
Model type*
Setting range [mm]
LP-Mxx0/LP-Zxx0
LP-Mxx5
LP-Mxx6/LP-Zxx6
"001.000" to "120.000"
"001.000" to "220.000"
"001.000" to "330.000"
Model type*
LP-Mxxx
LP-Zxxx
Setting range [mm]
"-022.000" to "+022.000"
"-025.000" to "+025.000"
* For the detail of the model type, refer to “Target Laser Marker” (P.4).
Reference
• Set the values so that Diameter2 is larger than Diameter1 for vertical cone convex, or that the Diameter1 is larger than
Diameter2 for vertical cone concave.
• Set the defocus value so that the sum of the Z coordinate to be actually marked and the defocus value is in the range of
the interwork distance (speciication value) +/-22.000mm (LP-M) or +/-25.000mm (LP-Z).
92
3. Sphere (Data length…63-byte)
Name
Data Length
[byte]
Layer No.
2
Set the layer number.
"00" to "15"
Work Shape
1
Work shape is indicated.
"7": Sphere convex
"8": Sphere concave
Center Position X
8
The center of X coordinate for work is
indicated.
Center Position Y
8
The center of Y coordinate for work is
indicated.
Center Position Z
8
The center of Z coordinate for work is
indicated.
Rotation Angle X
7
The rotation angle X is indicated.
"-090.00" to "+090.00" [°]
Rotation Angle Y
7
The rotation angle Y is indicated.
"-090.00" to "+090.00" [°]
Rotation Angle Z
7
The rotation angle Z is indicated.
"-180.00" to "+180.00"[°]
Outline
Diameter
7
The diameter of sphere is indicated.
Defocus
8
The defocus value is indicated.
Description
Model type*
Setting range [mm]
LP-Mxx0/LP-Zxx0
LP-Mxx5
LP-Mxx6/LP-Zxx6
"-060.000" to "+060.000"
"-110.000" to "+110.000"
"-165.000" to "+165.000"
Model type*
Setting range [mm]
LP-Mxx0/LP-Zxx0
LP-Mxx5
LP-Mxx6/LP-Zxx6
"001.000" to "120.000"
"001.000" to "220.000"
"001.000" to "330.000"
Model type*
Setting range [mm]
LP-Mxxx
LP-Zxxx
"-022.000" to "+022.000"
"-025.000" to "+025.000"
* For the detail of the model type, refer to “Target Laser Marker” (P.4).
Reference
• Set the defocus value so that the sum of the Z coordinate to be actually marked and the defocus value is in the range of
the interwork distance (speciication value) +/-22.000mm (LP-M) or +/-25.000mm (LP-Z).
93
Serial Offset (Code: SEO)
Sets the coordinates speciied for "Serial Offset Function" to change coordinates for each marking.
• Serial offset setting
STX
SEO
Name
S
Data Length
[byte]
[X Offset] [Y Offset] [Z Offset]
[q Offset] [Laser Power Correction]
34-byte
Outline
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Description
Model type*
Setting range [mm]
LP-Sxx0(W)
LP-Sxx5(W)
LP-Sxx2
LP-Mxx0/LP-Zxx0
LP-Mxx5
LP-Mxx6/LP-Zxx6
"-045.000" to "+045.000"
"-080.000" to "+080.000"
"-027.500" to "+027.500"
"-060.000" to "+060.000"
"-110.000" to "+110.000"
"-165.000" to "+165.000"
Model type*
Setting range [mm]
X Offset
8
The offset of X coordinate is indicated.
Y Offset
8
The offset of Y coordinate is indicated.
Z Offset
(Effective only
LP-M / LP-Z
series)
8
q Offset
<LP-Sxxx/LP-SxxxW>
As this item is not available for the
LP-S series, set to "+000.000".
<LP-Mxxx/LP-Zxxx>
The offset of Z coordinate is indicated.
7
The offset of q coordinate is indicated.
“-180.00” to “+180.00”
Laser Power
Correction
3
Indicates the correction value for laser
power speciied at the laser setting.
“000” to “999” [%]
LP-Sxxx(W)
LP-Mxxx
LP-Zxxx
"+000.000"(ixed)
"-022.000" to "+022.000"
"-025.000" to "+025.000"
* For the detail of the model type, refer to “Target Laser Marker” (P.4).
Reference
• The command for serial offset input is enable when serial offset is set with external offset condition.
• Transmission is available only during remote control and when the internal shutter is opened ("Reception mode ON" is
not set for command reception permission (MKM command)).
• Set "Serial Offset" for "External Offset Condition" before using this command.
• When using this function (serial offset), transmit this command by every marking. Otherwise it does not become marking
ready condition, and marking is not available.
• For resetting the data, either set "reception mode ON" for the command reception permission (MKM command), or close
the shutter.
• This input cannot be used with the rank marking and lying object marking.
• Refer to "2-3. Timing Chart" in page 34 for the timing chart for this command transmission.
94
Timing Chart for Serial Offset Marking
The timing chart for the command for serial offset (SEO) is shown below.
ON
LASER IN
OFF
(Open)
SHUTTER
CONTROL
INPUT
ON
(Close) OFF
ON
TRIG. IN
OFF
ON
READY
OFF
ON
MARKING
OFF
Command Data
T1
T2
SEOS
SEOS
Response Data
ACK
SEOS
ACK
ACK
Item
Time
Remarks
T1
1 second or more
SEO command cannot be sent until the shutter opens.
The shutter opens approx. 1 second after the shutter open input.
T2
0 ms or more
After conirming the marking output is turned ON, the next SEO command data can be sent.
Reference
• Transmission is available for the command for serial offset (SEO) only during remote control, and when the internal shutter
is opened (“Reception mode ON” is not set for command reception mode (MKM command)).
• When serial offset is set with external offset condition, data of set serial offset must be transmitted by every marking.
• For LP-Mxxx-S type, open the laser gate to turn ON the ready signal.
Laser gate can be controlled with any timing regardless of the command sequence by the external signal input.
95
External Offset Condition (Code: OFC)
Sets input conditions of "External Offset Function" to switch coordinates using I/O input.
• Setting / Readout data of external offset condition
STX
OFC
Sub
Command
[External Offset]
1-byte
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
• Readout request of external offset condition
STX
OFC
R
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Data Length
[byte]
Name
External Offset
1
Outline
Description
“0”…no use
“1”…low 4-bit
“2”…low 8-bit
“3”…low 10-bit
“4”…Serial Data mode
The condition for parallel input for the
external offset is indicated.
External Offset Coordinates (Code: OFS)
Sets offset coordinates used for "External Offset Function" to switch coordinates using I/O input.
• Setting / Readout data of external offset
STX
OFS
[Parallel Data No.] [X Offset] [Y Offset]
[Z Offset] [qOffset] [Power correction]
38-byte
Sub
Command
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Sub command is "S" at the time of setting and "A" for response data at the time of readout.
• Readout request of external offset
STX
OFS
R
[Parallel Data No.]
4-byte
Name
Data Length
[byte]
Parallel Data No.
4
The parallel data number in which
offset is set is indicated.
X Offset
8
The offset of X coordinate is
indicated.
Y Offset
8
The offset of Y coordinate is
indicated.
Z Offset
(Effective only
LP-M/LP-Z series )
8
qOffset
<LP-Sxxx/LP-SxxxW>
As this item is not available for the
LP-S series, set to "+000.000".
<LP-Mxxx/LP-Zxxx>
The offset of Z coordinate is indicated.
7
The rotation offset is indicated.
“-180.00” to “+180.00” [°]
Power correction
3
The power correction is indicated.
“000” to “999”
Outline
* For the detail of the model type, refer to “Target Laser Marker” (P.4).
96
Description
“0000” to “1023”
Model type*
Setting range [mm]
LP-Sxx0(W)
LP-Sxx5(W)
LP-Sxx2
LP-Mxx0/LP-Zxx0
LP-Mxx5
LP-Mxx6/LP-Zxx6
"-045.000" to "+045.000"
"-080.000" to "+080.000"
"-027.500" to "+027.500"
"-060.000" to "+060.000"
"-110.000" to "+110.000"
"-165.000" to "+165.000"
Model type*
Setting range [mm]
LP-Sxxx(W)
LP-Mxxx
LP-Zxxx
"+000.000"(ixed)
"-022.000" to "+022.000"
"-025.000" to "+025.000"
Step & Repeat Condition (Code: SRC)
Sets the condition of "Step & Repeat" to mark the same marking contents on multiple locations in one ile.
• Setting / Readout data of general condition
Set the Step & Repeat condition for speciied number with the following format:
STX
SRC
Sub
Command
[Step & Repeat] [Number of Row] [Number of column]
[Row Step] [Column Step] [XOffset] [Y Offset]
[Base Position] [Counter Update at each step]
max. 41-byte
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Sub command is "S" at the time of setting and "A" for response data at the time of readout.
• Readout request of general condition
STX
SRC
R
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Name
Data Length
[byte]
Step & Repeat
1
Marking the same data is
repeated to the X or Y axis
direction.
“0”…OFF
“1”… ON
Number of
Row
3
The number of row to be
marked to the Y direction is
indicated.
“001” to “400”…[row]
(number of row x column < 4000)
Number of
column
3
The number of column to be
marked to the X direction is
indicated.
“001” to “400”…[column]
(number of row x column < 4000)
Row Step
7
The marking pitch to the Y
direction is speciied.
Column Step
7
The marking pitch to the X
direction is speciied.
X Offset
(8)
Y Offset
(8)
Base Position
Counter
Update at
each step
2
2
Outline
Speciies X/Y Offset of the
reference step.
(If both values of X&Y offsets
are “0“, X/Y off setting can be
omitted.)
Description
Model type*
Setting range [mm]
LP-Sxx0(W)
LP-Sxx5(W)
LP-Sxx2
LP-Mxx0 / LP-Zxx0
LP-Mxx5
LP-Mxx6/LP-Zxx6
"000.000" to "090.000"
"000.000" to "160.000"
"000.000" to "055.000"
"000.000" to "120.000"
"000.000" to "220.000"
"000.000" to "330.000"
Model type*
Setting range [mm]
LP-Sxx0(W)
LP-Sxx5(W)
LP-Sxx2
LP-Mxx0 / LP-Zxx0
LP-Mxx5
LP-Mxx6/LP-Zxx6
"-045.000" to "+045.000"
"-080.000" to "+080.000"
"-027.500" to "+027.500"
"-060.000" to "+060.000"
"-110.000" to "+110.000"
"-165.000" to "+165.000"
Select the base position.
“00”…upper left
“01”…upper right
“10”…lower left
“11”…lower right
Handling of counter is
indicated.
“00”…same in all steps
“11”…missing number and marking laterally direction
“12”…missing number and marking lengthways direction
“21”…sequential number and marking laterally direction
“22”…sequential number and marking lengthways
direction
* For the detail of the model type, refer to “Target Laser Marker” (P.4).
Reference
• When the Step and Repeat setting is set to “None,” the Step and Repeat setting can be omitted. If data is input and that
data is out of the setting range, response data for abnormal receiving is returned.
• When the data is readout under the step & repeat is set to "none", the subsequent ields following to "number of Row" is
not readout.
97
Step & Repeat Fine Adjustment (Code: SRA)
Sets the ine adjustment of "Step & Repeat" to mark the same marking contents on multiple locations in one ile.
• Setting / Readout data of Step & Repeat ine adjustment
STX
SRA
Sub
Command
[List line] [Fine Adj. Type ] [Varies depending on the type
of line adj.]
Max. 605-byte
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Sub command is "S" at the time of setting and "A" for response data at the time of readout.
• Readout request of Step & Repeat ine adjustment
STX
SRA
[List line]
4-byte
R
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
1. Setting deletion (data length: max. 9-Byte)
Name
Data Length
[byte]
List line
4
The line in the list where this instruction is stores is
indicated.
“0000” to “0399”
Fine Adj. Type
1
The type of instruction for ine adjustment is
indicated.
“0”…Setting deletion
Number of
delete line
(4)
The number of delete line is speciied. If only the irst
line in the list line will be deleted, the setting can be
omitted.
“0001” to “0400”
Outline
Description
2. In case of "Single" as ine adjustment type (data length: max. 45-Byte)
Name
Data Length
[byte]
Outline
List line
4
The line in the list where this instruction is
stored is indicated.
“0000” to “0399”
Fine Adj. Type
1
The type of instruction for ine adjustment
is indicated.
“1”…single ine adjustment
Target Row
3
The target row to which the ine
adjustment is provided is indicated.
“001” to “400”
Target
Column
3
The target column to which the ine
adjustment is provided is indicated.
“001” to “400”
FineTune X
8
The amount of adjustment for X axis is
indicated.
FineTune Y
8
The amount of adjustment for Y axis is
indicated.
Fine Tune Z
(Effective only
LP-M / LP-Z
series)
8
<LP-Sxxx/LP-SxxxW>
As this item is not available for the LP-S
series, set to "+000.000".
<LP-Mxxx/LP-Zxxx>
Speciies the amount of adjustment for Z
axis.
Rotation
Angle
(7)
Speciies the rotation angle. *2
“-180.00” to “+180.00” [°]
Laser Power
Adjustment
(3)
The amount of adjustment for laser power
is indicated. *2
“-50” to “+50” [%]
Description
Model type*
Setting range [mm]
LP-Sxx0(W)
LP-Sxx5(W)
LP-Sxx2
LP-Mxx0/LP-Zxx0
LP-Mxx5
LP-Mxx6/LP-Zxx6
"-045.000" to "+045.000"
"-080.000" to "+080.000"
"-027.500" to "+027.500"
"-060.000" to "+060.000"
"-110.000" to "+110.000"
"-165.000" to "+165.000"
Model type*
LP-Sxxx(W)
LP-Mxxx
LP-Zxxx
Setting range [mm]
"+000.000"(ixed)
"-022.000" to "+022.000"
"-025.000" to "+025.000"
*1: For the detail of the model type, refer to “Target Laser Marker” (P.4).
*2: When both setting values of the rotation angle and laser power adjustment are “0”, those settings can be omitted.
98
3. In case of "Marking OFF" as ine adjustment type (data length: 5 + 6n byte)
Name
Data Length
[byte]
Outline
List line
4
The line in the list where this instruction is stores
is indicated.
“0000” to “0399”
Fine Adj. Type
1
The type of instruction for ine adjustment is
indicated.
“2”…Marking OFF
Target Row
3
The target row to which the ine adjustment is
provided is indicated.
“001” to “400”
Target Column
3
The target column to which the ine adjustment is
provided is indicated.
“001” to “400”
Description
* Setting of the target row and target column can be successively-implemented up to 100 sets.
4. For ine adjustment for all columns/ine adjustment for all rows/ine adjustment for column/ine adjustment for
row (data length: max. 42-Byte)
Name
Data Length
[byte]
List line
4
The line in the list where this instruction
is stored is indicated.
“0000” to “0399”
1
The type of instruction for ine adjustment
is indicated.
“3”…ine adjustment for all columns
"4"…ine adjustment for all rows
"5"…ine adjustment for column
"6"…ine adjustment for row
3
Sets target column(s) or row(s) for ine
adjustment. In case of ine adjustment for
all columns/rows, the speciied column/
row and all subsequent columns/rows
will be subject to ine adjustment.
“001” to “400”
FineTune X
8
The amount of adjustment for X axis is
indicated.
FineTune Y
8
The amount of adjustment for Y axis is
indicated.
Fine Tune Z
(Effective only
LP-M / LP-Z
series)
8
<LP-Sxxx/LP-SxxxW>
As this item is not available for the LP-S
series, set to "+000.000".
<LP-Mxxx/LP-Zxxx>
Speciies the amount of adjustment for Z
axis.
Rotation
Angle
(7)
Speciies the rotation angle. *2
“-180.00” to “+180.00” [°]
Laser Power
Adjustment
(3)
The amount of adjustment for laser
power is indicated. *2
“-50” to “+50” [%]
Fine Adj. Type
Target Column
or Row
Outline
Description
Model type*1
Setting range [mm]
LP-Sxx0(W)
LP-Sxx5(W)
LP-Sxx2
LP-Mxx0/LP-Zxx0
LP-Mxx5
LP-Mxx6/LP-Zxx6
"-045.000" to "+045.000"
"-080.000" to "+080.000"
"-027.500" to "+027.500"
"-060.000" to "+060.000"
"-110.000" to "+110.000"
"-165.000" to "+165.000"
Model type*1
LP-Sxxx(W)
LP-Mxxx
LP-Zxxx
Setting range [mm]
"+000.000"(ixed)
"-022.000" to "+022.000"
"-025.000" to "+025.000"
*1: For the detail of the model type, refer to “Target Laser Marker” (P.4).
*2: When both setting values of the rotation angle and laser power adjustment are “0”, those settings can be omitted.
99
Laser Power (Code: LPW)
Sets the laser power.
• Setting / Readout data of laser power
STX
LPW
Sub
Command
[Laser Power]
5-byte
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Sub command is "S" at the time of setting and "A" for response data at the time of readout.
• Readout request of laser power
STX
LPW
R
(Check Sum)
Data Length
[byte]
Name
Delimiter
Outline
Description
Model type*
Laser Power
The peak value of laser power is
indicated.
5
Setting range
LP-Sxxx/LP-Mxxx
"012.0" to "100.0"
LP-SxxxW
"020.0" to "100.0"
LP-Zxxx
"000.5" to "100.0"
(Set by increment of 0.5)
* For the detail of the model type, refer to “Target Laser Marker” (P.4).
Scan Speed (Code: SSP)
Sets the scan speed of the laser.
• Setting / Readout data of scan speed
STX
SSP
Sub
Command
[Scan Speed]
5-byte
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Sub command is "S" at the time of setting and "A" for response data at the time of readout.
• Readout request of scan speed
STX
SSP
Name
R
(Check Sum)
Data Length
[byte]
Delimiter
Outline
Description
Model type*
Scan Speed
5
The moving speed of laser is indicated.
* For the detail of the model type, refer to “Target Laser Marker” (P.4).
100
LP-Sxx0/LP-Sxx5
LP-Mxx0/LP-Mxx5/
LP-Zxx0
LP-Sxx2
LP-SxxW
LP-Mxx6/LP-Zxx6
Setting range [mm/s]
"00001" to "12000"
"00001" to "06000"
"00001" to "03000"
"00001" to "08000"
Laser Pulse Cycle (Code: MPL)
Sets the laser pulse cycle.
[Supported models: LP-Mxxx / LP-Sxxx / LP-Zxxx]
• Setting / Readout data of laser pulse cycle
STX
MPL
Sub
Command
[Laser Pulse Cycle] [Pulse Width]
max. 5 byte
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Sub command is "S" at the time of setting and "A" for response data at the time of readout.
• Readout request of laser pulse cycle
STX
MPL
Name
R
(Check Sum)
Data Length
[byte]
Delimiter
Outline
Description
Model type*
Laser Pulse Cycle
Pulse Width
(Effective only
LP-Z series)
4
The marking pulse cycle is indicated.
(1)
<LP-Mxxx/LP-Sxxx>
As this item is not available for the
LP-M / LP-S series, set to "0" or no
data.
<LP-Zxxx>
The marking pulse width is indicated.
LP-S5xx/LP-M5xx
LP-S2xx/LP-M2xx
LP-MAxx
LP-Z130
LP-Z250/LP-Z256
Setting range [μs]
"02.0" to "20.0"
"02.0" to "50.0"
"05.0" to "10.0"
"10.0" to "50.0"
"10.0" to "40.0"
LP-Sxxx/LP-Mxxx: "0"
LP-Zxxx:
"0"…30ns (LP-Z130) or 50ns (LP-Z250/Z256)
"1"…100ns
"2"…200ns
* For the detail of the model type, refer to “Target Laser Marker” (P.4).
101
Line Width (Code: WDC)
Sets the width necessary to avoid crossing at marking intersection.
• Setting / Readout data of line width
STX
WDC
Sub
Command
[Line Width] [Uniform Spot Mode] [XY Field] [Z Position]
Max. 6-byte (LP-Sxxx/LP-SxxxW/LP-Zxxx),
Max. 13-byte (LP-Mxxx)
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Sub command is "S" at the time of setting and "A" for response data at the time of readout.
• Readout request of line width
STX
WDC
(Check Sum)
Name
Data Length
[byte]
Line Width
5
Uniform Spot Mode
(Effective only
LP-M / LP-Z series)
XY Field
(LP-M series only)
Z Position
(LP-M series only)
102
R
Delimiter
Outline
Description
The line width for crossing avoidance at the
crossing point of marking line is indicated.
“0.010” to “2.000” [mm]
(1)
<LP-Sxxx/LP-SxxxW>
As this item is not available for the LP-S series,
set to "0" or no data.
<LP-Mxxx/LP-Zxxx>
To keep a uniform diameter of the laser spot
within the marking ield, specify this mode.
The spot size is adjusted to the selected plane.
The laser spot will have the same diameter in the
area between N plane and the selected plane.
LP-Sxxx(W): "0"
LP-Mxxx / LP-Zxxx:
"0"…Off
"1"…N Plane (Near Plane)
"2"…B Plane (Base Plane)
"3"…F Plane (Far Plane)
"4"…Custom (LP-M series only)
(3)
Input only when the "4: Custom" is selected in
the Uniform Spot Mode for LP-M series.
Specify the length of X and Y axis for the marking
ield, in which the laser spot size is kept to be
uniform.
The center position of the XY ield is always the
center of the original marking ield.
(4)
Input only when the "4: Custom" is selected in
the Uniform Spot Mode for LP-M series.
Specify the Z position to which spot diameter
the laser spot size in the speciied XY ield is
adjusted.
The laser spot will have the same diameter in
the area between N plane and the selected Z
position.
Model type* Setting range [mm]
LP-Mxx0
LP-Mxx5
LP-Mxx6
"000" to "120"
"000" to "220"
"000" to "330"
"-022" to "+022"[mm]
(-22mm is the same position of F
Plane and +22mm is the same of
N Plane.)
Marking Quality Adjustment (Code: WTC)
Sets laser start point, end point, edge and curve adjustments, etc.
• Setting / Readout data of marking quality adjustment
STX
WTC
[Adjustment of Starting Point] [Adjustment of Ending Point] [Edge
Adjustment] [Curve Adjustment] [Waiting Time] [Pre-scan Time]
[Jump Adjustment] [Point Radiation ON] [Point Radiation OFF]
Max. 33-byte
Sub
Command
(Check
Sum)
Delimiter
Sub command is "S" at the time of setting and "A" for response data at the time of readout.
• Readout request of marking quality adjustment
STX
WTC
R
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Name
Data Length
[byte]
Adjustment of
Starting Point
4
The timing of starting laser is adjusted.
“-100” to “+100”
Adjustment of
Ending Point
4
The timing of stopping laser is adjusted.
“-100” to “+100”
Edge Adjustment
3
The wait at edge is adjusted.
“000” to “100”
Curve Adjustment
3
The wait at curved line is adjusted.
“000” to “100”
Waiting Time
3
The waiting time is adjusted.
“000” to “100”
Pre-scan Time
5
The pre-scan time is adjusted.
“00.00” to “10.00” [ms]
Jump Adjustment
(3)
The correction value of galvano jump is adjusted.
(omissible)
“000” to “100”
Point Radiation
ON
(4)
The timing of the ixed point radiation ON is
adjusted. (omissible *)
“0.00” to “9.99” [ms]
Point Radiation
OFF
(4)
The timing of the ixed point radiation OFF is
adjusted. (omissible *)
“0.00” to “9.99” [ms]
Outline
Description
* Only one of [Point Radiation ON] and [Point Radiation OFF] cannot be omitted. (Response is not omitted.)
When setting arbitrary point radiation ON/OFF adjustment, jump adjustment is not omissible.
103
Work Distance (Code: WRD)
[Supported models: LP-SxxxW]
Sets the Work Distance.
• Setting / Readout data of work distance
STX
WRD
Sub
Command
[Work distance]
5-byte
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Sub command is "S" at the time of setting and "A" for response data at the time of readout.
• Readout request of work distance
STX
WRD
R
(Check Sum)
Name
Data Length
[byte]
Work distance
5
Delimiter
Outline
Work distance is indicated.
Description
LP-S500W: "173.0" to "213.0"[mm]
LP-S505W: "327.0" to "387.0"[mm]
Trigger Condition (Code: TRG)
Sets the lying object/static object marking, and the condition of lying object.
[Supported models: LP-Mxxx / LP-Sxxx / LP-Zxxx]
• Setting / Readout data of trigger condition
STX
TRG
Sub
Command
[Moving Direction] [Encoder] [Trigger Type]
3-byte
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Sub command is "S" at the time of setting and "A" for response data at the time of readout.
• Readout request of trigger condition
STX
TRG
Name
R
(Check Sum)
Data Length
[byte]
Delimiter
Outline
Description
Moving Direction
1
The moving direction of line at marking to lying object
is set.
“0”…still
“1”…left
“2”…right
“3”…front
“4”…back
Encoder
1
The ON/OFF of encoder signal is indicated.
“0”…OFF
“1”…ON
Trigger Type
1
Available only when the “moving speed” is “still”.
Select the laser emission timing between trigger input
timing and equal interval timing.
“0”…trigger marking
“1”…Equidistant marking
Reference
• For the LP-M / LP-Z series, set encoder signals "ON" if using the 3D marking setting and lying object marking (lying
direction is other than static) in combination. If encoder signals are "OFF", the error is occurred and marking is not
available.
• The setting changed by this command is saved without overwriting.
104
Delay (Code: DLY)
Sets the delay time and distance from trigger input to marking startup.
• Setting / Readout data of delay
STX
DLY
Sub
Command
[Delay Time/Distance]
6-byte
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Sub command is "S" at the time of setting and "A" for response data at the time of readout.
• Readout request of delay
STX
DLY
Name
[Delay Time/
Distance]
R
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Data Length
[byte]
Outline
Description
6
When the moving speed is “still”, delay time is shown
and the marking start time after the trigger input is
displayed.When the moving speed is other than “still”,
delay distance is shown and the distance where the
marking starts after the trigger input is displayed.
For LP-SxxxW type, only the delay time can be set.
Delay Time…“000000” to
“005000” [ms]
Delay Distance…“000.00” to
“500.00” [mm]
105
Marking Interval (Code: INT)
[Supported models: LP-Mxxx / LP-Sxxx / LP-Zxxx]
Sets the marking interval (distance) in "Equidistant Marking" setting for lying object marking.
• Setting / Readout data of marking interval
STX
INT
Sub
Command
[Marking interval]
6-byte
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Sub command is "S" at the time of setting and "A" for response data at the time of readout.
• Readout request of marking interval
STX
INT
R
(Check Sum)
Name
Data Length
[byte]
Marking Interval
6
Delimiter
Outline
The marking interval is indicated, available only
when the moving direction is other than “still” and
trigger type is “equidistant”.
Description
“0000.0” to “3000.0” [mm]
Flying Object Wait (Code: MWT)
[Supported models: LP-Mxxx / LP-Sxxx / LP-Zxxx]
Sets the waiting time for marking corresponding to the line speed for lying object marking.
• Setting / Readout data of lying object wait
STX
MWT
Sub
Command
[Flying Object Wait]
6-byte
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Sub command is "S" at the time of setting and "A" for response data at the time of readout.
• Readout request of lying object wait
STX
MWT
R
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Name
Data Length
[byte]
Outline
Flying Object Wait
6
The value of the lying object wait is indicated,
available only when the moving direction of marking
object is other than “still”.
106
Description
“000.00” to “500.00” [ms]
Line Speed (Code: LSP)
[Supported models: LP-Mxxx / LP-Sxxx / LP-Zxxx]
Sets the line speed in lying object marking.
• Setting / Readout data of line speed
STX
LSP
Sub
Command
[Line Speed]
7-byte
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Sub command is "S" at the time of setting and "A" for response data at the time of readout.
• Readout request of line speed
STX
LSP
Name
Line Speed
R
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Data Length
[byte]
Outline
7
The speed with which the object to be
marked passes is indicated, available
only when the traveling direction is
other than “still” and encoder signal is
“OFF”.
Description
Model type*
LP-Sxx0/LP-Sxx5
LP-Mxx6/LP-Sxx2/
LP-Z256
LP-Mxx0/LP-Mxx5/
LP-Zxx0
Setting range [m/min]
"000.060" to "240.000"
"000.060" to "120.000"
"000.060" to "170.000"
* For the detail of the model type, refer to “Target Laser Marker” (P.4).
Encoder Signal (Code: ENC)
[Supported models: LP-Mxxx / LP-Sxxx / LP-Zxxx]
Sets the encoder pulse value for use of the encoder in lying object marking.
• Setting / Readout data of encoder signal
STX
ENC
Sub
Command
[Encoder Pulse]
6-byte
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Sub command is "S" at the time of setting and "A" for response data at the time of readout.
• Readout request of encoder signal
STX
ENC
R
Name
Data Length
[byte]
Encoder Pulse
6
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Outline
Available only when the moving direction is
other than “still”. The pulse number of encoder is
indicated.
Description
“005.00” to “600.00” [Pulse/
mm]
Reference
• The setting changed by this command is saved without overwriting.
107
Output Power Measurement (Code: PWM)
[Supported models: LP-M5xx/LP-M2xx/LP-Sxxx]
Measures the current laser power value [W] and the rate [%] compared to the default setting.
• Output power measurement designation
STX
PWM
S
[Designation Mode] [Measurement Power Setting]
[Power Correction Ratio]
max. 6-byte
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Data Length
[byte]
Outline
Description
Designation
Mode
1
The mode of laser pumping measurement
is indicated.
Before using the mode "1" and "2": "automatic power correction", it is necessary to
measure the current power by the mode
"0": "starts the output power measurement" with the power setting 100%.
“0”…Starts the output power measurement
(Start of current power measurement)
“1”…Automatic power correction/Start of
power measurement
“2”…Manual power correction/Start of
power measurement
Measurement
Power Setting
(5)
Speciies the setting power of the measurement. Adds this data only when the
designation mode is set to "0".
“012.0” to “100.0” by increment of 0.5
(3)
Indicates the power correction ration in the
manual power correction mode. Adds this
data only when the destination mode is set
to "2": manual power correction.
“050” to “200” [%]
Name
Power
Correction Ratio
Reference
• The output power measurement command (PWM) is rejected when the DIP switch (No. 2) in the rear side of the laser
marker is set to OFF.
• Transmit the laser power measurement command (PWM) with laser pumping turned ON and the shutter closed.
Response data for abnormal receiving (NAK03 or NAK99) is returned when the laser pumping is OFF or the shutter is
opened.
(Even when the "reception mode ON" is set for the command reception permission: MKM command, it is refused if the
shutter is opened.)
• When the Marking Status Sending Enable is set to on, marking status is returned after the output power measurement
and power correction are performed.
• For LP-Mxxx-S type, the output power can not be measured without opening the laser gate. After starting the power
measurement, open the laser gate by external control signals. Refer to the "Safety / Setup / Maintenance Guide" for
detail.
• For LP-Mxxx-S type, "laser gate open request output" signal will be ON to start the power measurement and "laser gate
close request output" signal will be ON after inishing the measurement for the speciied one-shot time.
• Readout request of output power measurement
STX
PWM
Name
Readout Data
Format
R
[Readout Data Format]
1-byte
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Data Length
[byte]
Outline
Description
1
Speciies the readout data format.
After the output power measurement to read out the
measurement results, set "0".
To read out correction data (power correction ratio, correction
date and total laser radiation time), set "1".
“0”… Measurement value
of laser power
“1”…Correction data
Reference
• Transmit the laser power measurement result readout command after 11 seconds from transmission of the laser power
measurement command.
• If the "Marking Status Transmission Permission (MST Command)" is set to "Transmission permitted", send the readout
command after response of the marking status.
108
• Readout data of the measurement result of output power
A
[Readout Data Format] [Measurement Value of Laser
Power] [Initial Ratio of Laser Power] [Determination]
10-byte
Name
Data Length
[byte]
Outline
Readout Data
Format
1
Speciies the readout data format.
When the output power measurement results is read
out, this data will be "0".
“0”… Measurement value of
laser power
“1”…Correction data
Measurement
Value of Laser
Power
5
Indicates power measurement results.
At the automatic/manual power correction mode,
indicates the power value after the correction.
“000.0” to “xxx.x” [W]
3
This result is valid only in the measurement result
readout just after the start point of the output power
measurement with the setting power 100.0. Indicates
initial ratio.
“000” to “xxx” [%]
(When laser power setting value
is not 100.0, and after the power
correction, this data is always
“100”.)
1
Indicates whether or not the power measurement result is lower than the value set in "Low Power Detect
Level".
This result is valid only in the measurement result
readout just after the power measurement with the
setting power 100.0.
“0”: Correct (When laser power
setting value is not 100.0, and
after the power correction, this
data is always "0".)
“1”: Lower than the low power
detect.
STX
PWM
Initial Ratio of
Laser Power
Determination
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Description
• Readout data of the correction results
A
[Readout Data Format] [Power Correction Ratio]
[Correction Date] [Total Laser Radiation Time]
27-byte
Name
Data Length
[byte]
Outline
Readout Data
Format
1
STX
PWM
Power Correction Ratio
3
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Description
Speciies the readout data format.
When the correction data is read out, this data will
be "1".
“0”… Measurement result
“1”…Correction data
The power correction ratio is indicated.
“050” to “200” [%]
When the power correction has
not been performed, it becomes
“000”.
Correction Date
14
The power correction date is indicated.
When the time is 15:00:00
of January 15, 2011,
“20110115150000” appears.
When the power correction has not been performed,
“00000000000000”
Total Laser Radiation Time
9
Indicates total laser radiation time.
“0000000.0” to “1000000.0” [h]
109
Power Check (Code: PWR)
[Supported models: LP-SxxxW/LP-Zxxx]
Measures the current power ratio [%] in comparison with the default laser power.
Power check designation
Designates the power check operation.
STX
PWR
S
[Designation Mode] [Power Correction Ratio]
max. 4-byte
Data Length
[byte]
Name
Designation
Mode
Power
Correction Ratio
1
(3)
(Check Sum)
Outline
Delimiter
Content
The mode of power check is indicated.
It is necessary to conduct a power
check immediately before starting the
automatic/manual power correction.
"0"…Starts the power check
(Start of current power measurement)
“1” … Start of automatic power correction
“2” … Start of manual power correction
Indicates the power correction ration in
the manual power correction mode.Adds
this data only when the destination mode
is set to the manual power correction.
“050” to “200”[%]
Reference
• The power check command is rejected when the DIP switch (No. 2) in the rear side of the laser marker is set to OFF.
• Transmit the power check command with laser pumping turned ON and the shutter closed. Response data for abnormal
receiving (NAK03 or NAK99) is returned when the laser pumping is OFF or the shutter is opened.
(Even when the "reception mode ON" is set for the command reception permission: MKM command, it is refused if the
shutter is opened.)
• When the Marking Status Sending Enable is set to on, marking status is returned after the power check and power
correction are performed.
Power check readout designation
STX
PWR
R
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Reference
• Transmit the power check readout command after several seconds from transmission of the power check command (11
seconds for LP-SxxxW or 6 seconds for LP-Zxxx).
• If the "Marking Status Transmission Permission (MST Command)" is set to "Transmission permitted", send the readout
command after response of the marking status.
110
Response to readout designation of power check result
STX
PWR
A
[Current Power] [Power after Correction]
[Power Correction Ratio] [Correction Date] [Total Laser
Radiation time] [Determination]
33Byte (LP-SxxxW), 32Byte (LP-Zxxx)
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Name
Data Length
[byte]
Current Power
3
Indicates the current power ratio [%] in comparison
with the default laser power.
“000” to “xxx”
3
The value obtained by multiplying the current power
by the power correction ratio is indicated.
It may differ from the calculated value depending on
the correction ratio.
“000” to “xxx”
(When the power correction has
not been performed, it is considered as "000".)
The power correction ratio is indicated.
"050.0" to "200.0" [%]
(When the power correction has
not been performed, it is considered as "000".)
Power after
Correction
Power
Correction
Ratio
5
Outline
Content
Correction
Date
14
Indicates the time and date when power correction
was conducted.
For 15:00:00 on April 1, 2012
"20120401150000"
(When the power correction has
not been performed, it is considered as "00000000000000".)
Total Laser
Radiation Time
9
Displays the accumulated laser radiation time.
"0000000.0" to "1000000.0"[h]
It is indicated whether or not the power check result
is lower than the value set in "Low Power Detect
Level".
This result is valid only in the measurement result
readout just after the start point of the power check.
(Not transmitted for LP-Zxxx.)
"0": Correct
"1": Lower than the "Low Power
Detect Level".
Determination
(Applicable
only LPSxxxW)
(1)
Reference
• Power correction refers to the function to correct not the max. laser power [W] value but the laser power setting value.
Power correction does not change the actual max. output power relative to initial power.
111
Low Power Detect Level (Code: PWL)
[Supported models: LP-M5xx/LP-M2xx/LP-Sxxx/LP-SxxxW]
Sets thresholds for determination of whether the result of the power measurement or the power check is in the normal range.
• Setting / Readout data the low power detect level
STX
PWL
Sub
Command
[Low Power Detect Level]
2-byte
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Sub command is "S" at the time of setting and "A" for response data at the time of readout.
• Readout request out low power detect level
STX
PWL
R
(Check Sum)
Name
Data Length
[byte]
Low Power Detect Level
2
Delimiter
Outline
Description
Sets the detection level of power decay at laser
power check.
“00” to “99” [%]
When “00” is set, the
detection is disabled.
Reference
• The setting changed by this command is saved without overwriting.
Marking Energy Indicating (Code: MEM)
[Supported models: LP-Mxxx/LP-Sxxx]
Displays the measurement results of marking energy[mJ] and time on the setting screen when Test Marking is inished.
• Setting / Readout data the marking energy indicating
STX
MEM
Sub
Command
[Marking Energy Indicating]
1-byte
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Sub command is "S" at the time of setting and "A" for response data at the time of readout.
• Readout request out marking energy indicating
STX
MEM
R
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Name
Data Length
[byte]
Outline
Marking Energy Indicating
1
Speciies whether the display of the measurement
results of marking energy and time after Test Marking is enabled.
Description
“0”: OFF
“1”: ON
Reference
• Under the remote mode, the measurement results do not appear on the screen. If the "Marking Status Transmission
Permission (MST Command)" is set to "Transmission permitted", the measurement results of the marking energy are
transmitted after the marking operation.
• The setting changed by this command is saved without overwriting.
112
Marking Energy Range (Code: MEN)
[Supported models: LP-Mxxx/LP-Sxxx]
Sets thresholds for determination of whether the result of marking energy measurement is in the normal range.
• Setting / Readout data marking energy upper/lower limits
STX
MEN
Sub
Command
[Upper limit] [lower limit]
18-byte
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Sub command is "S" at the time of setting and "A" for response data at the time of readout.
• Readout request out marking energy upper/lower limits
STX
MEN
R
Name
Data Length
[byte]
Upper limit
9
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Outline
Sets the threshold of the marking energy.
Lower limit
9
Description
“000000000”: OFF
“000000100” to “999999999” [mJ]
If the upper limit is not “000000000”, the
lower limit should be less than the upper
limit.
113
Test Marking (Code: TST)
[Supported models:LP-Mxxx/LP-Sxxx]
Performs the test marking and measures the marking energy [mJ] and period.
• Execute Test Marking
Designates the start of the test marking
STX
TST
[Test Marking Mode]
Max. 1-byte
S
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
• Readout request of test marking result
STX
TST
R
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
• Readout data
STX
TST
A
[Marking Energy] [Marking Time]
15-byte
Data Length
[byte]
Outline
Description
Test Marking
Mode
(1)
Performs test marking upon command reception.
Set whether to detect the marking energy error
after test marking.
This setting is omissible. If this is omitted, "0":
marking energy error is indicated.
“0”: Marking energy error detection
“1”: Marking energy error not detected
Marking Energy
9
Indicates the marking energy.
“000000000” to “999999999” [mJ]
6
Indicates the period of marking.
When the marking time is 100 seconds or more,
the number of decimal places should be 1 and
when it is less than 100, it should be 2.
Marking time 100 seconds or more:
"0100.0" to "9999.9" [s]
Marking time less than 100 seconds:
"000.01" to "099.99" [s]
Name
Marking Time
Reference
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
When the test marking is performed, the marking operation is started by actual laser radiation.
For test marking, the counter value is not changed even when a counter is set.
This command is not acceptable when the No.2 DIP switch on the back surface of controller is turned to OFF.
This command can be transmitted when laser pumping is turned ON and the shutter is closed. Response data for
abnormal receiving (NAK03 or NAK99) is returned when the laser pumping is OFF or the shutter is opened. Even when
the "reception mode ON" is set for the command reception permission: MKM command, it is refused if the shutter is
opened.
When the Marking Status Sending Enable (MST/MKR) is set to on, the marking status is transmitted after the marking is
completed.
Transmit the test marking result readout command after the marking end output of the output terminal is turned
ON following the test marking execution command, or after response to the marking status if the "Marking Status
Transmission Permission (MST Command)" is set.
For LP-Mxxx-S type, laser can not be emitted without opening the laser gate. After starting the test marking, open the
laser gate by external control signals. Refer to the "Safety / Setup / Maintenance Guide" for detail.
For LP-Mxxx-S type, "laser gate open request output" signal will be ON to start the test marking and "laser gate close
request output" signal will be ON after inishing the marking for the speciied one-shot time.
114
Laser Check Radiation (Code: SPT)
Controls "Laser Check Radiation" for laser radiation at the center of the marking area.
• Setting of laser check
STX
SPT
Name
Laser Check
Radiation
S
Data Length
[byte]
1
[Laser Check Radiation]
1-byte
(Check Sum)
Outline
Description
The operations of laser check is
controlled.
Delimiter
“0”…stop:
Spot radiation is stopped and the
internal shutter is closed.
“1”…start:
The internal shutter is opened
and laser radiation is started. The
setting can be accepted when the
internal shutter is closed or when
the "command reception mode
ON" is set by Command reception
permission (MKM) command.
“2”…interrupt Laser check is interrupted. The
internal shutter, however, is not
closed.
Reference
• Control of laser check by this command is unavailable when the No.2 DIP switch on the rear side of controller is turned to
OFF.
• The setting can be transmitted to the laser marker only when the shutter is closed or when the "command reception
mode ON" is set by Command reception permission (MKM) command.
• The laser is radiated at the center position.
• The laser power can be changed by setting the laser condition.
• For LP-Z series, even without "stop" or "interrupt" command, the laser radiation automatically stops after about one
minute and the shutter is closed.
• For LP-Mxxx-S type, laser can not be emitted without opening the laser gate. After starting the radiation, open the laser
gate by external control signals. Refer to the "Safety / Setup / Maintenance Guide" for detail.
• For LP-Mxxx-S type, "laser gate open request output" signal will be ON to start the radiation and "laser gate close request
output" signal will be ON after inishing the radiation for the speciied one-shot time.
115
Year/Month/Date/Time (Code: YMD)
Sets year, month, date, time for system.
• Setting / Readout data of year/month/date/time
STX
YMD
Sub
Command
[Dominical Year] [Month] [Day] [Hour] [Min.] [Second]
14-byte
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Sub command is "S" at the time of setting and "A" for response data at the time of readout.
• Readout request of year/month/date/time
STX
YMD
R
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Name
Data Length
[byte]
Dominical Year
4
Dominical year is indicated.
“1980” to “2037” [year]
Month
2
Month is indicated.
“01” to “12” [month]
Day
2
Date is indicated.
“01” to “31” [day]
Hour
2
Hour is indicated.
“00” to “23” [hour]
Min.
2
Minute is indicated.
“00” to “59” [minute]
Second
2
Second is indicated.
“00” to “59” [second]
Outline
Description
Reference
• The setting changed by this command is saved without overwriting.
Era Year (Code: ERA)
Sets era year.
• Setting / Readout data of era year
STX
ERA
Sub
Command
[Era year]
4-byte
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Sub command is "S" at the time of setting and "A" for response data at the time of readout.
• Readout request of era year
STX
ERA
R
(Check Sum)
Name
Data Length
[byte]
Era Year
4
Delimiter
Outline
The era year is indicated.
Reference
• The setting changed by this command is saved without overwriting.
116
Description
“0001” to “9999” [year]
Week Setting (Code: WKM)
Sets the update timing of week number and sets the deinition of the irst week of the year.
• Week Setting
STX
WKM
Sub
Command
[Week update day] [First-Week-of- the-year]
2-byte
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Sub command is "S" at the time of setting and "A" for response data at the time of readout.
• Readout request of week setting
STX
WKM
R
Name
Data Length
[byte]
Week update
day
1
First-Week-ofthe-year
1
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Outline
Description
Sets the update timing of week number.
“0”…Sunday (Renews at 0:00)
“1”…Monday (Renews at 0:00)
Sets the-irst-week-of-the-year.
“0”…after JAN.1, week which contains
JAN.
“1”…Week which contains the irst
Thursday
Reference
• The setting changed by this command is saved without overwriting
I/O Environment (Code: ENV)
Sets the operating environment of the input/output terminal.
• Setting / Readout data of I/O environment
STX
ENV
Sub
Command
[One-shot time] [Detect TRIG. warning during marking]
4-byte
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Sub command is "S" at the time of setting and "A" for response data at the time of readout.
• Readout request of I/O environment
STX
ENV
R
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Name
Data Length
[byte]
One-shot time
3
The ON time of the one-shot output is indicated.
“002” to “510” [ms]
Detect TRIG.
warning during
marking
1
The output status of warning at detection of trigger
during marking operation is indicated.
“0”…no output
“1”…output
Outline
Description
Reference
• The setting changed by this command is saved without overwriting.
117
3-2 LP-F10/F10W Mode
This mode gives the compatibility to the RS-232C commands of the older laser marker model LP-F10/F10W, so that the
commands can be used to LP-M/LP-S/LP-Z series.
Notice
• Even with the use of LP-F10/F10W mode, there is a difference in communication processing time and I/O operation
timing between older model of LP-F10/LP-F10W and LP-M/LP-S/LP-Z series. When install the LP-F10/LP-F10W control
program to LP-M/LP-S/LP-Z series, check the data transfer sequence to follow the rule described in “2-7 Communication
Sequence” (P.38).
3-2-1 Selecting DIP Switch
Reference
• The DIP switch is located in rear of the controller.
• The DIP switch is already set to OFF side at factory shipment.
1. Standard Mode
DIP Switch No.7-OFF
DIP Switch No.8-OFF
2. LP-F10 Mode
DIP Switch No.7-ON
DIP Switch No.8-OFF
3. LP-F10W Mode
DIP Switch No.7-OFF
DIP Switch No.8-ON
118
3-2-2 LP-F10/F10W Mode Command List
Command for switching between Standard Mode and LP-F10/F10W Mode
Category
—
Name
Code
Function
Description
Command Mode Setting
RSM
Switches between Standard mode and LP-F10/
F10W.
Name
Code
Function
Command Reception
Permission
(Marking Mode)
MKM
Controls the reception permission (reception mode
ON/OFF) for setting and readout of communication
commands.
P.123
Laser Pumping
LSR
Controls the laser pumping ON/OFF.
P.124
Shutter
SHT
Controls the internal shutter opening/closing.
P.124
Status request
STS
Requires the operation status of laser marker, such
as ready status and error occurrence status.
P.125
Marking Status Transmission
Permission
MST
Enables automatic response of marking result (e.g.
normal end, and error occurrence, etc.) at the end
of marking.
P.126
Marking Trigger
MRK
Inputs marking trigger (laser radiation startup
trigger).
P.127
File No. Change
FNO
Speciies the ile No. to change the ile.
P.128
File Overwriting Registration
FOR
Overwrite and register the ile under editing.
P.128
File Registration
FRG
Register the ile under editing to the speciied No.
P.129
File Name
FNM
Sets name (comment) of ile under editing.
P.129
Marking Character String
(ASCII Code Speciied)
MCS
Sets the marking character string by ASCII code.
(For alphanumeric characters only)
P.130
Marking Character String
(Shift JIS Code Speciied)
STR
Sets the marking character string by shift JIS code.
(For characters including KANA, KANJI and
function characters)
P.131
Serial Data Input
SIN
Sets the character string speciied for “Serial Data
Function” to change characters for each marking.
P.133
Rank Condition
RKC
Sets input conditions of “Rank Function” to switch
characters using I/O input.
P.134
Rank Character String
RKS
Sets character string used for “Rank Function” to
switch characters using I/O input.
P.134
P.122
LP-F10/F10W Mode Command
Character Input
File
Operation Control
Category
Description
119
Layout / Position Adjustment
Logo
Bar Code / 2D Code
Function Character
Category
120
Name
Code
Function
Description
Counter Condition
CNT
Sets the counter conditions.
P.135
Counter Reset
CTR
Resets the current counter value to the initial value.
P.135
Expiry Date/Time Condition
LMT
Sets the expiry date/time condition.
P.136
Lot Condition
LTC
Sets the condition of "Lot Function" to change
characters depending on date/time.
P.137
Lot Character String
LTS
Sets the character string used for “Lot Function” to
change characters depending on date/time.
P.138
Bar Code Data
(Shift JIS Code Speciied)
BCS
Sets character string to be encoded as a bar code
by shift JIS code.
P.139
Bar Code Marking Condition
BCF
Speciies the bar code marking condition.
P.140
QR Code Data
(Shift JIS Code Speciied)
QRS
Sets character string to be encoded as a QR code
by shift JIS code.
P.142
QR Code Marking Condition
QRF
Sets the marking condition for QR code.
P.143
QR Code Pattern
QRP
Sets QR code module marking pattern.
P.144
Data Matrix Code
Data (Shift JIS Code
Speciied)
DMS
Sets character string to be encoded as a data
matrix code by shift JIS code.
P.145
Data Matrix Code
Marking Condition
DMF
Sets the marking condition for data matrix code.
P.146
Data Matrix Code
Pattern
DMP
Sets data matrix code module
marking pattern.
P.147
Logo File (CAD File)
CDF
Sets the logo ile.
P.148
VEC Logo Conditions (CAD
Condition)
CDC
Sets the marking condition of VEC (work shape
converted for laser marker) logo ile.
P.149
General Condition
ALC
Sets the conditions related to whole ile.
P.150
Character Conditions
STC
Sets the condition for marking character string per
line.
P.151
External Offset Condition
OFC
Sets input conditions of “External Offset Function”
to switch coordinates using I/O input.
P.156
External Offset Coordinates
OFS
Sets offset coordinates used for “External Offset
Function” to switch coordinates using I/O input.
P.156
Step & Repeat Fine
Adjustment
SRA
Sets the ine adjustment of “Step & Repeat” to mark
the same marking contents on multiple locations in
one ile.
P.157
Environment
Maintenance
Flying Object
Laser Condition
Category
Name
Code
Function
Description
Laser Power
LPW
Sets the laser power.
P.159
Scan Speed
SSP
Sets the scan speed of the laser.
P.159
Laser Pulse Cycle*
MPL
Sets the marking pulse cycle of laser.
P.160
CW Pulse Cycle/Duty
CWL
Sets the laser pulse cycle and duty.
(LP-F10W mode only)
P.160
Line Width
WDC
Sets the width necessary to avoid crossing at
marking intersection.
P.161
Marking Quality Adjustment
WTC
Sets start point, end point, edge and curve
adjustments.
P.161
Trigger Condition*
TRG
Sets the lying object/static object marking, and the
condition of lying object.
P.162
Delay
DLY
Sets the delay time and distance from trigger input
to marking startup.
P.163
Marking Interval*
INT
Sets the marking interval (distance) in “Equidistant
Marking” setting for lying object marking.
P.163
Line Speed*
LSP
Sets the line speed in lying object marking.
P.164
Encoder Signal*
ENC
Sets the encoder pulse value for use of the encoder
in lying object marking.
P.164
Laser Check Radiation
SPT
Controls “Laser Check Radiation” for laser radiation
at the center of the marking area.
P.165
Year/Month/Date/Time
YMD
Sets year, month, date, time for system.
P.165
Era Year
ERA
Sets era year.
P.166
I/O Environment
ENV
Sets the operating environment of the input/output
terminal.
P.166
* This command is not available for LP-SxxxW type.
121
3-2-3 Each Command Description in LP-F10/F10W Mode
Reference
• The laser marker sends a response data after setting/readout command is transmitted.
• Refer to “2-6 Communication Data Format” (P.34)
Command Mode Setting (Code: RSM)
Switches between Standard mode and LP-F10/F10W.
• Setting / Readout data of Command mode
STX
RSM
Sub
Command
[Command Mode]
1-byte
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Sub command is "S" at the time of setting and "A" for response data at the time of readout.
• Readout request of command mode
STX
RSM
R
Name
Data Length
[byte]
Command
Mode
1
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Outline
Indicates the command mode for the serial
communication.
Description
“0”: LP-F10/LP-F10W Mode
“1”: Standard Mode
Reference
• This command is valid only when the DIP switches are set to LP-F10 mode or LP-F10W mode.
• When the Remote mode is set to OFF or power is OFF, the mode returns to the initial value (LP-F10/LP-F10W mode).
122
Command Reception Permission (Marking Mode) (Code: MKM)
Controls the reception permission (reception mode ON/OFF) for setting and readout of communication commands.
• Setting / Readout data of command reception permission (marking mode)
STX
MKM
Sub
Command
[Command Reception Mode]
1-byte
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Sub command is "S" at the time of setting and "A" for response data at the time of readout.
• Readout request of command reception permission (marking mode)
STX
MKM
Name
Command Reception Mode (Marking Mode)
R
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Data Length
[byte]
Outline
1
In the shutter open or marking ready ON status, set
“reception mode ON” when transmitting the commumunication command including an action to update the
laser marker data.
To resume the ready ON status after command
transmission, set “reception mode OFF”.
Description
“0”…Reception mode ON
(Marking Interruption: Start
command reception in the
marking ready OFF status)
“1”…Reception mode OFF
(Resume: Finish command
reception and resume the
marking ready ON status)
Reference
• The name of this command in the LP-F series is “Marking Mode”. Contents and role of this command are common to the
LP-F series and LP-M/LP-S/LP-Z series.
• For details on command reception permission, refer to “2-3 Command Reception Condition” (P.28).
123
Laser Pumping (Code: LSR)
Controls the laser pumping ON/OFF.
• Setting / Readout data of laser pumping
STX
LSR
Sub
Command
[Laser Pumping]
1-byte
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Sub command is "S" at the time of setting and "A" for response data at the time of readout.
• Readout request of laser pumping
STX
LSR
R
(Check Sum)
Name
Data Length
[byte]
Laser Pumping
1
Delimiter
Outline
Laser pumping status is indicated.
Description
“0”…Laser pumping OFF
“1”…Laser pumping ON
Reference
• Control of laser pumping by this command is unavailable when the No.2 DIP switch on the back surface of controller is
turned to OFF.
• It takes about 20 seconds for LP-Mxxx/LP-Sxxx/LP-Zxxx type and about 15 seconds for LP-SxxxW type from turning ON
the laser pumping to completion of pumping.
Shutter (Code: SHT)
Controls the internal shutter opening/closing.
• Setting of shutter
STX
SHT
S
Name
Data Length
[byte]
Shutter Status
1
[Shutter Status]
1-byte
Outline
The control of shutter is indicated.
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Description
“0”…close
“1”…open
Reference
• Control of shutter by this command is unavailable when the No.2 DIP switch on the back surface of controller is turned to
OFF.
• Response data for abnormal receiving (NAK03) is returned when shutter open command is transmitted in shutter open
status.
• If the shutter close command is transmitted during marking, the internal shutter is closed after the marking is completed.
124
Status Request (Code: STS)
Requires the operation status of laser marker, such as ready status and error occurrence status.
• Status request
STX
STS
R
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
• Response to status request
Read out with the following format:
STX
STS
A
[Error occurrence status] [Laser Pumping Status]
[Command Reception Status] [Marking Ready Status]
[Trigger Status]
5-byte
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Name
Data Length
[byte]
Error occurrence
status
1
The status of error occurrence is indicated.
“0”…no error
“1”…error occurrence
Laser Pumping
Status
1
The status of laser pumping is indicated.
“0”…laser pumping OFF
“1”…laser pumping
“2”…laser pumping completed
Command
reception status
(Standby Status)
1
Shutter and command reception mode (MKM
command) status is indicated.
Use this for determination of whether various
commands can be transmitted. For details,
refer to “3-1-6 Command Reception Condition”
on page 54.
“0”…standby: Shutter close
or command reception mode ON
(including while the shutter is
opened)
“1”…marking being operated: Shutter
open
(except when the command
reception mode is ON)
Marking Ready
Status
1
The status of marking trigger acceptability is
indicated.
“0”…marking disable (ready OFF)
“1”…marking enable (ready ON)
Trigger Status
1
The status of trigger input (TRIG.IN) is
indicated when “equidistant marking” is
selected at trigger condition.
“0”…trigger OFF
“1”…trigger ON
Outline
Description
Reference
• When the response data is either “02110” or “02111”, marking is enable.
• For LP-Mxxx-S type, open the laser gate to turn ON the ready signal.
125
Marking Status Transmission Permission (Code: MST)
Enables automatic response of marking result (e.g. normal end, and error occurrence, etc.) at the end of marking.
• Setting / Readout data of marking status transmission permission
STX
MST
Sub
Command
[Transmission permitted]
1-byte
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Sub command is "S" at the time of setting and "A" for response data at the time of readout.
• Readout request of transmission permission/prohibition of response
STX
MST
R
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Name
Data Length
[byte]
Outline
Trans-mission
Permission/
Prohibition
1
The status of transmission permission for response
is indicated.
Description
“0”…Transmission prohibited
“1”…Transmission permitted
• Data transmission after setting marking status transmission permission
The status is transmitted if the marking failure occurs when marking is normally completed or when character string is set
outside the marking area transmission permission when receiving a marking trigger from the RS-232C after marking status
transmission permission is set.
STX
MST
Name
Status
A
Data Length
[byte]
4
[Status]
4-byte
Outline
The status after marking operation is indicated.
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Description
“0000”…Marking is normally
completed.
Others: Error code at marking
operation
Reference
• When marking status function is used, set the transmission permission before every shifting to the remote mode.
• When the remote mode is released, the marking status transmission is returned to the default transmission prohibition.
• Refer to “Error Indication” (P.180) for the detail of the error code at marking operation.
The error code indicated by this command is for the LP-M/LP-S/LP-Z series, so differs from the error code for the LPF10/LP-F10W series.
126
Marking Trigger (Code: MRK)
Inputs marking trigger (laser radiation startup trigger).
• Setting / Readout data of marking trigger
STX
MRK
Name
S
Data Length
[byte]
[Marking Trigger]
1-byte
Outline
Marking operation is started when this command is
accepted.
Marking
Trigger
1
<LP-Mxxx / LP-Sxxx / LP-Zxxx>
During “equidistant” status at marking to lying object,
the instruction of marking start/stop is executed.
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Description
“0”…stop(available only with
“equidistant” status)
“1”…start
Reference
• Marking is performed at command reception, regardless of the setting in “marking trigger” when “equidistant marking” is
set at the trigger type.
• When this command is sent when the marking trigger cannot be accepted (Ready is OFF), abnormal receiving response
is returned from laser marker.
127
File No. Change (Code: FNO)
Speciies the ile No. to change the ile.
• Setting / Readout data of File No.
STX
FNO
Sub
Command
[File No.]
3-byte
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Sub command is "S" at the time of setting and "A" for response data at the time of readout.
• Readout request of ile No.
STX
FNO
R
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Name
Data Length
[byte]
Outline
File No.
3
The ile number to be used and the ile number
currently being used is indicated at ile No. change
and readout of ile No. respectively.
Description
“000” to “255”
“999”…new ile
Reference
• The ile Nos. 256 and after cannot be speciied.(NAK09 is returned.)
NAK15 is returned when the readout was performed with the ile No. 256 to 2047.
• When new ile is created using the communication command, initialize the kerning level to Level 2.
(If the ile is newly created using the console, initialize the kerning level to Level 3.)
• When new ile is created using the communication command with LP-F10W mode, the laser pulse cycle is set to the
minimum value as an initial setting.
File Overwriting Registration (Code: FOR)
Overwrite and register the ile under editing.
• Overwriting of ile
Overwrite the ile currently being edited over the ile selected.
Overwriting is possible when the ile has been already determined.
STX
128
FOR
S
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
File Registration (Code: FRG)
Register the ile under editing to the speciied No.
• Setting data of File registration
STX
FRG
[File No.]
3-byte
S
Name
Data Length
[byte]
File No.
3
(Check Sum)
Outline
Register the ile currently used to the ile of
speciied number and change the ile number
currently being edited to the speciied number.
Delimiter
Description
“000” to “255”
File Name (Code: FNM)
Sets name (comment) of ile under editing.
• Setting / Readout data of ile name
STX
FNM
Sub
Command
[File Name]
Max. 20-byte
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Sub command is "S" at the time of setting and "A" for response data at the time of readout.
• Readout request of ile name
STX
FNM
Name
File Name
R
Data Length
[byte]
Max 20
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Outline
Description
Specify the ile name of currently speciied
number with 10 or less characters of shift JIS
code or 20 or less characters of ASCII code.
Specify 0 byte to the ile name to be deleted.
(ex) when specifying the ile name
“ABCD”
When specifying the ile name in shift JIS
code
82,60,82,61,82,62,82,63(HEX)
When specifying the ile name in ASCII
code
41,42,43,44(HEX)
129
Marking Character String (ASCII Code Speciied) (Code: MCS)
Sets the marking character string by ASCII code. (For alphanumeric characters only)
• Setting / Readout data of marking character string
STX
MCS
Sub
Command
[Line No.] [Marking Character String]
Max. 32-byte
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Sub command is "S" at the time of setting and "A" for response data at the time of readout.
• Readout request of marking character string
STX
MCS
R
Name
Data Length
[byte]
Line No.
2
Marking
Character
String
Max 30
[Line No.]
2-byte
Outline
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Description
The line number to be set in the ile is
speciied.
“01” to “30” [row]
Speciies the character setting in the speciied
line. Specify 0 byte to the character string to be
deleted.
20 characters within the range from
(HEX) to 7E(HEX) of ASCII code.
(functional characters should not be
included)
Reference
• If readout data includes function characters (such as “%SFT”), the set characters (“%SFT”) are read out and characters
actually marked are not.
• The line 31 and after cannot be set and read out. (NAK09 is returned.)
• If readout data includes characters that cannot be expressed in ASCII code such as Katakana and Kanji (2-byte character),
these 2-byte characters are read out in shift JIS code.
• If the marking character string contains any function or 2-byte character, the maximum readout data will be 32-byte or
more.
130
Marking Character String (Shift JIS Code Speciied) (Code: STR)
Sets the marking character string by shift JIS code. (For characters including KANA, KANJI and function characters)
• Setting / Readout data of marking character string
Set the marking character string in the speciied line number with the following format:
STX
STR
Sub
Command
[Line No.] [Marking Character String]
Max. 62-byte
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Sub command is "S" at the time of setting and "A" for response data at the time of readout.
• Readout request of marking character string
STX
STR
R
[Line No.]
2-byte
(Check Sum)
Name
Data Length
[byte]
Outline
Line No.
2
The line number to be set in the ile is speciied.
“01” to “30” [row]
Marking
Character
String
Max 60
(When
specifying
in shift JIS
code)
The character string to be set in the speciied
line is speciied with shift JIS code. (Up to 30
characters) (However, the function character
should be speciied by ASCII code.) Specify 0
byte to the character string to be deleted.
See the next page.
Delimiter
Description
Reference
• The line 31 and after cannot be set and read out. (NAK09 is returned.)
131
Setting method of character string for marking (speciied with shift JIS code)
Use shift JIS code “Character Code Table” (P.191) to set standard characters and registered characters. In case of setting with
ASCII code, use the MCS command.
Setting method of Functional character (speciied with ASCII code)
Use ASCII code to set the functional character.
When %BAR: n is shown, counter numbering system is speciied, function type is set to s (sec) and function character
number is out of range for the LP-F10/LP-F10W mode, NAK09 is returned. But at read-out time, NAK15 is returned.
The %MM: Sn in the serial data (MM: igure, n: function No.) is set and read out in the LP-F10/LP-F10W mode.
N
:
digit number (1 to 6)
MM
:
number of digits (01 to 30)
X
:
Type (Y: dominical year, y: era year, M: month, D: date, H: 24-hour time, h: 12-hour time, m: minute, w: week,
J: 365 days, C: counter)
n
:
Counter number, lot function number (0 to 3), date/time number (0: current date/time, 1 to 4: expiry date/
time),
rank function number (0 to 3), serial data function number (0 to 9, A to F), bar code number (0 to 3)
Y
:
counter offset (+1 to +9) This letter is not used in case of no offset.
% 0N:XnY
=
with zero
%N-:XnY
=
without zero justify
%INP:n
=
Rank
%_N:XnY
=
right aligned without zero
%APM:n
=
“AM” (before noon),
“PM” (afternoon)
%SIN:n
=
Serial Data
%N_:XnY
=
left aligned without
zero
%SFT:n
=
Lot character
(Above "_" represents a space.)
[Examples]
Character setting by shift-JIS code: Marking of “ABCD” (with hexadecimal number)
82,60,82,61,82,62,82,63
Functional character setting by ASCII code:
Marking of “counter 0” by 6 digits, right aligned without zero
25,20,36,3A,43,30…“%_6:C0”
(Above “_” represents a space.)
Shift-JIS character and functional character mixed case:
Marking of current year/month/date with four digits for dominical year, two digits for month
and date respectively, with zero, and of the unit by Kanji.
25,30,34,3A,59,30,94,4E,25,30,32,3A,4D,30,8C,8E,25,30,32,3A,44,30,93,FA…“%04:Y0 Year %02:M0 Month %02:D0 Day”
132
Serial Data Input (Code: SIN)
Sets the character string speciied for “Serial Data Function” to change characters for each marking.
Function characters (serial data) are preset to the marking character string or bar code data. Marking of the transmitted
character string corresponding with the serial data starts.
• Setting of serial data input
STX
SIN
[Serial Data No.] [Marking Data]
max. 62-byte
S
Name
Data Length
[byte]
Serial Data No.
2
Marking Data
Max 60
(Check Sum)
Outline
Delimiter
Description
Sets the serial data No.
“00” to “15”
Sets the marking characters to the selected serial data No.
For the character, up to 30 characters can
be input.
one-byte or double-byte (shift JIS code)
characters less than 30 (mixed not
available)
Reference
• Only when the internal shutter is opened during the remote control (“Reception mode ON” (marking interruption) is not
set for command reception permission (MKM command)), the serial data can be transmitted to the laser marker.
• For using this command, set “serial data” of function characters at setting screen beforehand.
• When using this function (serial data), transmit this command by every marking. Otherwise it does not become marking
ready condition, and marking is not available.
• When transmit this command without any data, marking ready become ON, then nothing to be marked with serial data
input.
• For resetting the data, set the “reception mode ON” (marking interruption) for command reception permission (MKM
command) or close the shutter.
• This input cannot be used with the rank marking, external offset and marking on moving object.
• In case of transmitting character using the RS-232C which is differed to the speciied number of digit, the character is
marked with the differed number of digit.
• Refer to the timing chart for this command transmission.(P.55).
133
Rank Condition (Code: RKC)
Sets input conditions of “Rank Function” to switch characters using I/O input.
• Setting / Readout data of rank condition
Set the rank condition of speciied number with the following format:
STX
RKC
Sub
Command
[Parallel Input]
1-byte
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Sub command is "S" at the time of setting and "A" for response data at the time of readout.
• Readout request of rank condition
STX
RKC
R
Name
Data Length
[byte]
Parallel Input
1
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Outline
The condition for parallel input is
indicated.
Description
“3”…4-bit × 2
“4”…8-bit × 1
Rank Character String (Code: RKS)
Sets character string used for “Rank Function” to switch characters using I/O input.
• Setting / Readout data of rank character string
STX
RKS
Sub
Command
[Rank No.] [Marking Character String]
Max. 21-byte
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Sub command is "S" at the time of setting and "A" for response data at the time of readout.
• Readout request of rank character string
STX
RKS
Name
Rank No.
Marking
Character
String
134
R
Data
[Rank No.]
3-byte
Data Length
[byte]
Outline
3
The number in which the character string
is set is indicated.
The setting range varies depending on the
condition of parallel input.
Max 18
The character string to be marked with the
speciied period is set.
Specify 0-byte of data length to delete the
character string of period. (Up to 9 characters)
Description
Parallel Input
8-bit
Low 4 bit
higher 4-bit
Use the shift JIS code.
Setting range
“000” to “255”
“000” to “015”
“016” to “031”
Counter Condition (Code: CNT)
Sets the counter conditions.
• Setting / Readout data of counter condition
STX
CNT
Sub
Command
[Counter number] [Current Value] [Initial value][End Value]
[Step] [Count Source]
26-byte
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Sub command is "S" at the time of setting and "A" for response data at the time of readout.
• Readout request of counter condition
STX
CNT
[Counter number]
1-byte
R
Name
Data Length
[byte]
Counter No.
1
The counter No. to be set or to be read out is
indicated.
“0” to “3”
Current Value
6
Current value of counter.No minus number.
“000000” to “999999”
Initial Value
6
Initial value of counter.No minus number.
“000000” to “999999”
End Value
6
End value of counter.No minus number.
“000000” to “999999”
Step
6
Step value of counter.
No minus number.
“000000” to “999999”
Trigger source to be counted.
“0”…Counter 0
“1”…Counter 1
“2”…Counter 2
“3”…Counter 3
“4”…Trigger input
Count Source
1
Outline
Description
Reference
• The common counter (counter Nos. 4 to 7) cannot be set and read out. (NAK09 is returned.)
When the trigger source is common counter, it cannot be read out. (NAK15 is returned.)
• When the setting is performed using this command, “Reset at Date Update” is cancelled.
Counter Reset (Code: CTR)
Resets the current counter value to the initial value.
• Counter reset
Set the counter of ile currently selected to the initial value.
STX
CTR
S
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Reset all counters 0 to 3 (the value currently selected is set to the initial value). The common counters cannot be reset.
135
Expiry Date/Time Condition (Code: LMT)
Sets the expiry date/time condition.
• Setting / Readout data of Expiry Date/Time Condition
Expiry date/time can be set within the range from EANuary 1, 1980 to December 31, 2099.
STX
LMT
Sub
Command
[Expiry No.] [Expiry] [Reference Unit] [Start Date]
6-byte
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Sub command is "S" at the time of setting and "A" for response data at the time of readout.
• Readout request of expiry date/time condition
STX
LMT
R
(Expiry No.)
1-byte
Name
Data Length
[byte]
Expiry No.
1
The expiry No. to be set or to be read out is
indicated.
“1” to “4”
Expiry
3
The expiry is indicated.
“001” to “999”
Outline
Description
Reference Unit
1
The reference unit is indicated.
Expiry (future):
“0”…year
“1”…month
“2”…day
“3”…hour
“4”…minute
Expiry (past):
“5”…year
“6”…month
“7”…day
“8”…hour
“9”…minute
Start Date
1
Possible to be set only when the reference unit
is set to “year” or “month”. Indicating if the date
of “today” is included or not.
“0”…Today not included
“1”…Today included
Reference
• The common expiry (expiry Nos. 5 to 8) cannot be set and read out. (NAK09 is returned.)
136
Lot Condition (Code: LTC)
Sets the condition of “Lot Function” to change characters depending on date/time.
• Setting / Readout data of lot condition
STX
LTC
Sub
Command
[Lot No.] [Period] [Unit]
3-byte
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Sub command is "S" at the time of setting and "A" for response data at the time of readout.
• Readout request of lot condition
STX
LTC
R
Name
Data Length
[byte]
Lot No.
1
Lot Condition
Period
Condition
1
1
(Lot Function Number)
1-byte
Outline
Description
The lot No. to be set or to be read out is
indicated.
“0” to “3”
The time of period for lot marking is indicated.
“0”…current
“1”…Expiry 1
“2”…Expiry 2
“3”…Expiry 3
“4”…Expiry 4
The unit of period to switch the character string
for marking is indicated.
“0”…year
“1”…month
“2”…day
“3”…Y/M
“4”…M/D
“5”…day of week
“6”…hour
“7”…Week
Reference
• The common lot (Lot function Nos. 4 to 7) cannot be set and read out. (NAK09 is returned.)
When the lot condition is counter common expiry and the unit of the expiry period is “Min” or “Hour/Min” at read-out time,
NAK15 is returned.
• The settings for all lot characters of the lot functional number are cleared if the lot condition is changed.
137
Lot Character String (Code: LTS)
Sets the character string used for “Lot Function” to change characters depending on date/time.
• Setting / Readout data of lot character string
Set the lot character string for the speciied number with the following format:
STX
LTS
Sub
Command
[Lot No.] [Period Unit No.] [Start Period]
[End Period] [ Marking Character String]
Max. 33-byte
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Sub command is "S" at the time of setting and "A" for response data at the time of readout.
• Readout request of lot character string
STX
LTS
R
Name
Data Length
[byte]
Lot No.
1
[Lot No.] [Period Unit No.]
3-byte
Outline
The lot No. to be set or to be read out is
indicated.
Description
“0” to “3”
Period Condition
Period Unit
2
The expiry No. to be set or to be read out
is indicated.
The expiry is indicated.
The setting range varies depending on
the condition of period unit.
Setting range
Year
Month
Day
Y/M
M/D
Hour
Week
Day of Week
“01” to “54”
“01” to “12”
“01” to “31”
“01” to “54”
“01” to “54”
“01” to “24”
“01” to “54”
“01” to “07”
Period Condition
Start Period
End Period
6
6
The start/end period of marking character
string for setting is set.
The setting range varies depending on
the condition of period unit.
Set “999999” for both of start and end
period to delete it.
“999999” is indicated if the period which
has not been set is read out.
Year
Month
Day
Y/M
M/D
Hour
Week
Day of Week
Marking
Character
String
Max 18
The character string to be marked with
the speciied period is set. (Up to 9
characters) Specify 0-byte of data length
to delete the character string of period.
Use the shift JIS code.
Reference
• The common lot (Lot function Nos. 4 to 7) cannot be set and read out. (NAK09 is returned.)
When the period unit exceeds the setting range above, NAK09 is returned.
138
Setting range
“198000” to “209900”
“000001” to “000012”
“000001” to “000031”
“198001” to “209912”
“000101” to “001231”
(The higher 4 characters:
month, the lower 2
characters: date)
“000000” to “000023”
“000000” to “000054”
“000000” to “000006”
(“000000”: Sunday,
“000006”: Saturday)
Bar Code Marking Data (Shift JIS Code Speciied) (Code: BCS)
Sets character string to be encoded as a bar code by shift JIS code.
• Setting / Readout data of bar code marking data
STX
BCS
Sub
Command
[Bar Code No.] [Bar Code Data]
Max. 61-byte
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Sub command is "S" at the time of setting and "A" for response data at the time of readout.
• Readout request of bar code marking data
STX
BCS
R
Name
Data Length
[byte]
Bar Code No.
1
Bar Code Data
Max 60
[Bar Code No.]
1-byte
Outline
Description
Function No. of bar code which sets the data.
“0” to “3”
Speciies the character string within 30 characters with shift JIS code for setting in the speciied line.
Function characters are speciied by ASCII
code beginning with “%” (25(HEX)).
For the method to specify the bar
code data, refer to “Setting method
of character string for marking (speciied with shift JIS code)” in page 154.
Reference
• In the LP-F10/F10W mode, no control code can be set for bar code data.
• f readout data includes function characters (such as “%SFT”), the setting character (“%SFT”) is read out, but characters
to be actually marked are not.
139
Bar Code Marking Condition (Code: BCF)
Speciies the bar code marking condition.
• Setting / Readout data of bar code marking condition
STX
BCF
Sub
Command
[Bar code No.] [Bar Code Type] [Inversion] [Check Character]
[Height] [Narrow Element] [X Position] [Y Position] [Tilt Angle]
[Quiet Ratio] [Wide Element] [Laser Power Cor.]
[Scan Speed Correction] [Laser Pulse Cycle Correction]
50-byte (LP-F10 mode), 47-byte (LP-F10W mode)
(Check
Sum)
Delimiter
Sub command is "S" at the time of setting and "A" for response data at the time of readout.
• Readout request of bar code marking condition
STX
BCF
[Bar Code No.]
1-byte
R
(Check Sum)
Name
Data Length
[byte]
Bar Code No.
1
Bar code which sets the condition
“0” to “3”
Bar Code Type
1
Speciies bar code type
“0”: CODE39
“1”: ITF
Inversion
1
Indicates valid or invalid of inversion
“0”: invalid
“1”: valid
Check Character
1
Indicates existence of check character.
“0”: Absence
“1”: Presence
Height
Narrow Element
Outline
6
Height of bar code
4
Indicates the width of narrow element of bar and space. Set the larger
value than ‘Line width’ in laser setting
screen.
Description
Model type*
LP-Sxx0(W)
LP-Sxx5(W)
LP-Sxx2
LP-Mxx0/LP-Zxx0
LP-Mxx5
LP-Mxx6/LP-Zxx6
Setting range [mm]
"001.00" to "090.00"
"001.00" to "160.00"
"001.00" to "055.00"
"001.00" to "120.00"
"001.00" to "220.00"
"001.00" to "330.00"
“0.05” to “1.00” [mm]
Model type*
LP-Sxx0(W)
LP-Sxx5(W)
LP-Sxx2
LP-Mxx0/LP-Zxx0
LP-Mxx5
LP-Mxx6/LP-Zxx6
Setting range [mm]
"-045.00" to "+045.00"
"-080.00" to "+080.00"
"-027.50" to "+027.50"
"-060.00" to "+060.00"
"-110.00" to "+110.00"
"-165.00" to "+165.00"
X Position
7
X coordinate of center of bar code
Y Position
7
Y coordinate of center of bar code
Tilt Angle
6
Tilt angle of bar code
“-180.0” to “+180.0” [°]
Quiet/
Narrow Ratio
4
Ratio of quiet width to narrow element
width
“00.0” to “20.0”
Wide/
Narrow Ratio
3
Ratio of wide element width to narrow
element width
“1.8” to “3.4”
Laser Power
Corrrection
3
Indicates the correction value for laser
power speciied at the laser setting.
“000” to “200” [%]
140
Delimiter
Name
Data Length
[byte]
Scan Speed
Correction
3
Indicates the correction value for the
scan speed speciied at the laser
setting
“001” to “200” [%]
(3)
Indicates the correction value
corresponding with the marking pulse
cycle speciied value here. (LP-F10
mode only)
“050” to “200” [%]
(Laser Pulse
Cycle Correction)
Outline
Description
* For the detail of the model type, refer to “Target Laser Marker” (P.4).
Reference
• The bar code No. 4 to 7 cannot be set and read out. (NAK09 is returned.)
• Readout is available only when CODE39/ITF is set in the bar code type.
(When other bar code is set, NAK15 is returned.)
• In readout response, the digit of 1μm or 0.01° is rounded down.
• When the setting is performed using this command, the layer No. is “0”.
• Setting with this command in the LP-F10W mode, the laser pulse cycle correction is set to 100%.
• For LP-SxxxW type, the laser pulse cycle correction setting does not affect the marking. Also this setting is not saved in
the ile.
141
QR Code Data (Shift JIS Code Speciied) (Code: QRS)
Sets character string to be encoded as a QR code by shift JIS code.
• QR Code Data Setting
STX
QRS
Sub
Command
[QR Code No.] [Line No.] [QR Code Data]
max. 62-byte
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Sub command is "S" at the time of setting and "A" for response data at the time of readout.
• Readout request of QR code data
STX
QRS
R
[QR Code No.]
1-byte
Name
Data Length
[byte]
QR Code No.
1
Function No. of QR code which sets the
data.
“0” to “3”
Line No.
1
Speciies the line for data setting
“1” to “9”
Speciies the character setting in the speciied
line.In case of QR code marking, each line
is connected in the order of number, and
barcode is generated.
Refer to “Setting method of character
string for marking (speciied with shift
JIS code)” (P.132) for the detail of the
setting method of QR Code Data.
QR Code Data
Max 60
Outline
Description
Reference
• When setting QR code marking data in multiple lines, data in each line are jointed in the order of line numbers and QR
code data is generated. (Data are jointed and no line break is inserted for each line.)
• When setting QR code data in multiple lines, make sure the sum of code data is 510-bytes or less.
• If readout data includes function characters (such as “%SFT”), the setting character (“%SFT”) is read out, but characters
to be actually marked are not.
142
QR Code Marking Condition (Code: QRF)
Sets the marking condition for QR code.
• QR Code Marking Condition Setting
STX
QRF
Sub
Command
[QR Code No.] [Code Type]
[Data Input Mode] [Error Correction Level]
[X Position] [Y Position] [Rotation Angle]
[Module H.] [Module W.]
32-byte
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Sub command is "S" at the time of setting and "A" for response data at the time of readout.
• Readout request of QR code marking condition
STX
QRF
[QR Code No.]
1-byte
R
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Name
Data Length
[byte]
Outline
QR Code No.
1
QR code No. which sets the condition.
“0” to “3”
Code Type
1
Speciies QR code type.
“1”: model 1
“2”: model 2
“3”: micro QR code
Data Input Mode
1
Data input mode of QR code.
“0”: Number
“1”: Alpha
“3”: Kanji
Error correction level of QR code.
“0”: L (High density level)
“1”: M(Standard level)
“2”: Q (High responsibility level)
“3”: H (Super high responsibility level)
For micro QR, the high reliability cannot be
speciied.
Error Correction
Level
1
Description
Model type*
Setting range [mm]
LP-Sxx0(W)
LP-Sxx5(W)
LP-Sxx2
LP-Mxx0 / LP-Zxx0
LP-Mxx5
LP-Mxx6/LP-Zxx6
"-045.00" to "+045.00"
"-080.00" to "+080.00"
"-027.50" to "+027.50"
"-060.00" to "+060.00"
"-110.00" to "+110.00"
"-165.00" to "+165.00"
X Position
7
X coordinate of center of QR code.
Y Position
7
Y coordinate of center of QR code.
Rotation Angle
6
Rotation angle of QR code.
“-180.0” to “+180.0” [°]
Module H.
4
Interval of module in longitudinal
direction.
“0.05” to “1.00” [mm]
Module W.
4
Interval of module in lateral direction.
* For the detail of the model type, refer to “Target Laser Marker” (P.4).
Reference
• The QR code version becomes automatic and the minimum size is speciied.
• The data matrix No. 4 to 7 cannot be set and read out. (NAK09 is returned.)
• Readout is available only when the QR code is set to the bar code type.
(When other bar code is set, NAK15 is returned.)
• In readout response, the digit of 1μm or 0.01° is rounded down.
• When the setting is performed using this command, the layer No. is “0”.
143
QR Code Pattern (Code: QRP)
Sets QR code module marking pattern.
• QR Code Pattern Setting
STX
QRP
Sub
Command
[QR Code No.] [Margin.] [Finder]
[Alignment] [Dark module] [Light module]
66-byte
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Sub command is "S" at the time of setting and "A" for response data at the time of readout.
• Readout request of QR code pattern
STX
QRP
R
QR Code No.
Name
Data Length
[byte]
QR Code No.
1
Margin Pattern
13
Outline
Description
Function No. of QR code which sets the
pattern.
“0” to “3”
Speciies a character code (a pattern code)
to use for the margin pattern.
Refer to “Character Code Table”
(P.191) for the character code. When
the marking cannot be done, set the
character code to “0000”.
Speciies a correction value of laser and scan
speed when marking the margin pattern.
• Laser Power Correction (3-byte)
• Scan Speed Correction (3-byte)
• Laser Pulse Cycle Correction (3-byte)
“000” to “200”
“050” to “200”
“050” to “200” (Specify “100” in
LP-F10W mode.)
13
Speciies the inder pattern. When “0000”
is speciied for the character code, marking
is performed at the pattern setting of dark
module/light module. The other settings are
the same as those for the margin pattern.
Same as above
Alignment Pattern
13
When “0000” is speciied for the character
code in the alignment setting, marking is
performed at the pattern setting of dark
module/light module. The other settings are
the same as those for the margin pattern.
Same as above
Dark module
13
Speciies the dark module pattern and the
details are the same as those for the margin
pattern.
Same as above
Light Module
Pattern
13
Speciies the light module pattern and the
details are the same as those for the margin
pattern.
Same as above
Finder Pattern
Reference
• Setting with this command in the LP-F10W mode, the laser pulse cycle correction is set to 100%.
• For LP-SxxxW type, the laser pulse cycle correction setting does not affect the marking. Also this setting is not saved in
the ile.
144
Data Matrix Code Data (Shift JIS Code Speciied) (Code: DMS)
Sets character string to be encoded as a data matrix code by shift JIS code.
• Data Matrix Code Data Setting
STX
DMS
Sub
Command
[Data Matrix No.] [Line No.]
[Data Matrix Data]
Max. 62-byte
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Sub command is "S" at the time of setting and "A" for response data at the time of readout.
• Readout request of data matrix code data
STX
DMS
[Data Matrix No.]
1-byte
R
Name
Data Length
[byte]
Outline
[Data Matrix No.]
1
Function No. of data matrix code which sets
the data.
“0” to “3”
Line No.
1
Speciies the line for data setting.
“1” to “9”
Speciies the character setting in the
speciied line. In case of data matrix code
marking, each line is connected in the order
of number, and barcode is generated.
Refer to “Setting method of character
string for marking (speciied with
shift JIS code)” (P.132) for the detail of
the setting method of Data Matrix
Data.
Data Matrix Data
Max 60
Description
Reference
• When setting data matrix data in multiple lines, data in each line are jointed in the order of line numbers and data matrix
data is generated. (Data are jointed and no line break is inserted for each line.)
• When setting data matrix data in multiple lines, make sure the sum of code data is 510-bytes or less.
• If readout data includes function characters (such as “%SFT”), the setting character (“%SFT”) is read out, but characters
to be actually marked are not.
145
Data Matrix Code Marking Condition (Code: DMF)
Sets the marking condition for data matrix code.
• Set the data matrix code marking condition.
STX
DMF
Sub
Command
[Data Matrix No.] [Data Input Mode]
[Number of Row] [Number of Column] [X Position]
[Y Position] [Rotation Angle] [Module H.] [Module W.]
36-byte
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Sub command is "S" at the time of setting and "A" for response data at the time of readout.
• Readout request of data matrix code marking condition
STX
DMF
R
[Data Matrix No.]
1-byte
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Name
Data Length
[byte]
[Data Matrix No.]
1
Bar code which sets the condition.
“0” to “3”
Data Input Mode
1
Type of character to be encoded in the
data matrix code.
“0”: Binary
“1”: Kanji
Number of Row
2
Longitudinal symbol size (the number
of modules) of the data matrix code.
When “0” is speciied for the number of
both row and column, the symbol size
is encoded in the minimum size.
“00” or “08” to “88”
(Combination of number of row and column
is limited. *1)
Number of column
2
Lateral symbol size (the number of
modules) of the data matrix code.
“00” or “10” to “80”
(Combination of number of row and column
is limited.*1)
X Position
7
X coordinate of center of data matrix
code.
Y Position
7
Y coordinate of center of data matrix
code.
Rotation Angle
6
Rotation angle of data matrix code.
“-180.0” to “+180.0” [°]
Module H.
5
Interval of module in longitudinal
direction.
“0.001” to “1.000” [mm]
Module W.
5
Interval of module in lateral direction.
Outline
Description
Model type*2
LP-Sxx0(W)
LP-Sxx5(W)
LP-Sxx2
LP-Mxx0 / LP-Zxx0
LP-Mxx5
LP-Mxx6/LP-Zxx6
Setting range [mm]
"-045.00" to "+045.00"
"-080.00" to "+080.00"
"-027.50" to "+027.50"
"-060.00" to "+060.00"
"-110.00" to "+110.00"
"-165.00" to "+165.00"
*1: Available combination of number of row and column:
Auto
:
00 × 00
Square
:
10 × 10, 12 × 12, 14 × 14, 16 × 16, 18 × 18, 20 × 20, 22 × 22, 24 × 24, 26 × 26,
32 × 32, 36 × 36, 40 × 40, 48 × 48, 52 × 52, 64 × 64, 72 × 72, 80 × 80, 88 × 88
Rectangle
:
08 × 18, 08 × 32, 12 × 26, 12 × 36, 16 × 36, 16 × 48
*2 For the detail of the model type, refer to “Target Laser Marker” (P.4).
Reference
• The data matrix No. 4 to 7 cannot be set and read out. (NAK09 is returned.)
• Readout is available only when the data matrix is set to the bar code type.
(When other bar code is set, NAK15 is returned.)
• In readout response, the digit of 1μm or 0.01° is rounded down.
• When the setting is performed using this command, the layer No. is “0”.
146
Data Matrix Code Pattern (Code: DMP)
Sets data matrix code module marking pattern.
• Data Matrix Code Pattern Setting
STX
DMP
Sub
Command
[Data Matrix No.] [Quiet Zone]
[Mark Module] [Space Module]
40-byte
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Sub command is "S" at the time of setting and "A" for response data at the time of readout.
• Readout request of data matrix code pattern
STX
DMP
[Data Matrix No.]
1-byte
R
Name
Data Length
[byte]
Outline
Data Matrix No.
1
Function No. of data matrix code which sets
the pattern.
“0” to “3”
Speciies a character code (a pattern code)
to use for the quiet zone pattern.
Refer to “Character Code Table” (P.191)
for the character code.
When the marking cannot be done,
set the character code to “0000”.
Quiet Zone
Pattern
13
Speciies a correction value of laser and
scan speed when marking the quiet zone
pattern.
• Laser Power Correction (3-byte)
• Scan Speed Correction (3-byte)
• Laser Pulse Cycle Correction (3-byte)
Description
“000” to “200”
“050” to “200”
“050” to “200”
(Specify “100” in LP-F10W mode.)
Mark Module
Pattern
13
Speciies the character code to be used for
the mark module pattern and the correction
value to mark the mark module pattern.
Same as above
Space Module
Pattern
13
Speciies the character code to be used for
the space module pattern and the correction
value to mark the mark module pattern.
Same as above
Reference
• Setting with this command in the LP-F10W mode, the laser pulse cycle correction is set to 100%.
• For LP-SxxxW type, the laser pulse cycle correction setting does not affect the marking. Also this setting is not saved in
the ile.
147
Logo File (CAD File) (Code: CDF)
Sets the logo ile.
• Setting / Readout data of Logo File
STX
CDF
Sub
Command
[CAD No.] [CAD File Name]
Max. 10-byte
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Sub command is "S" at the time of setting and "A" for response data at the time of readout.
• Readout request of Logo File
STX
CDF
R
Name
Data Length
[byte]
CAD No.
2
CAD File Name
Max 8
(CAD No.)
2-byte
Outline
Description
The CAD File No. to be set or to be read out is
indicated.
“00” to “15”
The CAD ile name corresponding to the speciied
number is indicated without extension.
The CAD ile speciication will be deleted unless
the ile name is speciied.
When the ile name is “ABCD.VEC”:
“ABCD”.
Reference
• Logo ile for the LP-F series is treated as one for LP-F10/F10W (marking area o90mm).Logo ile used for special-order
model (marking area other than o90mm) is not supported.
• The CAD No. 16 and after cannot be set and read out. (NAK09 is returned.)
• The long ile name and DXF ile name cannot be speciied. (NAK09 is returned.)
If readout is performed when long ile name and DXF ile name are speciied, NAK15 is returned.
• If readout data includes characters that cannot be expressed in ASCII code such as Katakana and Kanji (2-byte
character), these 2-byte characters are read out in shift JIS code.
148
VEC Logo Conditions (CAD Condition) (Code: CDC)
Sets the marking condition of VEC (work shape converted for laser marker) logo ile.
• Setting / Readout data of VEC Logo
STX
CDC
Sub
Command
[CAD No.] [X Position] [Y Position] [Scale] [Rotation Angle]
[Laser Pulse Cycle Correction] [Scan Speed Correction]
[Laser Pulse Cycle Correction]
36-byte (LP-F10 mode), 33-byte (LP-F10W mode)
(Check
Sum)
Delimiter
Sub command is "S" at the time of setting and "A" for response data at the time of readout.
• Readout request out of VEC Logo
STX
CDC
R
[CAD No.]
2-byte
Name
Data Length
[byte]
Outline
CAD No.
2
The number for CAD condition is indicated.
X Position
7
The X coordinate of origin position on the
CAD ile is indicated.
Y Position
7
The Y coordinate of origin position on the
CAD ile is indicated.
(Check Sum)
Description
“00” to “15”
“-300.00” to “+300.00” [mm]
Model type*
Setting range [times]
LP-Sxx0
LP-Sxx5
LP-Sxx2
LP-Sxx0W
LP-Sxx5W
LP-Mxx0/LP-Zxx0
LP-Mxx5
LP-Mxx6/LP-Zxx6
“00.10” to ”01.98”
“00.10” to ”03.53”
“00.10” to ”01.21”
“00.10” to ”02.27”
“00.10” to ”04.04”
“00.10” to ”03.03”
“00.10” to ”05.56”
“00.10” to ”08.34”
Magniication
5
The X magniication with which the CAD
ile is marked is indicated.
Rotation Angle
6
The angle of rotation in counter-clockwise
direction, centering on the origin position
of CAD ile, is indicated.
“-180.0” to “+180.0” [°]
Laser Power
Correction
3
Indicates the correction value for laser
power speciied at the laser setting.
“000” to “200” [%]
Scan Speed
Correction
3
Performs correction of the set scan speed
at speciied value.
“050” to “200” [%]
(3)
Indicates the correction value
corresponding with the marking pulse
cycle speciied value here. (LP-F10 mode
only)
“050” to “200” [%]
(Laser
Pulse Cycle
Correction)
Delimiter
* For the detail of the model type, refer to “Target Laser Marker” (P.4).
Reference
• Logo ile for the LP-F series is treated as one for LP-F10/F10W (marking areao90mm).Logo ile used for special-order
model (marking area other thano90mm) is not supported.
• When a logo ile for the LP-F series is used, X/Y scales are automatically adjusted to the same size in the LP-M/LP-S/
LP-Z series. X/Y scales for readout of CAD condition may be different from values speciied in CAD condition setting.
• In readout response, the digit of 1μm or 0.01° is rounded down.
• The laser power correction, speed scan correction and laser pulse cycle correction are out of the setting range of the LPF10/F10W, readout cannot be performed.(NAK15 is returned.)
• When the setting is performed using this command, the layer No. is “0”.
• Setting with this command in the LP-F10W mode, the laser pulse cycle correction is set to 100%.
• For LP-SxxxW type, the laser pulse cycle correction setting does not affect the marking. Also this setting is not saved in
the ile.
149
General Condition (Code: ALC)
Sets the conditions related to whole ile.
• Setting / Readout data of general condition
STX
ALC
Sub
Command
[X Offset] [Y Offset] [Rotation Offset] [Overwriting Frequency]
[Flip (X Axis Symmetry)] [Mirror (Y axis symmetrical)] [Step & Repeat]
[Number of Row] [Number of Col.] [Row Step] [Col. Step] [Flat Marking]
41-byte
(Check
Sum)
Delimiter
Sub command is "S" at the time of setting and "A" for response data at the time of readout.
• Readout request of general condition
STX
ALC
Name
R
(Check Sum)
Data Length
[byte]
Delimiter
Outline
Content
Model type*
Setting range [mm]
LP-Sxx0(W)
LP-Sxx5(W)
LP-Sxx2
LP-Mxx0/LP-Zxx0
LP-Mxx5
LP-Mxx6/LP-Zxx6
"-045.00" to "+045.00"
"-080.00" to "+080.00"
"-027.50" to "+027.50"
"-060.00" to "+060.00"
"-110.00" to "+110.00"
"-165.00" to "+165.00"
X Offset
7
The marking position is offset to the X
direction.
Y Offset
7
The marking position is offset to the Y
direction.
Rotation Offset
6
The marking position is offset to the
rotating direction.
“-180.0” to “+180.0” [°]
Overwriting Frequency
1
Marking is repeated by the repeat number set.
“1” to “9” [times]
Flip (X Axis Symmetry)
1
The character marked is inverted to the
X axis.
“0”… inversion OFF
“1”… inversion ON
Mirror (Y Axis Symmetry)
1
The character marked is inverted to the
Y axis.
“0”… inversion OFF
“1”… inversion ON
Step & Repeat
1
Marking the same data is repeated to the
X or Y axis direction.
“0”…OFF
“1”…ON
Number of Row
3
The number of row to be marked to the Y
direction is indicated.
“001” to “100”…[row]
(number of row x column < 900)
Number of Column
3
The number of column to be marked to
the X direction is indicated.
“001” to “100”…[column]
(number of row x column < 900)
Row Step
5
The marking pitch to the Y direction is
speciied.
Column Step
5
The marking pitch to the X direction is
speciied.
Flat Marking
1
Sets the lat marking function.
Model type*
Setting range [mm]
LP-Sxx0(W)
LP-Sxx5(W)
LP-Sxx2
LP-Mxx0 / LP-Zxx0
LP-Mxx5
LP-Mxx6/LP-Zxx6
"00.00" to "90.00"
"00.00" to "99.99"
"00.00" to "55.00"
"00.00" to "99.99"
"00.00" to "99.99"
"00.00" to "99.99"
“0”…OFF
“1”…ON
* For the detail of the model type, refer to “Target Laser Marker” (P.4).
Reference
• The lat marking setting is not relected to marking for the LP-M/LP-S/LP-Z series. Also this setting is not saved in the ile.
• Flat Marking can not be saved (when save as a new ile or overwrite).
• When the number of overlapped marking is 10 to 9999, setting cannot be performed.(NAK09 is returned.)
If readout is performed when the number of overlapped marking is 10 to 9999, NAK15 is returned.
• In readout response, the digit of 1μm or 0.01° is rounded down.
• When the setting is performed using this command, the following items will be speciied.
Overwriting Interval=0
Step & Repeat:
X/Y offset = 0, Base position = Upper left, Counter update at each step = Same in all steps
150
Character Conditions (Code: STC)
Sets the condition for marking character string per line.
• Setting / Readout data of character condition
STX
STC
Sub
Command
[Condition No.] [Start Line] [End Line] [Marking Shape] [Vary with the
Marking Shape] [Font Speciication] [Bold Line Width] [Laser Power
Correction] [Scan Speed Correction] [Laser Pulse Cycle Correction]
max. 73-byte (LP-F10 mode), 70-byte (LP-F10W mode)
(Check
Sum)
Delimiter
Sub command is "S" at the time of setting and "A" for response data at the time of readout.
• Readout request of character condition
STX
STC
[Condition No.]
2-byte
R
(Check
Sum)
Delimiter
1. When markings from is straight line/proportional (Data length: 60-byte (LP-F10 mode), 57-byte (LP-F10W
mode))
Name
Data Length
[byte]
Condition No.
2
The number for marking condition is
indicated.
“01” to “30”
Start Line
2
The start line of character string for
marking with this condition is indicated.
“01” to “30” [row]
End Line
2
The end line of character string for marking
with this condition is indicated.
“01” to “30” [row]
Marking Shape
1
The marking form is indicated.
“0”…straight line
“4”…straight line Proportional
Character
Height
6
The height of character for marking is
indicated.
Character
Width
6
The width of character for marking is
indicated.
X Position
7
The X coordinate where the irst character
is marked is indicated.
Y Position
7
The Y coordinate where the irst character
is marked is indicated.
Character
Interval
6
Indicates the gap between adjacent
characters.
Line Interval
6
The line pitch to mark the next line is
indicated when the character string is
marked over two or more lines.
Font
Speciication
1
The number corresponding to the 10 fonts
previously registered is indicated.
Outline
Description
Model type*
Setting range [mm]
LP-Sxx0(W)
LP-Sxx5(W)
LP-Sxx2
LP-Mxx0/LP-Zxx0
LP-Mxx5
LP-Mxx6/LP-Zxx6
"000.20" to "090.00"
"000.20" to "160.00"
"000.20" to "055.00"
"000.20" to "120.00"
"000.20" to "220.00"
"000.20" to "330.00"
Model type*
Setting range [mm]
LP-Sxx0(W)
LP-Sxx5(W)
LP-Sxx2
LP-Mxx0/LP-Zxx0
LP-Mxx5
LP-Mxx6/LP-Zxx6
"-045.00" to "+045.00"
"-080.00" to "+080.00"
"-027.50" to "+027.50"
"-060.00" to "+060.00"
"-110.00" to "+110.00"
"-165.00" to "+165.00"
Model type*
Setting range [mm]
LP-Sxx0(W)
LP-Sxx5(W)
LP-Sxx2
LP-Mxx0/LP-Zxx0
LP-Mxx5
LP-Mxx6/LP-Zxx6
"000.00" to "090.00"
"000.00" to "160.00"
"000.00" to "055.00"
"000.00" to "120.00"
"000.00" to "220.00"
"000.00" to "330.00"
“1”…font 1
“2”…font 2
151
Name
Data Length
[byte]
Outline
Description
LP-F10 Mode
“-00.00” to “01.92” [mm]
LP-F10W Mode
Model type*
Setting range [mm]
LP-Sxx0(W)/LP-Sxx2/
“00.00” to “02.00”
LP-Mxx0/LP-Zxx0
LP-Sxx5(W)/LP-Mxx5/
“00.00” to “03.20”
LP-Mxx6/LP-Zxx6
Bold Line Width
5
The thickness of line for character for
marking is indicated.
Laser Power
Correction
3
Indicates the correction value for laser
power speciied at the laser setting.
“000” to “200” [%]
Scan
Speed
Correction
3
Indicates the correction value for the scan
speed speciied at the laser setting
“050” to “200” [%]
Laser
Pulse Cycle
Correction
(3)
Indicates the correction value
corresponding with the marking pulse
cycle speciied value here.
“050” to “200” [%]
(LP-F10 mode only)
* For the detail of the model type, refer to “Target Laser Marker” (P.4).
152
2. When markings from is slope/slope proportional (Data length: 66-byte (LP-F10 mode), 63-byte (LP-F10W
mode))
Name
Data Length
[byte]
Condition No.
2
The number for marking condition is
indicated.
“01” to “30”
Start Line
2
The start line of character string for
marking with this condition is indicated.
“01” to “30” [row]
End Line
2
The end line of character string for
marking with this condition is indicated.
“01” to “30” [row]
Marking Shape
1
The marking form is indicated.
“1”…slope
“5”…slope proportional
Character
Height
6
The height of character for marking is
indicated.
Character Width
6
The width of character for marking is
indicated.
X Position
7
The X coordinate where the irst
character is marked is indicated.
Y Position
7
The Y coordinate where the irst
character is marked is indicated.
Character
Interval
6
Indicates the gap between adjacent
characters.
Line Interval
6
The line pitch to mark the next line is
indicated when the character string is
marked over two or more lines.
Tilt Angle
6
The tilt angle for character for marking to
X axis is indicated.
“-180.0” to “+180.0” [mm]
Font
Speciication
1
The number corresponding to the 2 fonts
previously registered is indicated.
“1”…font 1
“2”…font 2
Outline
Description
Model type*
Setting range [mm]
LP-Sxx0(W)
LP-Sxx5(W)
LP-Sxx2
LP-Mxx0/LP-Zxx0
LP-Mxx5
LP-Mxx6/LP-Zxx6
"000.20" to "090.00"
"000.20" to "160.00"
"000.20" to "055.00"
"000.20" to "120.00"
"000.20" to "220.00"
"000.20" to "330.00"
Model type*
Setting range [mm]
LP-Sxx0(W)
LP-Sxx5(W)
LP-Sxx2
LP-Mxx0/LP-Zxx0
LP-Mxx5
LP-Mxx6/LP-Zxx6
"-045.00" to "+045.00"
"-080.00" to "+080.00"
"-027.50" to "+027.50"
"-060.00" to "+060.00"
"-110.00" to "+110.00"
"-165.00" to "+165.00"
Model type*
Setting range [mm]
LP-Sxx0(W)
LP-Sxx5(W)
LP-Sxx2
LP-Mxx0/LP-Zxx0
LP-Mxx5
LP-Mxx6/LP-Zxx6
"000.00" to "090.00"
"000.00" to "160.00"
"000.00" to "055.00"
"000.00" to "120.00"
"000.00" to "220.00"
"000.00" to "330.00"
LP-F10 Mode : “00.00” to “01.92” [mm]
LP-F10W Mode
Bold Line Width
5
The thickness of line for character for
marking is indicated.
Model type*
LP-Sxx0(W)/LP-Sxx2/
LP-Mxx0/LP-Zxx0
LP-Sxx5(W)/LP-Mxx5/
LP-Mxx6/LP-Zxx6
Laser Power
Correction
3
Indicates the correction value for laser
power speciied at the laser setting.
“000” to “200” [%]
Scan
Speed Correction
3
Indicates the correction value for the
scan speed speciied at the laser setting
“050” to “200” [%]
Laser Pulse
Cycle Cor.
(3)
Indicates the correction value
corresponding with the marking pulse
cycle speciied value here.
“050” to “200” [%]
(LP-F10 mode only)
Setting range [mm]
“00.00” to “02.00”
“00.00” to “03.20”
* For the detail of the model type, refer to “Target Laser Marker” (P.4).
153
3. When the marking form is a sector marking (Data length … 73-byte (LP-F10 mode), 70-byte (LP-F10W
mode))
Name
Data Length
[byte]
Condition No.
2
The number for marking condition is
indicated.
“01” to “30”
Start Line
2
The start line of character string for
marking with this condition is indicated.
“01” to “30” [row]
End Line
2
The end line of character string for
marking with this condition is indicated.
“01” to “30” [row]
Marking Shape
1
The marking form is indicated.
“2”… Sector CW direction outside
“3”… Sector CCW direction inside
Character Height
6
The height of character for marking is
indicated.
Character Width
6
The width of character for marking is
indicated.
Center Position X
7
The center of X coordinate for arc is
indicated.
Center Position Y
7
The center of Y coordinate for arc is
indicated.
Radius
7
The radius of arc is indicated.
Outline
Description
Model type*
Setting range [mm]
LP-Sxx0(W)
LP-Sxx5(W)
LP-Sxx2
LP-Mxx0/LP-Zxx0
LP-Mxx5
LP-Mxx6/LP-Zxx6
"000.20" to "090.00"
"000.20" to "160.00"
"000.20" to "055.00"
"000.20" to "120.00"
"000.20" to "220.00"
"000.20" to "330.00"
“-300.00” to “+300.00” [mm]
“+000.00” to “+300.00” [mm]
Model type*
Setting range [mm]
LP-Sxx0(W)
LP-Sxx5(W)
LP-Sxx2
LP-Mxx0/LP-Zxx0
LP-Mxx5
LP-Mxx6/LP-Zxx6
"000.00" to "090.00"
"000.00" to "160.00"
"000.00" to "055.00"
"000.00" to "120.00"
"000.00" to "220.00"
"000.00" to "330.00"
6
The difference of radius from the center
position of marking position to the next
line is indicated when the character
string is marked over two or more lines.
Start Angle
6
The angle from the positive (+) side of
X coordinate with counter-clockwise at
the irst character in character string for
marking is indicated.
“-180.0” to “+180.0” [°]
Angle of
Character
Interval
6
The angle between the center of
character and the center of next
character is indicated.
“-180.0” to “+180.0” [°]
Font
Speciication
1
The number corresponding to the 2 fonts
previously registered is indicated.
“1”…font 1
“2”…font 2
Radius of Line
Interval
LP-F10 Mode : “00.00” to “01.92” [mm]
LP-F10W Mode
Bold Line Width
5
The thickness of line for character for
marking is indicated.
Model type*
LP-Sxx0(W)/LP-Sxx2/
LP-Mxx0/LP-Zxx0
LP-Sxx5(W)/LP-Mxx5/
LP-Mxx6/LP-Zxx6
Laser Power
Correction
3
Indicates the correction value for laser
power speciied at the laser setting.
“000” to “200” [%]
Scan
Speed Correction
3
Indicates the correction value for the
scan speed speciied at the laser setting
“050” to “200” [%]
Laser Pulse
Cycle Cor.
(3)
Indicates the correction value
corresponding with the marking pulse
cycle speciied value here.
“050” to “200” [%]
(LP-F10 mode only)
154
Setting range [mm]
“00.00” to “02.00”
“00.00” to “03.20”
* For the detail of the model type, refer to “Target Laser Marker” (P.4).
Reference
• The condition Nos. 31 and after cannot be set and read out. (NAK09 is returned.)
• When the start line/end line is 31 to 99; font is 3 to 10, marking shape is proportional, arc radius and line width of bold
character; laser power correction, speed scan correction and laser pulse cycle correction are out of the setting range of
the LP-F10/LP-F10W, readout cannot be performed. (NAK15 is returned.)
• At the time of setting, the character height, character width and X coordinate are converted according to the deinition of
the LP-M/LP-S/LP-Z series so that they have the same layout, and at the time of readout, they are converted according
to the deinition of the LP-F10/LP-F10W. If any of the character height, character width and X coordinate exceeds the
setting range in this conversion, NAK09 is returned at the time of setting and NAK15 is returned at the time of readout.
• In readout response, the digit of 1μm or 0.01° is rounded down. (Excluding the items with conversion process.)
• When the marking shape is proportional, the kerning level should be set to level 2 that is supported by LP-F10/LP-F10W.
• When the setting is performed using this command, the start point of the character string is set to the leftmost and the
layer No. is “0”.
• Setting with this command in the LP-F10W mode, the laser pulse cycle correction is set to 100%.
• For LP-SxxxW type, the laser pulse cycle correction setting does not affect the marking. Also this setting is not saved in
the ile.
• At marking of bold characters, set the values so ratio of character height to character width be within 1/10 to 10.
• Set the Bold Line Width to 1/2 or less of the character height or the character width, whichever is smaller.
155
External Offset Condition (Code: OFC)
Sets input conditions of “External Offset Function” to switch coordinates using I/O input.
• Setting / Readout data of external offset condition
STX
OFC
Sub
Command
[External Offset]
1-byte
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Sub command is "S" at the time of setting and "A" for response data at the time of readout.
• Readout request of external offset condition
STX
OFC
R
(Check Sum)
Name
Data Length
[byte]
External Offset
(Parallel Input)
1
Delimiter
Outline
Description
The condition for parallel input for the external
offset is indicated.
“0”…no use
“1”…low 4-bit
“4”…low 8-bit
Reference
• When “Low 10 bit” and “Serial Data” are set, readout cannot be performed. (NAK15 is returned.)
External Offset Coordinates (Code: OFS)
Sets coordinates of “Offset Function” to switch coordinates using I/O input.
• Setting / Readout data of external offset coordinates
STX
OFS
Sub
Command
[Parallel Data No.] [X Offset] [Y Offset]
[θ Offset]
21-byte
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Sub command is "S" at the time of setting and "A" for response data at the time of readout.
• Readout request of external offset coordinates
STX
OFS
R
Name
Data Length
[byte]
Parallel Data No.
3
[Parallel Data No.]
3-byte
Outline
The number in which offset is set is
indicated.
X Offset
6
The offset of X coordinate is indicated.
Y Offset
6
The offset of Y coordinate is indicated.
q Offset
6
The rotation offset is indicated.
* For the detail of the model type, refer to “Target Laser Marker” (P.4).
156
Description
“000” to “255”
Model type*
Setting range [mm]
LP-Sxx0(W)
LP-Sxx5(W)
LP-Sxx2
LP-Mxx0/LP-Zxx0
LP-Mxx5
LP-Mxx6/LP-Zxx6
"-45.00" to "+45.00"
"-80.00" to "+80.00"
"-27.50" to "+27.50"
"-60.00" to "+60.00"
"-99.99" to "+99.99"
"-99.99" to "+99.99"
“-180.0” to “+180.0” [°]
Step & Repeat Fine Adjustment (Code: SRA)
Sets the ine adjustment of “Step & Repeat” to mark the same marking contents on multiple locations in one ile.
• Setting / Readout data of Step & Repeat ine adjustment
STX
SRA
Sub
Command
[List line] [Fine Adj. Type ] [Varies depending on the type of line adj.]
max. 18-byte
(Check
Sum)
Delimiter
Sub command is "S" at the time of setting and "A" for response data at the time of readout.
• Readout request of Step & Repeat ine adjustment
STX
SRA
R
[List line] (2byte)
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
1. Setting deletion (data length: 3-Byte)
Name
Data Length
[byte]
List line
2
The line in the list where this instruction is
stores is indicated.
“00” to “99”
Fine Adj. Type
1
The type of instruction for ine adjustment is
indicated.
“0”…Setting deletion
Outline
Description
2. In case of “Single” as ine adjustment type (data length: 21-Byte)
Name
Data Length
[byte]
List line
2
The line in the list where this instruction is
stored is indicated.
“00” to “99”
Fine Adj. Type
1
The type of instruction for ine adjustment
is indicated.
“1”…single ine adjustment
Target Row
3
The target row to which the ine adjustment
is provided is indicated.
“001” to “100”
Target Column
3
The target column to which the ine
adjustment is provided is indicated.
“001” to “100”
FineTune X
6
The amount of adjustment for X axis is
indicated.
FineTune Y
6
The amount of adjustment for Y axis is
indicated.
Outline
Description
Model type*
Setting range [mm]
LP-Sxx0(W)
LP-Sxx5(W)
LP-Sxx2
LP-Mxx0 / LP-Zxx0
LP-Mxx5
LP-Mxx6/LP-Zxx6
"-45.00" to "+45.00"
"-80.00" to "+80.00"
"-27.50" to "+27.50"
"-60.00" to "+60.00"
"-99.99" to "+99.99"
"-99.99" to "+99.99"
* For the detail of the model type, refer to “Target Laser Marker” (P.4).
3. In case of “Marking OFF” as ine adjustment type (data length: 9-Byte)
Name
Data Length
[byte]
List line
2
The line in the list where this instruction is
stores is indicated.
“00” to “99”
Fine Adj. Type
1
The type of instruction for ine adjustment is
indicated.
“2”…Marking OFF
Target Row
3
The target row to which the ine adjustment is
provided is indicated.
“001” to “100”
Target Column
3
The target column to which the ine
adjustment is provided is indicated.
“001” to “100”
Outline
Description
157
4. For ine adjustment for all columns/ine adjustment for all rows/ine adjustment for column/ine adjustment for
row (data length: 18-Byte)
Name
Data Length
[byte]
List line
2
The line in the list where this instruction is
stored is indicated.
“00” to “99”
1
The type of instruction for ine adjustment
is indicated.
“3”…ine adjustment for all columns
“4”…ine adjustment for all rows
“5”…ine adjustment for column
“6”…ine adjustment for row
Target Column
or Row
3
Sets target column(s) or row(s) for ine
adjustment. In case of ine adjustment for
all columns/rows, the speciied column/row
and all subsequent columns/rows will be
subject to ine adjustment.
“001” to “100”
FineTune X
6
The amount of adjustment for X axis is
indicated.
FineTune Y
6
The amount of adjustment for Y axis is
indicated.
Fine Adj. Type
Outline
Description
Model type*
Setting range [mm]
LP-Sxx0(W)
LP-Sxx5(W)
LP-Sxx2
LP-Mxx0 / LP-Zxx0
LP-Mxx5
LP-Mxx6/LP-Zxx6
"-45.00" to "+45.00"
"-80.00" to "+80.00"
"-27.50" to "+27.50"
"-60.00" to "+60.00"
"-99.99" to "+99.99"
"-99.99" to "+99.99"
* For the detail of the model type, refer to “Target Laser Marker” (P.4).
Reference
• The readout of the list line 100 and after cannot be set. (NAK09 is returned.)
• When the setting is performed using this command, the rotation angle and laser power adjustment become “0”.
• In readout response, the digit of 1μm is rounded down.
158
Laser Power (Code: LPW)
Sets the laser power.
• Setting / Readout data of laser power
STX
LPW
Sub
Command
[Laser Power] 5-byte
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Sub command is "S" at the time of setting and "A" for response data at the time of readout.
• Readout request of laser power
STX
LPW
R
(Check Sum)
Data Length
[byte]
Name
Delimiter
Outline
Description
Model type*
Laser Power
5
The peak value of laser power is indicated.
Setting range
LP-Sxxx/LP-Mxxx "012.0" to "100.0"
LP-SxxxW
"020.0" to "100.0"
LP-Zxxx
"000.5" to "100.0"
(Set by increment of 0.5)
* For the detail of the model type, refer to “Target Laser Marker” (P.4).
Reference
• The LP-M/LP-S/LP-Z series has a different laser power from that of the LP-F series so that it is necessary to make some
adjustments before the LP-S series is used at irst.
Scan Speed (Code: SSP)
Sets the scan speed of the laser.
• Setting / Readout data of scan speed
STX
SSP
Sub
Command
[Scan Speed] 4Byte
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Sub command is "S" at the time of setting and "A" for response data at the time of readout.
• Readout request of scan speed
STX
SSP
R
(Check Sum)
Name
Data Length
[byte]
Scan Speed
4
Delimiter
Outline
The moving speed of laser is indicated.
Description
“0001” to “3000” [mm/s]
Reference
• More than 3000 cannot be speciied. (NAK09 is returned.)
• When the setting exceeds 3000 and readout is tried, NAK15 is returned.
• The LP-M/LP-S/LP-Z series has a different laser power and galvanometer performance from those of the LP-F series so
that it is necessary to make some adjustments separately before the LP-S series is used at irst.
159
Laser Pulse Cycle (Code: MPL)
[Supported models: LP-Mxxx/LP-Sxxx/LP-Zxxx]
Sets the marking pulse cycle of laser.
• Setting / Readout data of laser pulse cycle
STX
MPL
Sub
Command
[Laser Pulse Frequency] 4-byte
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Sub command is "S" at the time of setting and "A" for response data at the time of readout.
• Readout request of laser pulse cycle
STX
MPL
R
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Data Length
[byte]
Name
Laser Pulse Cycle
Outline
4
The marking pulse cycle is indicated.
Description
Model type*
Setting range [μs]
LP-S5xx/LP-M5xx
LP-S2xx/LP-M2xx
LP-MAxx
LP-Z130
LP-Z250/LP-Z256
"02.0" to "20.0"
"02.0" to "50.0"
"05.0" to "10.0"
"10.0" to "50.0"
"10.0" to "40.0"
* For the detail of the model type, refer to “Target Laser Marker” (P.4).
Reference
• Note that the setting range is different from the LP-F series due to the difference of speciication for the laser oscillator.
CW Pulse Cycle/Duty (Code: CWL)
[Can be set only in case of LP-F10W mode]
Adjust the laser pulse cycle and duty.
• Setting/Readout data of CW Pulse Cycle/Duty
STX
CWL
CW Pulse Cycle [Duty]
7-byte
Sub Command
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Sub command is "S" at the time of setting and "A" for response data at the time of readout.
• Readout request of CW Pulse Cycle/Duty
STX
CWL
R
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Name
Data Length
[byte]
CW Pulse Cycle
4
Indicates the CW pulse cycle.
“0050” to “1000”
Duty
3
Sets CW duty.
“050” to “100”
Outline
Reference
• Setting does not affect the marking. Also this setting is not saved in the ile.
160
Description
Line Width (Code: WDC)
Sets the width necessary to avoid crossing at marking intersection.
• Setting / Readout data of line width
STX
WDC
Sub
Command
[Line Width] [Marking Pitch]
8-byte
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Sub command is "S" at the time of setting and "A" for response data at the time of readout.
• Readout request of line width
STX
WDC
R
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Name
Data Length
[byte]
Line Width
4
The line width for crossing avoidance at the crossing
point of marking line is indicated.
“0.01” to “2.00” [mm]
Marking Pitch
4
Sets the density at bold characters and bar codes.
“0.00” to “2.00” [mm]
Outline
Description
Reference
• The bar code marking pitch and the bold character marking pitch are set to the speciied values at the time of setting, and
the bold character marking pitch is read out at the time of readout.
• When 0.00 is speciied for marking pitch, create the bold character and set the marking pitch to 1/2 of the line width (when
the character height = character width). (“0.00” cannot be read out.)
• In readout response, the digit of 1μm is rounded down.
Marking Quality Adjustment (Code: WTC)
Sets laser start point, end point, edge and curve adjustments, etc.
• Setting / Readout data of marking quality adjustment
STX
WTC
[Adjustment of Starting Point] [Adjustment of Ending
Point] [Edge Adjustment] [Curve Adjustment]
12-byte
Sub
Command
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Sub command is "S" at the time of setting and "A" for response data at the time of readout.
• Readout request of marking quality adjustment
STX
WTC
R
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Name
Data Length
[byte]
Adjustment of
Laser Start Point
3
The timing of starting laser is adjusted.
“000” to “200”
Adjustment of
Laser End Point
3
The timing of stopping laser is adjusted.
“000” to “200”
Edge Adjustment
3
The wait at edge is adjusted.
“000” to “200”
Curve Adjustment
3
The wait at curved line is adjusted.
“000” to “200”
Outline
Description
Reference
• In adjustment of starting/ending points of edge and curve, the value speciied by [this command minus 100] will be set and
the value speciied by [this command plus 100] will be read out. However, if the value speciied by [this command minus
100] is negative value, 0 is set in the adjustment of edge and curve.
• The Wait/Jump Adjustment, arbitrary point radiation ON/OFF adjustment and pre-scan time cannot be set and read out.
• In the LP-M/LP-S/LP-Z series, it is necessary to adjust the marking quality separately because the start-up and fall
characteristics of the galvanometer and laser are different from those in the LP-F10/LP-F10W.
161
Trigger Condition (Code: TRG)
[Supported models: LP-Mxxx/LP-Sxxx/LP-Zxxx]
Sets the lying object/static object marking, and the condition of lying object.
• Setting / Readout data of trigger condition
STX
TRG
Sub
Command
[Moving Direction] [Encoder] [Trigger Type]
3-byte
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Sub command is "S" at the time of setting and "A" for response data at the time of readout.
• Readout request of trigger condition
STX
TRG
Name
R
(Check Sum)
Data Length
[byte]
Delimiter
Outline
Description
Moving direction:
1
The moving direction of line at marking to lying object
is set.
“0”…still
“1”…left
“2”…right
“3”…front
“4”…back
Encoder
1
The ON/OFF of encoder signal is indicated.
“0”…OFF
“1”…ON
Trigger Type
1
Available only when the “moving speed” is “still”.
Select the laser emission timing between trigger input
timing and equal interval timing.
“0”…trigger marking
“1”…equidistant marking
Reference
• The setting changed by this command is saved without overwriting.
162
Delay (Code: DLY)
Sets the delay time and distance from trigger input to marking startup.
• Setting / Readout data of delay
STX
DLY
Sub
Command
[Delay Time/Distance]
6-byte
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Sub command is "S" at the time of setting and "A" for response data at the time of readout.
• Readout request of delay
STX
DLY
Name
[Delay Distance/
Time]
R
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Data Length
[byte]
Outline
Description
6
When the moving speed is “still”, delay time is shown
and the marking start time after the trigger input is
displayed. When the moving speed is other than “still”,
delay distance is shown and the distance where the
marking starts after the trigger input is displayed.
For LP-SxxxW type, only the delay time can be set.
Delay Time…“000000” to
“005000” [ms]
Delay Distance…“000.00” to
“500.00” [mm]
Marking Interval (Code: INT)
[Supported models: LP-Mxxx/LP-Sxxx/LP-Zxxx]
Sets the marking interval (distance) in “Equidistant Marking” setting for lying object marking.
• Setting / Readout data of marking interval
STX
INT
Sub
Command
[marking interval]
5-byte
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Sub command is "S" at the time of setting and "A" for response data at the time of readout.
• Readout request of marking interval
STX
INT
R
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Name
Data Length
[byte]
Outline
Marking Interval
5
The marking interval is indicated, available only when
the moving direction is other than “still” and trigger
type is “equidistant”.
Description
“000.0” to “999.9” [mm]
Reference
• 1000.0 or more cannot be speciied. (NAK09 is returned.)
• When the setting exceeds 1000.0 and readout is tried, NAK15 is returned.
163
Line Speed (Code: LSP)
[Supported models: LP-Mxxx/LP-Sxxx/LP-Zxxx]
Sets the line speed in lying object marking (scan speed).
• Setting / Readout data of line speed
STX
LSP
Sub
Command
[Line Speed]
6-byte
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Sub command is "S" at the time of setting and "A" for response data at the time of readout.
• Readout request of line speed
STX
LSP
R
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Name
Data Length
[byte]
Outline
Line Speed
6
The speed with which the object to be marked passes
is indicated, available only when the traveling direction
is other than “still” and encoder signal is “OFF”.
Description
“00.060” to “60.000” [m/min]
Reference
• The value more than 60.000 cannot be speciied. (NAK09 is returned.)
• When the setting exceeds 60.000 and readout is tried, NAK15 is returned.
Encoder Signal (Code: ENC)
[Supported models: LP-Mxxx/LP-Sxxx/LP-Zxxx]
Sets the encoder pulse value for use of the encoder in lying object marking.
• Setting / Readout data of encoder signal
STX
ENC
Sub
Command
[Encoder Pulse]
6-byte
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Sub command is "S" at the time of setting and "A" for response data at the time of readout.
• Readout request of encoder signal
STX
ENC
R
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Name
Data Length
[byte]
Outline
Encoder Pulse
6
Available only when the moving direction is other than
“still”. The pulse number of encoder is indicated.
Reference
• The setting changed by this command is saved without overwriting.
164
Description
“005.00” to “600.00” [Pulse/
mm]
Laser Check Radiation (Code: SPT)
Controls “Laser Check Radiation” for laser radiation at the center of the marking area.
• Setting of laser check
STX
SPT
Name
Laser Check
Radiation
[Laser Check Radiation]
1-byte
S
Data Length
[byte]
Outline
Delimiter
Description
“0”…stop:
Spot radiation is stopped and the
internal shutter is closed.
“1”…start:
The internal shutter is opened and
laser radiation is started. The setting
can be accepted when the internal
shutter is closed or when the "command reception mode ON" is set
by Command reception permission
(MKM) command.
“2”…interrupt
Laser check is interrupted. The
internal shutter, however, is not
closed.
The start/stop of laser check
is controlled.
1
(Check Sum)
Reference
• Control of laser check by this command is unavailable when the No.2 DIP switch on the rear side of controller is turned to
OFF.
• The setting can be transmitted to the laser marker only when the shutter is closed or when the “command reception mode
ON” is set by Command reception permission (MKM) command.
• The laser is radiated at the center position.
• The laser power can be changed by setting the laser condition.
Year/Month/Date/Time (Code: YMD)
Sets year, month, date, time for system.
• Setting / Readout data of year/month/date/time
STX
YMD
Sub
Command
[Dominical Year] [Month] [Day] [Hour] [Min.] [Second]
14-byte
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Sub command is "S" at the time of setting and "A" for response data at the time of readout.
• Readout request of year/month/date/time
STX
YMD
R
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Name
Data Length
[byte]
Dominical Year
4
Dominical year is indicated.
“1980” to “2037” [year]
Month
2
Month is indicated.
“01” to “12” [month]
Day
2
Date is indicated.
“01” to “31” [day]
Hour
2
Hour is indicated.
“00” to “23” [hour]
Min.
2
Minute is indicated.
“00” to “59” [minute]
Second
2
Second is indicated.
“00” to “59” [second]
Outline
Description
Reference
• The setting changed by this command is saved without overwriting.
165
Era Year (Code: ERA)
Sets era year.
• Setting / Readout data of era year
STX
ERA
Sub
Command
[Era year]
2-byte
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Sub command is "S" at the time of setting and "A" for response data at the time of readout.
• Readout request of era year
STX
ERA
R
(Check Sum)
Name
Data Length
[byte]
Era Year
2
Delimiter
Outline
Description
The era year is indicated.
“01” to “99” [year]
Reference
• The setting changed by this command is saved without overwriting.
• When Year is set to 100 to 9999 and read out, NAK15 is returned.
I/O Environment (Code: ENV)
Sets the operating environment of the input/output terminal.
• Setting / Readout data of I/O environment
STX
ENV
Sub
Command
[One-shot time] [Detect TRIG. warning during marking]
4-byte
(Check Sum)
Sub command is "S" at the time of setting and "A" for response data at the time of readout.
• Readout request of I/O environment
STX
ENV
R
(Check Sum)
Delimiter
Name
Data Length
[byte]
One-shot time
3
The ON time of the one-shot output is indicated.
“002” to “510” [ms]
Detect TRIG.
Warning during
Marking
1
The output status of warning at detection of
trigger during marking operation is indicated.
“0”…no output
“1”…output
Outline
Reference
• The setting changed by this command is saved without overwriting.
166
Description
Delimiter
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
If any operation errors occur, check items below irst.
When the problems cannot be resolved by the following the below measures, please contact our sales ofice.
Start-up
Troubles
Power supply is not
turned on.
The unit does not start
up.
Causes
Measures
Power cable is not connected.
Connect the power supply cable.
Key switch is not turned on.
Turn on the key switch.
Outlet is not powered.
Check power to outlet.
Fuse is blown.
Replace the fuse by following the “Replacement
of Fuse” in the “Safety / Setup / Maintenance
Guide”.
Laser Pumping
Troubles
Laser is not pumped.
Laser is not pumped in
remote mode.
168
Causes
Measures
Emergency stop switch is pressed.
Reset emergency stop switches located on the
head and controller.
[IN COM.] [OUT COM.] of terminal
block is not connected to the power
supply.
Connect [IN COM.] and [OUT COM.] in Input/
Output Terminal to internal power supply or
supply power from outside.
The interlock connector is not
connected, or the safety equipment
such as door and switch connected
to the interlock connector is in OPEN
status.
• Check the interlock connector connection.
• Restore the original condition of the safety
equipment connected to the interlock
connector.
Laser stop 2 on input terminal is in
OPEN status, or safety equipment
such as door and switch connected to
the laser stop 2 on input terminal is in
OPEN status.
• Check the connection of [LASER STOP2A],
[LASER STOP2B] and [OUT COM] of input
terminal.
• Restore the original condition of the safety
equipment connected to the laser stop 2.
Laser pumping ON signals from the
external control equipment are not
input or not accepted in remote mode.
• Check connections with external equipment
for mis-connection, disconnection or contact
failure due to any loose connector.
• When controlling the laser pumping by I/O
signal, turn off DIP switch No. 2 and turn on
[LASER IN].
• When controlling the laser pumping by serial
communication, turn on DIP switch No. 2 and
transmit the laser pumping command (LSR).
• To change the DIP setting, the switch of the
laser marker should be set at power OFF
state.
Display
Troubles
Touch panel shows
nothing.
Touch panel does not
respond to screen tap.
Monitor shows nothing.
Mouse does not work.
(When the controller
is the PS/2 mouse
supported type )
Mouse does not work.
(When the controller
is the USB mouse
supported type )
Causes
Measures
Laser marker has not be started.
See remedial action against “Laser marker fails to
start up”.
Power cable of console is not
connected.
Check that console cable is securely connected
to connector [CONSOLE] on front of controller.
Return harness is not connected.
Connect return harness ([RETURN OUT] [VGA
OUT] [(VGA+RETURN) IN]) on the rear of the
controller.
Return harness is not connected.
Connect return harness ([RETURN OUT] [VGA
OUT] [(VGA+RETURN) IN]) on the rear of the
controller.
Monitor is not turned on.
Check power to monitor.
Monitor cable is not connected.
Check that monitor cable is securely connected
to connector [VGA OUT] on back of controller.
VGA-compatible monitor is not
connected.
Connect a VGA-compatible monitor.
Mouse relay cable is not connected.
(A mouse is plugged directly into
mouse connector on back of controller.)
Use mouse adaptor cable for the PS/2 type
mouse.
The mouse is connected to the USB
hub.
Connect the USB mouse to the laser marker
controller directly without USB hub.
The mouse type is not supported by
the laser marker.
Use the USB mouse with Human interface
device(HID)class.
169
Marking
Troubles
Causes
Obstacle hinders laser beam.
Remove obstacle between head of laser marker
and object.
In case of LP-S series:
Lens cap has not been removed.
Remove lens cap.
Distance to object is not appropriate.
Adjust distance between bottom surface of laser
maker and target surface of object as speciied.
In case of LP-M series:
The displacement sensor input does
not match the height of the actual
target object.
Marking cannot be done.
(Even though the laser
radiation indicator
changes to the marking
status, nothing marked
on the object.)
Marking cannot be done.
(The laser radiation
indicator does not
change to the marking
status.)
170
Measures
Conirm the displacement sensor and laser
marker input speciications and adjust the
displacement sensor output (analog current value)
to a suitable value.
Input the displacement sensor trigger when the
displacement sensor measurement value is
steady.
Match the displacement sensor measurement
position to the marking position.
Object is not in place.
Correct position of object. Guide indication
feature may be helpful for this purpose.
The laser marker is set for the marking
on lying objects despite the static
object.
Set “Moving direction” to “STILL.” on the Trigger
Setting screen.
Laser power is insuficient.
Increase laser power (including correction factor).
Scan speed is too high.
Decrease scan speed (including correction
factor).
Laser wavelength is not appropriate for
material of objects.
Materials on which can be marked differ
depending on type of laser marker.
Applicable marking object for FAYb laser marker
(LP-M / LP-S / LP-Z series):
Metal, resin (excluding transparent and
translucent types)
When the marking mode is TEST:
The marking mode is “RUN”.
Select [TEST] of the marking mode.
When the marking mode is RUN:
The run mode is not started or the
marking trigger is not input.
Set the marking mode into [RUN] and press
[Start].
Then, input the marking trigger from [TRIG. IN]
signal on the input terminal.
Troubles
Causes
Measures
Check connections with external equipment for
mis-connection, disconnection or contact failure
due to any loose connector.
When the laser marker is under the
remote mode or run mode:
Marking trigger signal is not input.
Marking cannot be done.
(The laser radiation
indicator does not
change to the marking
status.)
When the marking trigger is input from the input
terminal, check if marking trigger signal meets
write conditions.
<In case of Trigger Marking>
Check if one-shot signal of 10 ms or longer is
provided per marking cycle.
<In case of Equidistant Marking>
Check if status of the signal remains on during
marking.
When the laser marker is under the
remote mode or run mode:
Next marking trigger signal is entered
before completion of current marking
cycle.
(E800 occurs.)
Enter next marking trigger signal after making
sure that READY output is on.
When the laser marker is under the
remote mode:
Marking trigger is input when the
READY output is OFF status.
Refer to “READY signal is not turned to ON” in
the External Control Troubleshooting.
171
Marking Quality
Troubles
Causes
Laser emission port is not clean.
Fumes occurring during marking hinder
laser beam.
Distance to object is not appropriate.
In case of LP-M series:
The displacement sensor input does
not match the distance to the actual
marking surface.
Measures
Refer to the “Safety / Setup / Maintenance Guide”
“Maintenance” and clean contaminants off the
laser emission port.
If contaminants persist, replace lens and/or laser
emission port protection cover (glass). Contact
our sales ofice.
Install dust collector.
Check that dust collector works well.
Adjust distance between bottom surface of laser
maker and target surface of object.
Conirm the displacement sensor and laser
marker input speciications and adjust the
displacement sensor output (analog current value)
to a suitable value.
Input the displacement sensor trigger when the
displacement sensor measurement value is
steady.
Match the displacement sensor measurement
position to the marking position.
Marking fades entirely/
partially.
172
Target surface of object is inclined.
Make adjustment so that bottom surface of laser
marker head and target surface of object are
parallel with each other.
In case of LP-M / LP-Z series:
Setting of Uniform Spot Mode is not
appropriate.
Set the Uniform Spot mode within the required
range. If the setting of Uniform Spot mode is
changed, adjust the laser power as the density of
marking may change.
There are variations in properties of
objects.
Object thickness
• Distance to object
• Object surface condition (including
roughness, gloss level, etc.)
• Object material (including chemical
composition ratio)
Readjust marking conditions according to
variations found.
Object feeder is not stable.
Adjust object feeder so that position of objects
become stable.
Performance of laser oscillator
deteriorates due to aging.
• Increase laser power setting.
• Decrease scan speed.
If initial marking quality cannot be reached even
if laser power is set to 100 (upper limit), laser
oscillator must be replaced. Contact our sales
ofice.
Troubles
Causes
Measures
Obstacle hinders laser beam.
Remove obstacle between head of laser marker
and object.
Laser emission port is not clean.
Refer to the “Safety / Setup / Maintenance Guide”
“Maintenance” and clean contaminants off the
laser emission port.
If contaminants persist, replace lens and/or
protection glass of laser emission port.
Contact our sales ofice.
Marking is dotted.
For LP-Mxxx / LP-Sxxx / LP-Zxxx:
Setting of laser pulse cycle and scan
speed are inadequate.
Decrease scan speed or marking pulse interval.
Marking line runs over
the intended start or end
points.
The setting in marking quality
adjustment parameter does not match
the other marking conditions.
Input the suitable adjustment value in marking
quality parameters such as start point, end point,
or wait value in laser setting screen.
The Fixing strength of the laser marker
head is insuficient.
• Fix the head part tightly with the speciied
torque value.
• Improve the strength of the stand on that the
head is installed.
Character is partially
chipped.
There are continuous vibrations coming
from surrounding equipment such as
motor and press.
Perform vibration prevention measures.
There are irregular vibrations coming
from surrounding equipment such as
air cylinder and forklift.
Marking disorder
(Characters crushed,
unreadable)
Start and/or stop timing of feeder does
not match with marking operation.
(Marking is disturbed at beginning/end
of marking.)
<Disturbed at the beginning of marking>
Marking trigger signal is likely to be entered
before object is fully stopped. Marking may
disturbed due to remaining vibration even if
object is in full stop. Use delay timer etc. so that
marking trigger signal turns on after vibrations are
completely damped.
<Disturbed at the end of marking>
Object is likely to start moving before completion
of marking.
Delay start timing of feeder or decrease scan
speed so that marking is inished before object
starts moving.
There are noises coming from
surrounding equipment.
Protect laser marker against noises as follows:
• Securely ground frame ground terminal of
laser marker or surrounding equipment.
• Isolate power and signal lines from each
other if they have been routed in parallel.
• Shield signal line.
• Isolate power supply for laser marker from
other equipment.
• Use noise cut transformer to absorb noises
from power supply.
173
Moving objects
Troubles
Causes
Marking cannot be done.
Encoder signal is off.
Marking is sometimes
skipped.
(E800 occurs.)
Marking trigger signal is entered
before current marking is
inished.
Characters unreadable
Marking position is
unstable.
Marking character pitch
is unstable.
•
•
•
•
Increase scan speed setting of laser marker.
Decrease delay distance setting of laser marker.
Reduce feeder speed.
Increase marking interval (interval between objects
on feeder).
Match feed direction with laser marker operation.
Speed changes at conveyor
junction.
If conveyors are coupled, avoid marking near conveyor
junction.
Actual speed and preset speed
for feeding objects are different
due to slippage of objects.
Remove cause of object slippage.
Pulse setting of encoder is not
correct.
Measure the number of encoder pulses and adjust
“Number of encoder pulses”.
Encoder is out of order.
Check encoder for proper function.
Positional misalignment is likely
to occur due to meandering
motion of conveyor.
Secure objects to prevent misalignment.
The line speed at the marking
position is different from the
speed at the installation site of
the encoder.
In case of LP-M series:
The marking target object
movement timing is not
synchronized with the
displacement sensor trigger
output timing.
In case of LP-M series:
Output signal of the
displacement sensor is not
stable.
174
Check for proper connection to encoder.
Feed direction is not correct.
Obstacle hinders laser beam.
Character is partially
chipped.
Measures
Place the encoder as close as possible to the marking
position.
Decrease the encoder resolution to block the effect of
the line speed luctuation.
Note that the minimum value of the encoder pulse should
be 10 P/mm.
Remove obstacle between head of laser marker and
object.
Conirm the displacement sensor detection position and
the displacement sensor trigger timing.
Conirm the displacement sensor speciications and
match the signal output timing to the marking trigger
signal timing.
Conirm the installation status and check if the
displacement sensor is receiving the impact of vibration
or the like.
Conirm the output signal of the displacement sensor to
check if it is being affected by noise.
Troubles
Actual spacing between
characters is larger or
small than setting.
Causes
Measures
Pulse setting of encoder is not
correct.
Check setting to be sure that:
<Using A phase only>
Number encoder pulses = Number of pulses/mm x 2
<Using A and B phases>
Number encoder pulses = Number of pulses/mm x 4
Either A or B phase signal is
refused. (A and B phase used)
Check that signal is applied to A and B phase terminals
of encoder.
Measured number of encoder
pulses differs from calculated
one.
Increase or decrease values in “Encoder ine adjustment”
ield as appropriate.
<When the character interval is wide>
Increase the setting.
<When the character interval is narrow>
Decrease the setting.
175
External control
Troubles
Causes
Laser marker is not in remote mode.
The wiring between the laser marker
and the external control devices is
incorrect.
Press Remote switch on front of controller or enter
remote mode in a manner described in “Safety /
Setup / Maintenance Guide”.
Check connections with external equipment for
mis-connection, disconnection or contact failure
due to any loose connector.
Check for continuity using tester or the like.
Laser marker cannot be
controlled by the external
signal.
There are noises coming from
surrounding equipment.
Protect laser marker against noises as follows:
• Securely ground frame ground terminal of
laser marker or surrounding equipment.
• Isolate power and signal lines from each
other if they have been routed in parallel.
• Shield signal line.
• Isolate power supply for laser marker from
other equipment.
• Use noise cut transformer to absorb noises
from power supply.
Selected communication port is
inappropriate.
For communication with external devices, select
either RS-232C or Ethernet port.
(They cannot be used at the same time, or
switched.)
The port selected in the environment setting
screen indicates the valid communication port.
RS-232C is selected at factory shipment.
Type of connection cable used is in
appropriate.
<RS-232C>
Use commercially available cross cable.
(A straight cable cannot be used.)
Laser marker has three-wire connection. (Only
pins Nos. 2, 3 and 5 of RS-232C connector are
used.)
<Ethernet>
• To use an external device and the laser
marker one to one, connect them with a
commercially available cross cable (STP
cross cable of the Category 5e or higher is
recommended).
• To use an external device and the laser
markers one to many, prepare a hub or
router compliant to 1000BASE-T, 100BASETX, or 10BASE-T and connect them with a
commercially available straight cable (STP
cross cable of the Category 5e or higher is
recommended).
Serial communication
control fails
176
Measures
Troubles
Causes
Communication parameter settings are
incorrect.
Serial communication
control fails
Measures
Match communication parameter settings to
external equipment.
Communication parameter settings of laser
marker can be checked in the environment setting
screen. Default settings are as follows:
<RS-232C>
[Baud Rate=9600bps]
[Data Length=8bit]
[Parity=None]
[StopBits=1bit]
[Delimit=CR]
[Check Sum:None]
<Ethernet>
[IP Address=192.168.1.5]
[Subnet Mask=255.255.255.0]
[Default Gateway=None (blank)]
[Port=9094]
Communication parameter settings
are changed when the backup data is
restored to the laser marker.
Check the communication parameter settings.
If Ethernet is used, conirm the IP address and
other parameters.
When the backup data is restored to the laser
marker, communication parameter settings are
overwritten with the backup data.
Command data is not received from
external equipment.
Using commercially available line monitor or
protocol analyzer, check if external equipment
transmits data.
Communication data format is
incorrect.
Check if format of communication data command
transmitted from external equipment is correct.
• Check if start code STX (02: HEX) is placed
at beginning of transmitted data.
• Check if the delimiter is added to the end of
the transmission data. ([CR] (0D:HEX) or
[CR+LF] (0D:HEX 0A:HEX) for RS-232C, [CR]
(0D:HEX) for Ethernet)
Alarm or error occurs.
Release the alarm or warning referring to the
measures for the corresponding error code.
Laser has not been pumped.
Refer to “The laser is not pumped”.
Internal shutter is closed.
Open the internal shutter.
• When controlling the shutter by I/O sigunal,
turn off DIP switch No. 2 and turn on terminal
SHUTTER in terminal block.
• When controlling the shutter by serial
communication, turn on DIP switch No. 2 and
send shutter command (SHT).
* To change the DIP setting, the switch of the
laser marker should be set at power OFF state.
LP-Mxxx-S type:
Since the returning to the original
position of the laser gate is not
performed correctly, the laser gate
cannot be opened.
Input the laser gate control signals for the
returning to the original position after start-up of
the laser marker.
LP-Mxxx-S type:
The laser gate is closed.
Input the control signal to [L-GATE OP IN] on
the laser gate terminal from the external control
device.
READY signal is not
turned to ON.
177
Troubles
READY signal is not
turned to ON.
The sending command is
not accepted by the laser
marker. (NAK responce)
178
Causes
Measures
The changing operation of the ile data
is uninished.
It takes from tens of msec. to several seconds to
complete the changing ile data.
During that time, READY output is in OFF status.
Enter marking trigger signal after making sure that
[READY] output is on if you want to change ile to
another one.
Marking data is not sent to the laser
marker from the external devices, in
case of using Rank Function, External
Offset Function, or Serial Data Input
Function.
If rank, external offset and serial data functions
are enabled while marking conditions are not
yet speciied, enter respective data per marking
cycle.
Enter marking trigger signal after making sure
that [READY] output is on or checking status of
READY using status request command.
Under serial communication control:
Mark trigger signal is ON while the
command reception permission (MKM
command) is set to “Reception mode
ON”.
Set “reception mode OFF” for command reception
permission (MKM command). Before entering
marking trigger signal, use status request
command [STS] to make sure that READY is on.
DIP switch No. 2 on back of laser
marker is off.
To control the following commands with the serial
communication, turn ON DIP switch No. 2.
• Laser Control (LSR)
• Shutter Control (SHT)
• Laser Check Radiation (SPT)
• Test Marking (TST)
• Guide LD Indication (GID)
• Laser Power Measurement (PWM)
• Power Check (PWR)
“Reception mode ON” is not set for
command reception permission (MKM
command)
The laser marker does not accept commands
except the following unless it is in the “reception
mode ON” status.
For command transmission, set “reception mode
ON” for “command reception permission (MKM
command)”.
• File Change (No. Speciied) (FNO)
• File Change (Comment Speciied) (FNN)
• Shutter Control (SHT)
• Command Reception Permission (MKM)
• Laser Control (LSR)
• Counter Reset (CTR)
• Status Request (STS)
• Marking Trigger (MRK)
• Serial Data Input (SIN)
• Serial Offset (SEO)
Alarm or error occurs.
All commands except the following are refused
while alarm or error is active.
<When alarm occurred>
• Status Request (STS)
<When warning occurred>
• Status Request (STS)
• Shutter control (SHT) (Only for closing
request, and readout)
• Command Reception Permission (MKM)
(Only for reception mode ON and reception
mode readout)
Others
Troubles
Laser is emitted at
unintended timing.
Date is reset.
Causes
Measures
Photoelectric sensor for marking trigger
signal malfunctions.
Fumes may cause malfunction of photoelectric
sensor for marking trigger signal.
• Install dust collector.
• Check that dust collector works well.
Internal battery has run out.
Contact failure may also be a cause of this
symptom. When laser marker have been in use
for ive years or more, internal battery is easy to
run out.
Contact our sales ofice for replacement of
internal battery.
179
Error Indication
There is cases that alarm/warning occurs by operation status of the laser marker or main unit status of the laser marker.
When alarm/warning occurs, an error code corresponding with alarm/warning appear on the “ile No./error code occurrence
area” or the “console” of the front of the controller.
This chapter provide the contents of errors, their causes and measures to be taken against them.
Alarm
When an alarm is produced, the marking operation stops and the laser pumping is turned off.
Release Method of Alarm
1) Remove a cause of alarm. Note that any alarms due to hardware’s problem cannot be released.
2) If the error E002, E004, E011 or E260 occurs, push the alarm reset switch on the front of the controller, or input the
alarm reset signal on the input terminal.
For other errors, reboot the laser marker.
3) If the alarm occurs during the marking operation of the iles in which the counter function is set, check if the counter
value is correct before restart the marking operation.
ERROR
CODE
E002
Error Indications
Emergency stop button
of controller is pushed.
Causes
Measures
Emergency stop button of the
controller Switch is pushed.
Release emergency stop button of controller by
turning it in arrow direction.
Laser Stop 2 of the input
terminal is opened.
Check the wiring of the laser stop 2 input in I/O
terminal and contact of the switch.
[IN COM.] [OUT COM.] of
terminal block is not connected
to the power supply.
Connect [IN COM.] and [OUT COM.] in Input/
Output Terminal to internal power supply or
supply power from outside.
E004
Laser Stop 2 of the
input terminal is
opened.
E011
Laser Stop 1 of the
input terminal is
opened.
Laser Stop 1 of the input
terminal is opened.
Check the wiring of the laser stop 1 input in I/O
terminal and contact of the switch.
E020
*1
Cover of scanning
section is opened.
Cover of scanning section is
opened.
Contact to our sales ofice.
Cover of scanning section is
opened.
Contact to our sales ofice.
The iber unit comes off.
See “Fiber Unit Installation Method” of the “Safety
/ Setup / Maintenance Guide” of LP-S series for
correct installation.
E021
*2
E210
to
E213
Cover of scanning
section or iber unit is
detached.
Galvanometer error.
Head control cable or
head power cable is not
connected correctly.
Abnormality occurred in
galvanometer on head.
180
Check and correct the power status.
Or change the outlet of AC power supply.
Connect head control cable or head power cable
properly, and restart with key switch.
When not recovered, contact our sales ofice.
ERROR
CODE
E220
E233
Error Indications
Causes
Measures
Head control cable is not
connected correctly.
Connect head control cable properly, and restart
with key switch.
Internal shutter is faulty.
Contact to our sales ofice.
The internal temperature of the
laser oscillator exceeds the
upper limit.
The protective function is activated because
the laser oscillator in the controller received
excessive heat load and the internal temperature
exceeds the upper limit. Turn the key switch to
the OFF position and check the followings: Cool
the laser oscillator thoroughly before restarting
the controller.
• Check that the ambient temperature is lower
than the speciied temperature.
• Check the air ilter, the air intake / exhaust
port and the fan of the cooling part for
clogging.
Internal shutter error.
Laser error.
Instantaneous interruption of
laser power supply is detected.
Head control cable is not
connected properly.
• Check and correct the power status. Or
change the outlet of AC power supply.
• Connect head power cable properly, and
restart with key switch.
Insert the head control cable properly and restart
the controller by turning the key switch to the on
position.
Fiber is broken.
The abnormality of the laser
oscillator is conirmed.
Contact to our sales ofice.
There might be occurred the
malfunction of the internal
shutter.
E234
E236
*4
Detected unintendedirradiation.
Laser gate is not open,
or laser error has
occurred.
Detected unintended-irradiation.
The laser gate was closed
during laser scanning.
Contact to our sales ofice.
Check the control signal for opening/closing the
laser gate from the safety PLC or other such
device.
Check the wiring and signal timing of [L-GATE
CL IN] of the laser gate terminal.
Laser is not output normally.
Refer to the measure of E233 “Laser error”.
181
ERROR
CODE
Error Indications
Causes
Measures
Lower ambient temperature.
E240
E241
The temperature of the
laser has reached its
upper limit.
Temperature measured by
laser oscillator arises and
temperature error occurs.
Make sure cooling fan operates.
When not recovered, contact our sales ofice.
Check and correct the power status.
Or change the outlet of AC power supply.
E250
*3
Detected a decrease in
power supply voltage.
Instantaneous interruption of
laser power supply is detected.
Connect head power cable properly, and restart
with key switch.
When not recovered, contact our sales ofice.
• Test marking starts while
interlock connector on
controller is in OPEN status.
• Interlock on controller is in
OPEN status. (Marking in
remote status)
Check wiring of the interlock input on the
controller and contact of the switch.
E260
Interlock connector is
opened.
E280
*1
System error.
Abnormality has occurred on
the laser marker system.
Restart the laser marker. When not recovered,
contact to our sales ofice.
E300
A head is not
connected. Shut off a
power and connect a
head.
Cable between head and
controller has not been
connected correctly.
Connect head control cable properly, and restart
with key switch.
Head control cable is not
connected properly.
Connect head control cable properly, and restart
with key switch.
Wrong head has been
connected to controller.
Check if head with correct model has been
connected.
If it is wrong, replace head or controller with
correct one.
Head control cable is not
connected properly.
Connect head control cable properly, and restart
with key switch.
Wrong head has been
connected to controller.
Check if head with correct model has been
connected.
If it is wrong, replace head or controller with
correct one.
Abnormality has occurred on
the laser marker system.
Restart the laser marker. When not recovered,
contact to our sales ofice.
E310
E311
E312
182
Unsupported head.
Change either head or
controller.
System error.
System error.
Conirm operation logic of connection device.
Connect the interlock connector with the nonvoltage contact.
ERROR
CODE
E320
Error Indications
Causes
Measures
Cable between head and
controller has not been
connected correctly.
Connect head control cable properly, and restart
with key switch.
Wrong head has been
connected to controller.
Check if head with correct model has been
connected.
If it is wrong, replace head or controller with
correct one.
Unit combination is
incorrect.
E410
to
E443
E990
to
E999
System error.
Abnormality has occurred on
the laser marker system.
Restart the laser marker.
When not recovered,contact to our sales ofice.
E450
to
E456
Memory error.
Abnormality has occurred on
counter memory.
Restart the laser marker.
When not recovered,contact to our sales ofice.
*1:
*2:
*3:
*4:
Error that may occur for LP-M / LP-Z series only.
Error that may occur for LP-S series only.
Error that may occur for LP-M / LP-S series only.
Error that may occur for LP-Mxxx-S type only.
Reference
• When other error not listed in this section was occurred, restart the laser marker.
• If the symptom persists after restart, contact our sales ofice.
183
Warning
Warning is occurred when there is a trouble in the setting of marking priority. During Warning making operation cannot be
started. (However, laser pumping is kept.)
Release Method of Warning
1) Remove a cause of warning. If the warning cause is the wrong setting, correct the ile data.
2) When the laser marker is under the remote mode, close the shutter by I/O or serial communication control.
In case of the following warning, the shutter control is unnecessary.
• E800: the warning occurs only while the speciied one-shot time and it is released automatically.
• E811: the warning occurs only during the laser stop1 and OUTCOM. is opened, and then it is released automatically
when the laser stop1 and OUTCOM. is closed.
3) If the warning occurs during the marking operation of the iles in which the counter function is set, check if the counter
value is correct before restart the marking operation.
4) In case that marking is executed again, make sure that the warning output is turned on, and then open the internal
shutter.
ERROR
CODE
Error Indications
Causes
Measures
Since the returning to the
original position of the laser gate
is not performed correctly, the
laser gate cannot be opened.
Input the laser gate control signals for the
returning to the original position after start-up of
the laser marker.
The laser gate is not opened
when the test marking, laser
check radiation, or laser power
measurement is started.
Before starting the test marking, laser check
radiation, or laser power measurement , input
the control signal to [L-GATE OP IN] on the laser
gate terminal from the external control device.
E227
*4
Laser gate is not open.
E251
Detected a decrease in
clock battery voltage.
Reset date and time.
The internal clock battery
voltage (for backup) has
decreased.
Contact to our sales ofice.
While laser Marker power is on, reset “Date and
Time” in Environment Setting. When the power
is off, reset “Date and Time”.
E500
There is not enough
free space.
The ile cannot be
registered.
Internal memory has become
full and registration has become
impossible.
Delete registered ile and logo ile.
E501
Cannot register setting
because of memory
error.
Abnormality occurred in internal
memory.
E502
E503
Invalid ile format.
Data error occurred in font ile
and logo ile.
E600
No setting ile.
No marking data has been set
in iles.
E601
No font ile.
Font ile has not been speciied/
registered.
E602
Lack of font memory.
Font ile has been too large.
Restart with key switch.
When not recovered, contact our sales ofice.
Re-save the data in another USB media.
Contact our sales ofice.
Set the marking data such as character, barcode
and logo.
Register font ile.
184
Set a registered font to the font in character
condition.
Make font ile smaller, or delete unnecessary
font ile.
ERROR
CODE
Error Indications
Causes
Measures
E603
No logo ile.
Logo ile has not been
registered.
Register logo ile.
E604
Included character not
registered into font ile.
No font corresponding to set
characters were found.
Change characters.
E605
Exceed valid number
of characters.
(Max. 30 characters/
line.)
Set numbers of characters
exceeds limited number of
characters that can be set on
one line.
Make numbers of characters smaller.
Contain marking data within marking area.
• Change marking position.
• Make characters smaller.
• Narrow character interval.
E606
Existed marking data
outside of marking
area.
Setting of marking data exceeds
limited range for marking area.
E607
Existed invalid
character for bolding
with setting font.
Bold character could not
be created because invalid
character for bolding exists with
setting.
E608
Incorrect bold line
width setting or
character height/width
ratio.
Incorrect combination of the
character size and bold line
width setting.
• Set line width of bold character to half or
below of character height.
• When marking the bold character, set the
comparison ratio between character height
and width become 1/10 to 10.
Marking data is too large.
• Reduce numbers of characters and logo
data.
• Reduce numbers of step & repeat.
• Reduce numbers of a start point and a end
point of characters or logo data.
E610
E612
Lack of marking
memory.
The line length is too long.
(spiral, etc.)
*If there is no data out of the marking area in
the image display, check the “system offset”
in the environment setting.
“System offset” value is not shown in the
image display.
Set any standard font without original 4 font.
Use Font Maker provided to create the proper
pattern font.
Separate the long segment into short data.
185
ERROR
CODE
E620
to
E622
Error Indications
Cannot follow line
speed.
Causes
Can not follow line speed of
lying object marking.
Measures
Shorten marking time with the following
methods.
• Speed up scan speed.
• Narrow character interval.
• Make characters smaller.
• Reduce numbers of characters.
• Change setting of curve/edge.
• Reduce numbers of character lines.
• Displace a start point of marking, etc.
Adjust the line speed of the lying object.
Adjust the waiting time of the lying object.
Set the coordinate of the marking data close to
the center of the marking ield.
E623
Too narrow
marking interval for
proportioned lying
object.
Setting of marking interval is too
narrow.
Increase setting value of marking spacing.
Shorten marking time with the following
methods.
• Speed up scan speed.
• Narrow character interval.
• Make characters smaller.
• Reduce numbers of characters.
• Change setting of curve/edge.
• Reduce numbers of character lines.
• Narrow character spacing, etc.
E630
Too much quantity
of Step and Repeat
marking.
Numbers of Step & Repeat
marking exceeded limited
numbers.
Reduce numbers of characters to be marked.
(Max.: 4000)
Invalid function for
combining with lying
object.
Step & Repeat, Rank Offset,
Serial data marking, Reset at
date update function, arbitrary
point radiation, or overwrite
function is set and lying object
marking starts.
E650
Invalid setting of
processing element.
The distance between startingending points of the arc is larger
than double of radius.
Set the distance between start and end points of
the arc smaller than double of radius.
E651
Too short line segment
of processing element.
The line length is smaller than
width of the line segment.
Set the larger value to the length of the line than
width of the line.
E660
Cannot convert dxf ile.
Element which can not be
converted for DXF ile is
included.
Re-create the DXF ile.
E670
*1
Existed marking data
outside of marking
area.
E640
186
Existed 3D marking data outside
of marking area.
Release Step & Repeat, Rank Offset, Serial data
marking, Reset at date update function, arbitrary
point radiation, or overwrite function.
Release lying object marking function with
trigger setting.
Adjust the setting of 3D work with overall (layer)
condition.
Adjust the setting of character, logo, and bar
code, etc. for 3D work.
ERROR
CODE
Error Indications
Causes
Setting of 3D marking data
exceeds limited range for
marking area.
E672
*1
Existed invalid 3D
marking data.
E674
*1
Existed marking data
with its Z position
outside of marking
area.
Existed marking data with its
Z position outside of marking
area.
E675
*1
Invalid setting of layer
condition.
Setting of 3D igure is not
proper.
E676
*1
Invalid function for
combining with 3D
marking.
Step & Repeat, External
offset, Processing condition, or
arbitrary point radiation is set
and 3D marking starts.
E677
*1
Invalid encoder setting
of lying object for
combining with 3D
marking.
Marking to Flying Object (only
when the encoder is not used)
cannot be used in combination
with 3D setting.
E680
*1
The marking time
cannot be measured
with Marking to
Flying Object set in
combination with 3D
marking.
The marking time could not be
measured with Marking to Flying
Object set in combination with
3D marking.
When not using the
displacement sensor:
The displacement sensor input
connector is not connected to
the controller.
E681
*5
Displacement sensor
error signal was
detected.
The displacement sensor trigger
was input while the error signal
was input from the displacement
sensor.
Measures
Adjust the setting of 3D work with overall (layer)
condition.
Adjust the setting of character, logo, and bar
code, etc. for 3D work.
Adjust the setting of Z offset value with following
overall (general) condition.
Adjust the setting of Z offset value with following
system offset.
Adjust the setting of 3D work with overall (layer)
condition.
Release Step & Repeat, External offset,
Processing condition, or arbitrary point radiation.
Release check of 3D check box with overall
(general) condition.
Release check of 3D check box with overall
(general) condition. Or, set the encoder signal
with the trigger condition.
Set the moving direction to “still” in the trigger
setting.
Select 2D setting with overall (general) condition.
Connect the attached displacement sensor input
connector to the back of the controller.
The connector must be connected even when
the displacement sensor is not being used.
Conirm the displacement sensor and
measurement status and eliminate the cause of
the error.
Conirm the displacement sensor speciications
and adjust to output the correct error signal.
Signal is not input from the
displacement sensor.
Check the displacement sensor power supply.
The signal to the displacement
sensor error signal terminal
cannot be detected.
Check the displacement sensor error signal
terminal
wiring.
If the displacement sensor is not used, short
circuit the displacement sensor input connectors
1 and 2.
187
ERROR
CODE
Causes
Measures
Cannot inish
measurement during
speciied time.
Since the marking data is too
large, the measurement cannot
be inished within the limited
time at simulation.
Reduce marking contents and measure marking
time.
E700
Started marking in
laser pumping OFF
state.
Marking starts without setting
laser pumping on.
Turn on laser pumping switch, and start marking
in lighting status.
E701
Started laser power
check in laser pumping
OFF state.
Power check is started with
laser pumping OFF.
Turn on laser pumping switch, and start power
check.
E710
*3
Marking energy error.
Marking energy error.
Check the thresholds (upper and lower limit) of
the marking energy.
E690
E800
Error Indications
--------------------------(no message)
Trigger input occurred while
marking ready output is set to
off.
Laser stop1 on terminal block is
in OPEN.
E811
Laser Stop 1 of the
input terminal is
opened.
Speed up scan speed.
Change marking timing so that trigger input is
performed after marking ready output is turned
on.
Check wiring and control procedure for input
terminal, wiring to communication port, and the
procedure of the communication command.
Check the wiring of the laser stop 1 input
terminal and contact of the switch.
Conirm operation logic of connection device.
Laser stop 1 on terminal block
is in OPEN status.
(In remote/operating marking)
Check the wiring of the laser stop 1 input
terminal and contact of the switch.
Conirm operation logic of connection device.
E900
Existed invalid
function character for
simultaneous use.
The data includes function
characters that cannot be used
simultaneously.
Set either rank function character or serial data
function character.
E901
Existed invalid
character for
converting into 2D
code.
The data includes a character
that cannot be converted into
2D code.
Set the character that can be converted into 2D
code.
E902
Cannot create 2D
code.
The system fails to create a 2D
code.
Use the condition where 2D code can be
created.
E903
No speciied 2D code
pattern.
The pattern which has not
registered as 2D code font is
speciied.
Specify 2D pattern code which has been already
registered.
E910
Existed invalid
character for
converting into bar
code.
The data includes a character
that cannot be bar coded.
Set the character that can be bar coded.
188
ERROR
CODE
Error Indications
Causes
Measures
E911
Cannot create bar
code.
The system fails to create a bar
code.
Use the condition where a barcode can be
created.
E912
Too small dimension of
narrow element/basic
module width for bar
code.
The setting value for width of the
narrow element/basic module is
too small.
Specify the setting value for the width of the
narrow element/basic module larger than that of
the line width of the laser.
E913
No quiet zone in bar
code.
Although inversion mode has
been set, the quiet zone has not
been deined.
Set the proper value for “Quiet/Narrow Ratio”.
E914
Too small separate
pattern or composite
row height.
The setting value of comparison
ratio between “one bar code
height” and “separator pattern
height ratio” is not proper.
E915
Cannot create bar
code.
Cannot create bar code due to
the invalid number of characters
for EAN/ UPC code or RSS
(GS1 DataBar) code.
Adjust the height of one step bar code.
Specify the proper value for “Separation Ptrn
H/W” so that the “Separation Pattern Height”
becomes “0” or “Marking Width” is larger than
“Separation Pattern Width”.
Enter the prescribed number of characters
according to the code type.
Release bar code condition setting.
E916
*1
*1:
*2:
*3:
*4:
*5:
Cannot mark bar code.
Marking bar code on 3D work
(sphere, vertical cone) starts.
Set the work shape other than sphere and
vertical cone.
Error that may occur for LP-M / LP-Z series only.
Error that may occur for LP-S series only.
Error that may occur for LP-M / LP-S series only.
Error that may occur for LP-Mxxx-S type only.
Error that may occur for LP-M series only.
Reference
• When other error not listed in this section was occurred, restart the laser marker.
• If the symptom persists after restart, contact our sales ofice.
189
MEMO
190
Character Code Table
ASCII Code
Use the ASCII Code shown below for the communication data.
The characters described with [ ] denote control character.
Top
00
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
0
[NUL]
[DLE]
(SP)
0
@
P
‘
p
1
[SOH]
[DC1]
!
1
A
Q
a
q
2
[STX]
[DC2]
"
2
B
R
b
r
3
[ETX]
[DC3]
#
3
C
S
c
s
Bottom
4
[EOT]
[DC4]
$
4
D
T
d
t
5
[ENQ]
[NAK]
%
5
E
U
e
u
6
[ACK]
[SYN]
&
6
F
V
f
v
7
[BEL]
[ETB]
'
7
G
W
g
w
8
[BS]
[CAN]
(
8
H
X
h
x
9
[HT]
[EM]
)
9
I
Y
i
y
A
[LF]
[SUB]
*
:
J
Z
j
z
B
[VT]
[ESC]
+
;
K
[
k
{
C
[FF]
[FS]
,
<
L
￥
l
|
D
[CR]
[GS]
-
=
M
]
m
}
E
[SO]
[RS]
.
>
N
^
n
‾
F
[SI]
[US]
/
?
O
_
o
[DEL]
Reference
• This ASCII Code differs from the ANSI Standard ASCII Code in the symbols denoted by the following codes.
• 5C (HEX)
• 60 (HEX)
• 7E (HEX)
• When using the external device set by 2byte, NUL00 (HEX) can be used.Please add NUL00 (HEX) before STX or after
delimiter
• To input the control code for CODE 128, Data Matrix, QR code at binary mode, GS1 DataBar Expanded (only FNC1),
and 2D side of Composite code (only FNC1), use the following alternate codes to input the code data with BRS
command and SIN command.
Control Code
Alternate code
192
00 (HEX)
F050 (HEX)
to
to
1F (HEX)
F06F (HEX)
7F (HEX)
F071 (HEX)
FNC1
F072(HEX)
Original Font
Symbols
Alphanumeric
Shift JIS
JIS
813F
2120
0
814F
2130
＾
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
、
。
，
．
・
：
；
？
！
゛
゜
´
｀
¨
￣
＿
ヽ
ヾ
ゝ
ゞ
〃
仝
々
〆
〇
ー
―
‐
／
815F
2140
＼
to
∥
｜
…
‥
‘
’
“
”
（
）
〔
〕
［
］
816F
2150
｛
｝
〈
〉
《
》
「
」
『
』
【
】
＋
－
±
×
8180
2160
÷
＝
≠
＜
＞
≦
≧
∞
∴
♂
♀
°
′
″
℃
￥
＄
￠
￡
％
＃
＆
＊
＠
§
☆
★
○
●
◎
◇
◆
□
■
△
▲
▽
▼
※
〒
→
←
↑
↓
〓
∈
∋
⊆
⊇
⊂
⊃
∧
∨
￢
⇒
⇔
∀
∠
⊥
⌒
∂
Ｋ
Ｌ
Ｍ
Ｎ
Ｏ
ｋ
ｌ
ｍ
ｎ
ｏ
8190
2170
819E
2220
81AE
2230
81BE
2240
∪
81CE
2250
∃
81DE
2260
∇
≡
０
１
81FE
2270
824F
2330
825F
2340
826F
2350
8280
2360
8290
2370
Ｐ
ｐ
∩
≫
√
‰
♯
♭
♪
†
‡
¶
３
４
５
６
７
８
９
Ｂ
Ｃ
Ｄ
Ｅ
Ｆ
Ｇ
Ｈ
Ｉ
Ｊ
Ｑ
Ｒ
Ｓ
Ｔ
Ｕ
Ｖ
Ｗ
Ｘ
Ｙ
Ｚ
ａ
ｂ
ｃ
ｄ
ｅ
ｆ
ｇ
ｈ
ｉ
ｊ
ｑ
ｒ
ｓ
ｔ
ｕ
ｖ
ｗ
ｘ
ｙ
ｚ
≒
≪
Å
２
Ａ
∽
∝
∵
∫
∬
* JIS code “2121” is a blank character (space), and any characters are not registered into the blank.
*The following character is registered in white.
Shift JIS
JIS
JIS
8179
215A
【
817A
215B
】
819A
217A
★
819C
217C
●
819F
2221
◆
81A1
2223
■
81A3
2225
▲
81A5
2227
▼
81AC
222E
〓
193
JIS Level-1 Font
Hiragana
Katakana
Greek
Character
Russian
Character
あ
い
う
え
お
Shift JIS
829E
JIS
2420
82AE
82BE
194
1
ぁ
2
あ
3
ぃ
4
い
5
ぅ
6
う
7
ぇ
8
え
9
ぉ
A
お
B
か
C
が
D
き
E
ぎ
F
く
2430
ぐ
け
げ
こ
ご
さ
ざ
し
じ
す
ず
せ
ぜ
そ
ぞ
た
2440
だ
ち
ぢ
っ
つ
づ
て
で
と
ど
な
に
ぬ
ね
の
は
82CE
2450
ば
ぱ
ひ
び
ぴ
ふ
ぶ
ぷ
へ
べ
ぺ
ほ
ぼ
ぽ
ま
み
82DE
2460
む
め
も
ゃ
や
ゅ
ゆ
ょ
よ
ら
り
る
れ
ろ
ゎ
わ
82EE
2470
ゐ
ゑ
を
ん
833F
2520
ァ
ア
ィ
イ
ゥ
ウ
ェ
エ
ォ
オ
カ
ガ
キ
ギ
ク
834F
2530
グ
ケ
ゲ
コ
ゴ
サ
ザ
シ
ジ
ス
ズ
セ
ゼ
ソ
ゾ
タ
835F
2540
ダ
チ
ヂ
ッ
ツ
ヅ
テ
デ
ト
ド
ナ
ニ
ヌ
ネ
ノ
ハ
836F
2550
バ
パ
ヒ
ビ
ピ
フ
ブ
プ
ヘ
ベ
ペ
ホ
ボ
ポ
マ
ミ
8380
2560
ム
メ
モ
ャ
ヤ
ュ
ユ
ョ
ヨ
ラ
リ
ル
レ
ロ
ヮ
ワ
8390
2570
ヰ
ヱ
ヲ
ン
ヴ
ヵ
ヶ
Α
Β
Γ
Δ
Ε
Ζ
Η
Θ
Ι
Κ
Λ
Μ
Ν
Ξ
Ο
Ρ
Σ
Τ
Υ
Φ
Χ
Ψ
Ω
α
β
γ
δ
ε
ζ
η
θ
ι
κ
λ
μ
ν
ξ
ο
839E
2620
83AE
2630
83BE
2640
83CE
2650
843F
2720
844F
2730
Π
π
ρ
σ
τ
υ
φ
χ
ψ
ω
А
Б
В
Г
Д
Е
Ё
Ж
З
И
Й
К
Л
М
Н
О
П
Р
С
Т
У
Ф
Х
Ц
Ч
Ш
Щ
Ъ
Ы
Ь
Э
Ю
Я
а
б
в
г
д
е
ё
ж
з
и
й
к
л
м
н
п
р
с
т
у
ф
х
ц
ч
ш
щ
ъ
ы
ь
э
亜
唖
娃
阿
哀
愛
挨
姶
逢
葵
茜
穐
悪
握
渥
旭
葦
芦
鯵
梓
圧
斡
扱
宛
姐
虻
飴
絢
綾
鮎
或
粟
袷
安
庵
按
暗
案
闇
鞍
杏
以
伊
位
依
偉
囲
845F
2740
846F
2750
8480
2760
о
ю
8490
2770
889E
3020
88AE
3030
88BE
3040
я
88CE
3050
夷
委
威
尉
惟
意
慰
易
椅
為
畏
異
移
維
緯
胃
88DE
3060
萎
衣
謂
違
遺
医
井
亥
域
育
郁
磯
一
壱
溢
逸
88EE
3070
稲
茨
芋
鰯
允
印
咽
員
因
姻
引
飲
淫
胤
蔭
893F
3120
院
陰
隠
韻
吋
臼
渦
嘘
唄
欝
893F
3120
894F
3130
895F
3140
荏
餌
叡
営
嬰
影
映
曳
栄
永
泳
洩
瑛
盈
穎
896F
3150
頴
英
衛
詠
鋭
液
疫
益
駅
悦
謁
越
閲
榎
厭
円
8980
3160
園
堰
奄
宴
延
怨
掩
援
沿
演
炎
焔
煙
燕
猿
縁
8990
3170
艶
苑
薗
遠
鉛
鴛
塩
於
汚
甥
凹
央
奥
往
応
岡
沖
荻
億
下
化
仮
何
899E
3220
89AE
3230
89BE
か
0
碓
右
宇
烏
羽
迂
雨
卯
鵜
窺
丑
蔚
鰻
姥
厩
浦
瓜
閏
噂
云
運
雲
屋
押
旺
横
欧
殴
王
翁
襖
鴬
鴎
黄
憶
臆
桶
牡
乙
俺
卸
恩
温
穏
音
3240
伽
価
佳
加
可
嘉
夏
嫁
家
寡
科
暇
果
架
歌
河
89CE
3250
火
珂
禍
禾
稼
箇
花
苛
茄
荷
華
菓
蝦
課
嘩
貨
89DE
3260
迦
過
霞
蚊
俄
峨
我
牙
画
臥
芽
蛾
賀
雅
餓
駕
89EE
3270
介
会
解
回
塊
壊
廻
快
怪
悔
恢
懐
戒
拐
改
8A3F
3320
魁
晦
械
海
灰
界
皆
絵
芥
蟹
開
階
貝
凱
劾
8A4F
3330
外
咳
害
崖
慨
概
涯
碍
蓋
街
該
鎧
骸
浬
馨
蛙
8A5F
3340
垣
柿
蛎
鈎
劃
嚇
各
廓
拡
撹
格
核
殻
獲
確
穫
か
Shift JIS
8A6F
JIS
3350
0
覚
1
角
2
赫
3
較
4
郭
5
閣
6
隔
7
革
8
学
9
岳
A
楽
B
額
C
顎
D
掛
E
笠
F
樫
8A80
3360
橿
梶
鰍
潟
割
喝
恰
括
活
渇
滑
葛
褐
轄
且
鰹
8A90
3370
叶
椛
樺
鞄
株
兜
竃
蒲
釜
鎌
噛
鴨
栢
茅
萱
8A9E
3420
粥
刈
苅
瓦
乾
侃
冠
寒
刊
勘
勧
巻
喚
堪
姦
8AAE
3430
完
官
寛
干
幹
患
感
慣
憾
換
敢
柑
桓
棺
款
歓
8ABE
3440
汗
漢
澗
潅
環
甘
監
看
竿
管
簡
緩
缶
翰
肝
艦
8ACE
3450
莞
観
諌
貫
還
鑑
間
閑
関
陥
韓
館
舘
丸
含
岸
巌
玩
癌
眼
岩
翫
贋
雁
頑
顔
願
企
伎
危
喜
器
8ADE
き
く
け
8AEE
3470
8B3F
3520
8B4F
3530
奇
嬉
寄
岐
希
幾
忌
揮
机
旗
既
期
棋
棄
機
帰
毅
気
汽
畿
祈
季
稀
紀
徽
規
記
貴
起
軌
輝
飢
騎
鬼
亀
偽
儀
妓
宜
戯
技
擬
欺
犠
疑
8B5F
3540
祇
義
蟻
誼
議
掬
菊
鞠
吉
吃
喫
桔
橘
詰
砧
杵
3550
黍
却
客
脚
虐
逆
丘
久
仇
休
及
吸
宮
弓
急
救
8B80
3560
朽
求
汲
泣
灸
球
究
窮
笈
級
糾
給
旧
牛
去
居
巨
拒
拠
挙
渠
虚
許
距
鋸
漁
禦
魚
亨
享
京
供
侠
僑
兇
競
共
凶
協
匡
卿
叫
喬
境
峡
強
8B90
3570
8B9E
3620
8BAE
3630
彊
怯
恐
恭
挟
教
橋
況
狂
狭
矯
胸
脅
興
蕎
郷
8BBE
3640
鏡
響
饗
驚
仰
凝
尭
暁
業
局
曲
極
玉
桐
粁
僅
8BCE
3650
勤
均
巾
錦
斤
欣
欽
琴
禁
禽
筋
緊
芹
菌
衿
襟
8BDE
3660
謹
近
金
吟
銀
九
倶
句
区
狗
玖
矩
苦
躯
駆
駈
8BEE
3670
8C3F
3720
8C4F
3730
8C5F
具
愚
虞
喰
空
偶
寓
遇
隅
串
櫛
釧
屑
屈
掘
窟
沓
靴
轡
窪
熊
隈
粂
栗
繰
桑
鍬
勲
薫
訓
群
軍
郡
卦
袈
祁
係
傾
刑
兄
啓
圭
珪
型
3740
契
形
径
恵
慶
慧
憩
掲
携
敬
景
桂
渓
畦
稽
系
8C6F
3750
経
継
繋
罫
茎
荊
蛍
計
詣
警
軽
頚
鶏
芸
迎
鯨
駒
件
君
8C80
3760
劇
戟
撃
激
隙
桁
傑
欠
決
潔
穴
結
血
訣
月
8C90
3770
倹
倦
健
兼
券
剣
喧
圏
堅
嫌
建
憲
懸
拳
捲
8C9E
3820
検
権
牽
犬
献
研
硯
絹
県
肩
見
謙
賢
軒
遣
8CAE
3830
鍵
険
顕
験
鹸
元
原
厳
幻
弦
減
源
玄
現
絃
舷
言
諺
限
乎
個
古
呼
固
姑
孤
己
庫
弧
戸
故
枯
3840
8CCE
3850
湖
狐
糊
袴
股
胡
菰
虎
誇
跨
鈷
雇
顧
鼓
五
互
8CDE
3860
伍
午
呉
吾
娯
後
御
悟
梧
檎
瑚
碁
語
誤
護
醐
8CEE
3870
乞
鯉
交
佼
侯
候
倖
光
公
功
効
勾
厚
口
向
8D3F
3920
后
喉
坑
垢
好
孔
孝
宏
工
巧
巷
幸
広
庚
康
8D4F
3930
弘
恒
慌
抗
拘
控
攻
昂
晃
更
杭
校
梗
構
江
洪
8D5E
3940
浩
港
溝
甲
皇
硬
稿
糠
紅
紘
絞
綱
耕
考
肯
肱
8D6F
3950
腔
膏
航
荒
行
衡
講
貢
購
郊
酵
鉱
砿
鋼
閤
降
8D80
3960
項
香
高
鴻
剛
劫
号
合
壕
拷
濠
豪
轟
麹
克
刻
8D90
3970
告
国
穀
酷
鵠
黒
獄
漉
腰
甑
忽
惚
骨
狛
込
8D9E
3A20
此
頃
今
困
坤
墾
婚
恨
懇
昏
昆
根
梱
混
痕
紺
艮
魂
些
佐
叉
唆
嵯
左
差
査
沙
瑳
砂
詐
鎖
8DAE
さ
基
8B6F
8CBE
こ
3460
3A30
8DBE
3A40
裟
坐
座
挫
債
催
再
最
哉
塞
妻
宰
彩
才
採
栽
8DCE
3A50
歳
済
災
采
犀
砕
砦
祭
斎
細
菜
裁
載
際
剤
在
8DDE
3A60
材
罪
財
冴
坂
阪
堺
榊
肴
咲
崎
埼
碕
鷺
作
削
8DEE
3A70
咋
搾
昨
朔
柵
窄
策
索
錯
桜
鮭
笹
匙
冊
刷
195
さ
し
す
Shift JIS
8E3F
JIS
3B20
8E4F
3B30
8E5F
3B40
8E6F
8E80
196
3
撮
4
擦
5
札
6
殺
7
薩
8
雑
9
皐
A
鯖
B
捌
C
錆
D
鮫
E
皿
F
晒
三
傘
参
山
惨
撒
散
桟
燦
珊
産
算
纂
蚕
讃
賛
酸
餐
斬
暫
残
仕
仔
伺
使
刺
司
史
嗣
四
士
始
3B50
姉
姿
子
屍
市
師
志
思
指
支
孜
斯
施
旨
枝
止
3B60
死
氏
獅
祉
私
糸
紙
紫
肢
脂
至
視
詞
詩
試
誌
諮
資
賜
雌
飼
歯
事
似
侍
児
字
寺
慈
持
時
次
滋
治
爾
璽
痔
磁
示
而
耳
自
蒔
辞
汐
鹿
3B70
3C20
8EAE
3C30
式
識
鴫
竺
軸
宍
雫
七
叱
執
失
嫉
室
悉
湿
漆
8EBE
3C40
疾
質
実
蔀
篠
偲
柴
芝
屡
蕊
縞
舎
写
射
捨
赦
8ECE
3C50
斜
煮
社
紗
者
謝
車
遮
蛇
邪
借
勺
尺
杓
灼
爵
8EDE
3C60
酌
釈
錫
若
寂
弱
惹
主
取
守
手
朱
殊
狩
珠
種
8EEE
3C70
腫
趣
酒
首
儒
受
呪
寿
授
樹
綬
需
囚
収
周
8F3F
3D20
宗
就
州
修
愁
拾
洲
秀
秋
終
繍
習
臭
舟
蒐
8F4F
3D30
衆
襲
讐
蹴
輯
週
酋
酬
集
醜
什
住
充
十
従
戎
8F5F
3D40
柔
汁
渋
獣
縦
重
銃
叔
夙
宿
淑
祝
縮
粛
塾
熟
8F6F
3D50
出
術
述
俊
峻
春
瞬
竣
舜
駿
准
循
旬
楯
殉
淳
8F80
3D60
準
潤
盾
純
巡
遵
醇
順
処
初
所
暑
曙
渚
庶
緒
署
書
薯
藷
諸
助
叙
女
序
徐
恕
鋤
除
傷
償
勝
匠
升
召
哨
商
唱
嘗
奨
妾
娼
宵
将
小
少
8F90
3D70
8F9E
3E20
8FAE
3E30
尚
庄
床
廠
彰
承
抄
招
掌
捷
昇
昌
昭
晶
松
梢
8FBE
3E40
樟
樵
沼
消
渉
湘
焼
焦
照
症
省
硝
礁
祥
称
章
8FCE
3E50
笑
粧
紹
肖
菖
蒋
蕉
衝
裳
訟
証
詔
詳
象
賞
醤
8FDE
3E60
鉦
鍾
鐘
障
鞘
上
丈
丞
乗
冗
剰
城
場
壌
嬢
常
8FEE
3E70
情
擾
条
杖
浄
状
畳
穣
蒸
譲
醸
錠
嘱
埴
飾
903F
3F20
拭
植
殖
燭
織
職
色
触
食
蝕
辱
尻
伸
信
侵
904F
3F30
唇
娠
寝
審
心
慎
振
新
晋
森
榛
浸
深
申
疹
真
905F
3F40
神
秦
紳
臣
芯
薪
親
診
身
辛
進
針
震
人
仁
刃
906F
3F50
塵
壬
尋
甚
尽
腎
訊
迅
陣
靭
笥
諏
須
酢
図
厨
随
9080
3F60
逗
吹
垂
帥
推
水
炊
睡
粋
翠
衰
遂
酔
錐
錘
9090
3F70
瑞
髄
崇
嵩
数
枢
趨
雛
据
杉
椙
菅
頗
雀
裾
澄
摺
寸
世
瀬
畝
是
凄
制
勢
姓
征
性
成
政
4020
90AE
4030
整
星
晴
棲
栖
正
清
牲
生
盛
精
聖
声
製
西
誠
90BE
4040
誓
請
逝
醒
青
静
斉
税
脆
隻
席
惜
戚
斥
昔
析
90CE
4050
石
積
籍
績
脊
責
赤
跡
蹟
碩
切
拙
接
摂
折
設
90DE
4060
窃
節
説
雪
絶
舌
蝉
仙
先
千
占
宣
専
尖
川
戦
90EE
4070
扇
撰
栓
栴
泉
浅
洗
染
潜
煎
煽
旋
穿
箭
線
913F
4120
繊
羨
腺
舛
船
薦
詮
賎
践
選
遷
銭
銑
閃
鮮
914F
4130
善
漸
然
全
禅
繕
膳
糎
噌
塑
岨
措
曾
曽
楚
前
4140
狙
疏
疎
礎
祖
租
粗
素
組
蘇
訴
阻
遡
鼠
僧
創
916F
4150
双
叢
倉
喪
壮
奏
爽
宋
層
匝
惣
想
捜
掃
挿
掻
9180
4160
操
早
曹
巣
槍
槽
漕
燥
争
痩
相
窓
糟
総
綜
聡
9190
4170
草
荘
葬
蒼
藻
装
走
送
遭
鎗
霜
騒
像
増
憎
919E
4220
臓
蔵
贈
造
促
側
則
即
息
捉
束
測
足
速
俗
属
賊
族
続
卒
袖
其
揃
存
孫
尊
損
村
遜
他
多
体
堆
91AE
た
2
拶
8E90
915F
そ
1
察
8E9E
909E
せ
0
91BE
4230
4240
太
汰
詑
唾
堕
妥
惰
打
柁
舵
楕
陀
駄
騨
た
ち
つ
Shift JIS
91CE
JIS
4250
0
対
1
耐
2
岱
3
帯
4
待
5
怠
6
態
7
戴
8
替
9
泰
A
滞
B
胎
C
腿
D
苔
E
袋
F
貸
91DE
4260
退
逮
隊
黛
鯛
代
台
大
第
醍
題
鷹
滝
瀧
卓
啄
91EE
4270
宅
托
択
拓
沢
濯
琢
託
鐸
濁
諾
茸
凧
蛸
只
叩
但
達
辰
奪
脱
巽
竪
辿
棚
谷
狸
鱈
樽
誰
丹
単
嘆
坦
担
探
旦
歎
淡
湛
炭
短
端
箪
綻
耽
胆
蛋
誕
鍛
団
壇
弾
断
暖
檀
段
男
談
923F
4320
924F
4330
925F
4340
値
知
地
926F
4350
弛
恥
智
池
痴
稚
置
致
蜘
遅
馳
築
畜
竹
筑
蓄
9280
4360
逐
秩
窒
茶
嫡
着
中
仲
宙
忠
抽
昼
柱
注
虫
衷
註
9290
4370
929E
4420
92AE
4430
92BE
4440
92CE
4450
92DE
4460
92EE
て
と
4470
酎
鋳
駐
樗
瀦
猪
苧
著
貯
丁
兆
凋
喋
寵
帖
帳
庁
弔
張
彫
徴
懲
挑
暢
朝
潮
牒
町
眺
聴
脹
腸
蝶
調
諜
超
跳
銚
長
頂
鳥
勅
捗
直
朕
沈
珍
賃
鎮
陳
津
墜
椎
槌
追
鎚
痛
通
塚
栂
掴
槻
佃
釣
鶴
悌
漬
柘
辻
蔦
綴
鍔
椿
潰
坪
壷
嬬
紬
爪
吊
亭
低
停
偵
剃
貞
呈
堤
定
帝
底
庭
廷
弟
抵
挺
提
梯
汀
碇
禎
程
締
艇
訂
諦
蹄
逓
933F
4520
934F
4530
935F
4540
936F
4550
登
菟
賭
途
都
9380
4560
凍
刀
唐
塔
塘
盗
淘
湯
涛
灯
邸
鄭
釘
鼎
泥
摘
擢
敵
滴
的
笛
適
鏑
溺
哲
徹
撤
轍
迭
鉄
典
填
天
展
店
添
纏
甜
貼
転
顛
点
伝
殿
澱
田
電
兎
吐
堵
塗
妬
屠
徒
斗
杜
渡
鍍
砥
砺
努
度
土
奴
怒
倒
党
冬
套
宕
島
嶋
悼
投
搭
東
桃
梼
棟
燈
当
痘
祷
等
答
筒
糖
統
到
9390
4570
939E
4620
董
蕩
藤
討
謄
豆
踏
逃
透
鐙
陶
頭
騰
闘
働
93AE
4630
動
同
堂
導
憧
撞
洞
瞳
童
胴
萄
道
銅
峠
鴇
匿
93BE
4640
得
徳
涜
特
督
禿
篤
毒
独
読
栃
橡
凸
突
椴
届
93CE
4650
鳶
苫
寅
酉
瀞
噸
屯
惇
敦
沌
豚
遁
頓
呑
曇
鈍
93DE
4660
奈
那
内
乍
凪
薙
謎
灘
捺
鍋
楢
馴
縄
畷
南
楠
93EE
4670
軟
難
汝
賑
肉
虹
廿
日
乳
入
如
尿
禰
祢
寧
葱
猫
熱
年
な
二
尼
弐
迩
匂
韮
任
妊
忍
認
に
ぬ
943F
4720
濡
ね
944F
4730
念
捻
撚
燃
粘
乃
廼
之
埜
嚢
悩
濃
納
能
脳
膿
の
945F
は
は
ひ
4740
農
覗
蚤
巴
把
播
覇
杷
波
派
琶
破
婆
罵
芭
馬
946F
4750
俳
廃
拝
排
敗
杯
盃
牌
背
肺
輩
配
倍
培
媒
梅
拍
9480
4760
楳
煤
狽
買
売
賠
陪
這
蝿
秤
矧
萩
伯
剥
博
9490
4770
柏
泊
白
箔
粕
舶
薄
迫
曝
漠
爆
縛
莫
駁
麦
949E
4820
函
箱
硲
箸
肇
筈
櫨
幡
肌
畑
畠
八
鉢
溌
発
94AE
4830
醗
髪
伐
罰
抜
筏
閥
鳩
噺
塙
蛤
隼
伴
判
半
反
94BE
4840
叛
帆
搬
斑
板
氾
汎
版
犯
班
畔
繁
般
藩
販
範
94CE
4850
釆
煩
頒
飯
挽
晩
番
盤
磐
蕃
蛮
匪
卑
否
妃
庇
94DE
4860
彼
悲
扉
批
披
斐
比
泌
疲
皮
碑
秘
緋
罷
肥
被
94EE
4870
誹
費
避
非
飛
樋
簸
備
尾
微
枇
毘
琵
眉
美
953F
4920
鼻
柊
稗
匹
疋
髭
彦
膝
菱
肘
弼
必
畢
筆
逼
197
ひ
ふ
Shift JIS
954F
JIS
4930
0
桧
1
姫
2
媛
3
紐
4
百
5
謬
6
俵
7
彪
8
標
9
氷
A
漂
B
瓢
C
票
D
表
E
評
F
豹
955F
4940
廟
描
病
秒
苗
錨
鋲
蒜
蛭
鰭
品
彬
斌
浜
瀕
貧
956F
4950
賓
頻
敏
瓶
不
付
埠
夫
婦
富
冨
布
府
怖
扶
敷
9580
4960
斧
普
浮
父
符
腐
膚
芙
譜
負
賦
赴
阜
附
侮
撫
9590
4970
武
舞
葡
蕪
部
封
楓
風
葺
蕗
伏
副
復
幅
服
959E
4A20
福
腹
複
覆
淵
弗
払
沸
仏
物
鮒
分
吻
噴
墳
扮
焚
奮
粉
糞
紛
雰
文
聞
丙
併
兵
塀
幣
平
瞥
蔑
箆
保
舗
鋪
倣
95AE
へ
95BE
95CE
ほ
ま
み
む
め
198
4A30
4A40
4A50
憤
弊
柄
並
蔽
閉
陛
米
頁
僻
壁
癖
碧
別
偏
変
片
篇
編
辺
返
遍
便
勉
娩
弁
鞭
95DE
4A60
圃
捕
歩
甫
補
輔
穂
募
墓
慕
戊
暮
母
簿
菩
95EE
4A70
俸
包
呆
報
奉
宝
峰
峯
崩
庖
抱
捧
放
方
朋
963F
4B20
法
泡
烹
砲
縫
胞
芳
萌
蓬
蜂
褒
訪
豊
邦
鋒
964F
4B30
飽
鳳
鵬
乏
亡
傍
剖
坊
妨
帽
忘
忙
房
暴
望
某
965F
4B40
棒
冒
紡
肪
膨
謀
貌
貿
鉾
防
吠
頬
北
僕
卜
墨
966F
4B50
撲
朴
牧
睦
穆
釦
勃
没
殆
堀
幌
奔
本
翻
凡
盆
柾
9680
4B60
摩
磨
魔
麻
埋
妹
昧
枚
毎
哩
槙
幕
膜
枕
鮪
9690
4B7O
鱒
桝
亦
俣
又
抹
末
沫
迄
侭
繭
麿
万
慢
満
969E
4C20
漫
蔓
味
未
魅
巳
箕
岬
密
蜜
湊
蓑
稔
脈
妙
96AE
4C30
96AE
4C30
務
夢
無
牟
矛
霧
鵡
椋
婿
娘
冥
名
命
96AE
4C30
96BE
4C40
粍
明
民
盟
眠
迷
銘
鳴
姪
牝
滅
免
棉
綿
緬
面
麺
も
Shift JIS
96BE
JIS
4C40
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
摸
F
模
96CE
4C50
茂
妄
孟
毛
猛
盲
網
耗
蒙
儲
木
黙
目
杢
勿
餅
96DE
4C60
尤
戻
籾
貰
問
悶
紋
門
匁
也
冶
夜
爺
耶
野
弥
4C70
矢
厄
役
約
薬
訳
躍
靖
柳
薮
鑓
愉
愈
油
癒
有
柚
湧
予
余
与
や
96EE
ゆ
973F
974F
よ
4D20
4D30
涌
諭
輸
唯
佑
優
勇
友
宥
幽
悠
憂
揖
猶
猷
由
祐
裕
誘
遊
邑
郵
雄
融
夕
975F
4D40
誉
輿
預
傭
幼
妖
容
庸
揚
揺
擁
曜
楊
様
洋
溶
976F
4D50
熔
用
窯
羊
耀
葉
蓉
要
謡
踊
遥
陽
養
慾
抑
欲
9780
4D60
沃
浴
翌
翼
淀
来
莱
頼
雷
洛
絡
落
酪
4D70
乱
卵
嵐
欄
濫
利
吏
履
李
梨
理
璃
羅
螺
裸
藍
蘭
覧
ら
9790
り
979E
4E20
痢
裏
裡
里
離
陸
律
率
立
葎
掠
略
劉
流
溜
97AE
4E30
琉
留
硫
粒
隆
竜
龍
侶
慮
旅
虜
了
亮
僚
両
凌
97BE
4E40
寮
料
梁
涼
猟
療
瞭
稜
糧
良
諒
遼
量
陵
領
力
97CE
4E50
緑
倫
厘
林
淋
燐
琳
臨
輪
隣
鱗
麟
瑠
塁
涙
累
麗
る
97DE
4E60
97EE
4E70
類
令
れ
ろ
983F
4F20
984F
4F30
985F
わ
986F
4F40
4F50
齢
楼
伶
例
冷
励
嶺
怜
玲
礼
苓
鈴
隷
零
霊
劣
烈
裂
廉
恋
憐
漣
煉
簾
練
聯
呂
魯
櫓
炉
賂
路
露
労
婁
廊
弄
朗
暦
歴
列
蓮
連
錬
榔
浪
漏
牢
狼
篭
老
聾
蝋
郎
六
麓
禄
肋
録
倭
和
話
歪
賄
脇
惑
枠
鷲
亙
亘
鰐
詫
藁
蕨
湾
碗
腕
論
椀
199
JIS Level-2 Font
一
JIS
989E
5020
一
989E
5020
丶
989E
5020
丿
989E
5020
乙
989E
5020
亅
二
亠
人
989E
5020
98AE
5030
98AE
5030
98AE
5030
98AE
5030
丶
丼
8
9
A
B
丿
乂
乖
乘
C
D
E
F
亅
豫
亊
亂
舒
弍
于
亞
亟
亠
亢
亰
亳
亶
从
仍
仄
仆
仂
仗
仟
价
伉
佚
估
佛
佝
佗
佇
佶
侈
侏
侘
佻
侑
佯
來
侖
儘
俔
俟
俎
俘
俛
俑
俚
俐
俤
98DE
5060
俥
倚
倨
倔
倪
倥
倅
伜
俶
倡
倩
倬
俾
俯
們
倆
98EE
5070
偃
假
會
偕
偐
偈
做
偖
偬
偸
傀
傚
傅
傴
傲
僣
僮
價
僵
儉
儁
儂
儿
兀
兒
兌
兔
兢
竸
冑
冓
冕
冖
冤
冦
冢
几
處
凩
凭
剌
993F
5120
994F
5130
995F
5140
995F
5140
995F
5140
996F
5150
996F
5150
996F
5150
9980
5160
9980
5160
9980
5160
9990
5170
999E
5220
999E
5220
99AE
5230
99AE
5230
匕
99AE
5230
匚
99AE
5230
匸
99AE
5230
十
99BE
5240
卜
99BE
5240
卩
99BE
5240
厶
丱
7
佰
冂
厂
个
6
仭
八
勹
5
佩
5140
力
4
仞
5130
刀
3
丕
5050
994F
凵
2
丐
5040
995F
几
1
弌
98BE
儿
冫
0
98CE
入
冖
200
Shift JIS
99BE
5240
99CE
5250
99CE
5250
僉
僊
傳
僂
僖
僞
僥
僭
儖
儕
儔
儚
儡
儺
儷
儼
儻
兩
兪
兮
冀
冂
冩
囘
册
冉
冏
冪
冫
决
冱
冲
冰
况
冽
凅
凉
凛
凰
凵
剞
剔
凾
刄
刋
刔
刎
刧
刪
刮
刳
刹
剏
剄
剋
剪
剴
剩
剳
剿
剽
劍
劔
劒
剱
劈
劑
辨
劬
劭
劼
劵
勁
勍
勗
勞
勣
勦
飭
勠
勳
勵
匆
匈
甸
匍
匐
匏
匚
匣
匯
匱
匳
匸
區
厠
厦
辧
勸
勹
匕
卆
卅
丗
卉
卍
凖
卞
卩
卮
夘
卻
卷
厂
厥
厮
厰
厶
參
簒
厖
又
口
口
囗
Shift JIS
JIS
99CE
5250
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
雙
叟
曼
燮
A
B
C
D
E
F
99CE
5250
叮
叨
叭
叺
吁
吽
99DE
5260
呀
听
吭
吼
吮
吶
吩
吝
呎
咏
呵
咎
呟
呱
呷
呰
99EE
5270
咒
呻
咀
呶
咄
咐
咆
哇
咢
咸
咥
咬
哄
哈
咨
9A3F
5320
咫
哂
咤
咾
咼
哘
哥
哦
唏
唔
哽
哮
哭
哺
哢
9A4F
5330
唹
啀
啣
啌
售
啜
啅
啖
啗
唸
唳
啝
喙
喀
咯
喊
9A5F
5340
喟
啻
啾
喘
喞
單
啼
喃
喩
喇
喨
嗚
嗅
嗟
嗄
嗜
9A6F
5350
嗤
嗔
嘔
嗷
嘖
嗾
嗽
嘛
嗹
噎
噐
營
嘴
嘶
嘲
嘸
9A80
5360
噫
噤
嘯
噬
噪
嚆
嚀
嚊
嚠
嚔
嚏
嚥
嚮
嚶
嚴
囂
9A90
5370
嚼
囁
囃
囀
囈
囎
囑
囓
囗
囮
囹
圀
囿
圄
圉
圈
國
圍
圓
團
圖
嗇
圜
9A90
5370
9A9E
5420
9A9E
5420
圦
圷
圸
坎
圻
址
坏
9AAE
5430
坩
埀
垈
坡
坿
垉
垓
垠
垳
垤
垪
垰
埃
埆
埔
埒
9ABE
5440
埓
堊
埖
埣
堋
堙
堝
塲
堡
塢
塋
塰
毀
塒
堽
塹
9ACE
5450
墅
墹
墟
墫
墺
壞
墻
墸
墮
壅
壓
壑
壗
壙
壘
壥
9ADE
5460
壜
壤
壟
士
9ADE
5460
壯
壺
壹
壻
壼
壽
夂
9ADE
5460
夊
夐
夛
梦
夥
奧
奬
奩
土
夊
9ADE
5460
夕
9ADE
5460
9ADE
5460
9AEE
5470
大
女
子
宀
奎
奚
奘
奢
奠
妁
妝
佞
侫
妣
妲
姆
姨
姜
妍
姙
姚
娥
娟
娉
娚
婀
婬
婉
娵
娶
婢
婪
媚
媼
媾
嫋
嫂
嫦
嫩
嫖
嫺
嫻
嬌
嬋
嬖
嬲
嫐
嬪
嬶
嬾
孑
孕
孚
孛
孥
孩
孰
孳
孵
學
斈
孺
寉
寔
寐
寤
實
寢
寞
寥
寫
寰
尓
尠
尢
尨
尸
尹
屁
屆
屎
屓
9B5F
5540
媽
嫣
嫗
9B6F
5550
孃
孅
孀
9B6F
5550
9B6F
5550
9B80
5560
它
寳
9B90
5570
9B90
5570
宀
宦
宸
寃
寇
尅
將
專
對
9B90
5570
9B9E
5620
9B9E
5620
9B9E
5620
9BAE
5630
岼
岷
峅
岾
峇
9BBE
5640
崟
崛
崑
崔
9BCE
5650
嶄
嶂
嶢
嶝
巛
9BCE
5650
工
9BDE
5660
广
奐
奸
尢
幺
奕
娜
小
干
竒
娑
5570
巾
夾
5520
5570
已
夸
5530
9B90
山
夲
9B3F
9B90
屮
夬
夭
9B4F
寸
尸
夂
9BDE
5660
9BDE
5660
9BEE
5670
9BEE
5670
9BEE
5670
9BEE
5670
9C3F
5720
屐
屏
孱
寶
屬
屮
乢
屶
屹
岌
岑
岔
妛
岫
岻
岶
峙
峩
峽
峺
峭
嶌
峪
崋
崕
崗
嵜
崢
崚
崙
崘
嵌
嵒
嵎
嵋
嵬
嵳
嵶
嶇
嶬
嶮
嶽
嶐
嶷
嶼
巉
巍
巓
巒
巖
巛
巫
已
巵
帋
幟
幢
廖
幤
廣
帚
帙
幵
并
帑
帛
幺
麼
帶
帷
幄
幃
幀
幎
幗
广
庠
廁
廂
廈
廐
廏
廨
廩
廬
廱
廳
廰
幔
幇
廝
廚
廛
廢
廡
201
廴
JIS
9C3F
5720
廾
9C4F
5730
弋
9C4F
5730
弓
9C4F
5730
彑
9C5F
5740
彡
9C5F
5740
彳
心
戈
戸
手
攴
9C5F
5740
9C6F
5750
0
廾
1
弃
2
弉
3
彝
4
5
彖
彗
彡
彭
徠
徨
徭
徼
怐
怩
怎
怱
怛
5750
5760
怙
9C90
5770
恊
9C9E
5820
9
A
B
F
廸
弭
弸
彁
彈
彌
彎
弯
彷
徃
徂
彿
徊
很
徑
徇
從
忖
忻
忤
忸
忱
忝
悳
忿
怡
恠
怕
怫
怦
怏
怺
恚
恁
恪
恷
恟
恆
恍
恣
恃
恤
恂
恬
恫
恙
悁
悍
惧
悃
悚
悄
悛
悖
悗
悒
悧
悋
惡
悸
惠
惓
悴
忰
悽
惆
9CAE
5830
悵
惘
慍
愕
愆
惶
惷
愀
惴
惺
愃
愡
惻
惱
愍
愎
9CBE
5840
慇
愾
愨
愧
慊
愿
愼
愬
愴
愽
慂
慄
慳
慷
慘
慙
9CCE
5850
慚
慫
慴
慯
慥
慱
慟
慝
慓
慵
憙
憖
憇
憬
憔
憚
9CDE
5860
憊
憑
憫
憮
懌
懊
應
懷
懈
懃
懆
憺
懋
罹
懍
懦
9CEE
5870
懣
懶
懺
懴
懿
懽
懼
懾
戀
戈
戉
戍
戌
戔
戛
戞
戡
截
戮
戰
戲
戳
扎
扞
扣
扛
扠
扨
扼
9CEE
5870
9D3F
5920
9D3F
5920
9D3F
5920
扁
9D4F
5930
抂
抉
找
抒
抓
抖
拔
抃
抔
拗
拑
抻
拏
拿
拆
擔
9D5F
5940
拈
拜
拌
拊
拂
拇
抛
拉
挌
拮
拱
挧
挂
挈
拯
拵
9D6F
5950
捐
挾
捍
搜
捏
掖
掎
掀
掫
捶
掣
掏
掉
掟
掵
捫
9D80
5960
捩
掾
揩
揀
揆
揣
揉
插
揶
揄
搖
搴
搆
搓
搦
搶
攝
搗
搨
搏
摧
摯
摶
摎
攪
撕
撓
撥
撩
撈
撼
據
擒
擅
擇
撻
擘
擂
擱
擧
舉
擠
擡
抬
擣
擯
攬
擶
擴
擲
擺
攀
擽
攘
攜
攅
攤
攣
攫
攴
攵
攷
收
攸
畋
效
敖
敕
敍
敘
敞
敝
敲
數
斂
斃
變
9D90
5970
9D9E
5A20
9DAE
5A30
9DAE
5A30
9DBE
5A40
5A50
斤
9DCE
5A50
方
9DCE
5A50
无
9DCE
5A50
9DCE
5A50
9DDE
5A60
昃
旻
杳
昵
昶
昴
昜
晏
晄
晉
晁
晞
9DEE
5A70
晟
晢
晰
暃
暈
暎
暉
暄
暘
暝
曁
暹
9E3F
5B20
曄
暸
曖
曚
曠
昿
曦
曩
曰
曵
曷
月
E
廴
弩
5A40
曰
D
弖
9DBE
日
C
弑
彳
徘
9C80
8
彙
徙
9C6F
7
彜
弋
彑
6
9DCE
斗
202
Shift JIS
9E3F
5B20
9E3F
5B20
9E4F
5B30
斛
斟
斫
斷
旃
旆
旁
旄
旌
旒
旛
旙
无
朧
霸
旡
旱
杲
昊
晝
晤
晧
晨
曉
暾
暼
朏
朖
朞
朦
木
欠
止
歹
殳
毋
毛
Shift JIS
JIS
9E4F
5B30
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
朮
朿
朶
杁
朸
朷
杆
杞
杠
杙
杣
杤
枉
杰
9E5F
5B40
枩
杼
杪
枌
枋
枦
枡
枅
枷
柯
枴
柬
枳
柩
枸
柤
5B50
柞
柝
柢
柮
枹
柎
柆
柧
檜
栞
框
栩
桀
桍
栲
桎
9E80
5B60
梳
栫
桙
档
桷
桿
梟
梏
梭
梔
條
梛
梃
檮
梹
桴
9E90
5B70
梵
9E9E
5C20
梠
梺
椏
梍
桾
椁
棊
椈
棘
椢
椦
棡
椌
棍
棔
棧
棕
椶
椒
椄
棗
棣
椥
棹
棠
棯
椨
椪
椚
9EAE
5C30
椣
椡
棆
楹
楷
楜
楸
楫
楔
楾
楮
椹
楴
椽
楙
椰
9EBE
5C40
楡
楞
楝
榁
楪
榲
榮
槐
榿
槁
槓
榾
槎
寨
槊
槝
9ECE
5C50
榻
槃
榧
樮
榑
榠
榜
榕
榴
槞
槨
樂
樛
槿
權
槹
9EDE
5C60
槲
槧
樅
榱
樞
槭
樔
槫
樊
樒
櫁
樣
樓
橄
樌
橲
9EEE
5C70
樶
9F3F
5D20
9F4F
5D30
9F4F
5D30
9F5F
5D40
9F5F
5D40
9F5F
5D40
9F6F
5D50
9F6F
5D50
9F6F
5D50
9F6F
5D50
9F80
5D60
9F80
5D60
气
9F80
5D60
9F80
5D60
火
1
9E6F
氏
水
0
9F90
5D70
9F9E
5E20
9FAE
5E30
欅
歙
橸
橇
橢
橙
橦
橈
樸
樢
檐
檍
檠
檄
檢
檣
檗
蘗
檻
櫃
櫂
檸
檳
檬
櫞
櫑
櫟
檪
櫚
櫪
櫻
蘖
櫺
欒
欖
鬱
欟
欸
欷
盜
欹
飮
歇
歃
歉
歐
歹
歿
殀
殄
殃
殍
殘
殕
殞
殤
殷
殼
毆
毋
毓
毟
毬
毫
毳
毯
沛
歔
歛
歟
歡
歸
殪
殫
殯
殲
殱
殳
麾
氈
氓
气
汾
氛
氤
氣
汞
汕
汢
汪
沂
沍
沚
沁
汨
汳
沒
沐
泄
泱
泓
沽
泗
泅
泝
沮
沱
沾
沺
泛
泯
泙
泪
洟
衍
洶
洫
洽
洸
洙
洵
洳
洒
洌
浣
涓
浤
浚
浹
浙
涎
涕
濤
涅
淹
渕
渊
涵
淇
9FBE
5E40
淦
涸
淆
淬
淞
淌
淨
淒
淅
淺
淙
淤
淕
淪
淮
渭
9FCE
5E50
湮
渮
渙
湲
湟
渾
渣
湫
渫
湶
湍
渟
湃
渺
湎
渤
9FDE
5E60
滿
渝
游
溂
溪
溘
滉
溷
滓
溽
溯
滄
溲
滔
滕
溏
9FEE
5E70
溥
滂
溟
潁
漑
灌
滬
滸
滾
漿
滲
漱
滯
漲
滌
E03F
5F20
漾
漓
滷
澆
潺
潸
澁
澀
潯
潛
濳
潭
澂
潼
潘
E04F
5F30
澎
澑
濂
潦
澳
澣
澡
澤
澹
濆
澪
濟
濕
濬
濔
濘
E05F
5F40
濱
濮
濛
瀉
瀋
濺
瀑
瀁
瀏
濾
瀛
瀚
潴
瀝
瀘
瀟
E06F
5F50
瀰
瀾
瀲
灑
灣
E06F
5F50
炙
炒
炯
烱
炬
炸
炳
炮
烟
烋
烝
E080
5F60
烙
焉
烽
焜
焙
煥
煕
熈
煦
煢
煌
煖
煬
熏
燻
熄
E090
5F70
熕
熨
熬
燗
熹
熾
燒
燉
燔
燎
燠
燬
燧
燵
燼
燹
燿
爍
爐
爛
爨
爭
爬
爰
爲
爻
爼
爿
牀
E09E
6020
爪
E09E
6020
爻
E09E
6020
爿
E09E
6020
片
E0AE
6030
牛
E0AE
6030
E0AE
6030
犬
E0BE
6040
狎
E0CE
6050
猥
牋
牆
牘
牴
牾
犂
犁
犇
犒
犖
犢
犧
犹
犲
狃
狆
狄
狒
狢
狠
狡
狹
狷
倏
猗
猊
猜
猖
猝
猴
猯
猩
猾
獎
獏
默
獗
獪
獨
獰
獸
獵
獻
獺
203
王
瓜
JIS
E0CE
6050
E0DE
6060
玻
珀
珥
珮
珞
璢
琅
瑯
琥
珸
琲
琺
E0EE
6070
瑁
瑜
瑩
瑰
瑣
瑪
瑶
瑾
璋
璞
璧
瓊
E13F
6120
瓠
瓣
瓧
瓩
瓮
瓲
瓰
瓱
瓸
瓷
甕
甓
甼
畄
畍
畊
畉
疇
畴
疊
疉
疂
E13F
6120
E14F
6130
甘
E14F
6130
生
E14F
6130
瓦
用
田
癶
白
皮
皿
目
E14F
6130
E14F
6130
E15F
6140
E15F
6140
0
甍
1
畧
畫
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
珈
玳
珎
瑕
琿
瑟
瑙
瓏
瓔
珱
甄
甃
甅
甌
甎
畛
畆
畚
畩
畤
畭
畸
當
疆
疔
疚
疝
疥
疣
6150
痂
疳
痃
疵
疽
疸
疼
疱
痍
痊
痒
痙
痣
痞
痾
痿
痼
瘁
痰
痺
痲
痳
瘋
瘍
瘉
瘟
瘧
瘠
瘡
瘢
瘤
瘴
瘰
瘻
癇
癈
癆
癜
癘
癡
癢
癨
癩
癪
癧
癬
癰
癶
癸
發
皀
皃
皈
皋
皎
皖
皓
皙
皚
E190
6170
E19E
6220
E19E
6220
E19E
6220
E19E
6220
癲
皰
E1AE
6230
E1AE
6230
E1AE
6230
E1BE
6240
眄
眩
皸
皹
睹
矚
矛
E1DE
6260
矢
E1DE
6260
E1DE
6260
米
7
6160
矗
竹
6
E180
睾
立
5
E16F
6250
穴
4
甬
6260
禾
3
甦
E1CE
示
2
甞
E1DE
石
204
Shift JIS
E1EE
6270
E23F
6320
E23F
6320
E24F
6330
皺
盂
盍
盖
盒
盞
盡
盥
盧
盪
蘯
盻
眈
眇
眤
眞
眥
眦
眛
眷
眸
睇
睚
睨
睫
睛
睥
睿
瞎
瞋
瞑
瞠
瞞
瞰
瞶
瞹
瞿
瞼
瞽
瞻
矇
矍
矣
矮
矼
砌
砒
礦
砠
礪
硅
碎
硴
碆
硼
碼
磅
磊
磬
祀
祠
祗
祟
祚
禹
禺
秉
秕
秧
矜
碚
祕
碌
碣
碵
碪
碯
磑
磆
磋
磔
碾
磧
磚
磽
磴
礇
礒
礑
礙
礬
礫
祓
祺
祿
禊
禝
禧
齋
禪
禮
禳
E24F
6330
E24F
6330
E25F
6340
秬
秡
秣
稈
稍
稘
E26F
6350
穉
穡
穢
穩
龝
穰
窶
竅
竄
窿
邃
竇
E26F
6350
E280
6360
E280
6360
E290
6370
E290
6370
皴
竦
竭
稙
稠
稟
禀
稱
稻
稾
稷
穃
穗
穹
穽
窈
窗
窕
窘
窖
窩
竈
窰
竍
竏
竕
竓
站
竚
竝
竡
竢
竊
竰
笂
笏
笊
笆
笳
笘
笙
笞
笵
笨
笶
筐
E29E
6420
筺
笄
筍
笋
筌
筅
筵
筥
筴
筧
筰
筱
筬
筮
箝
E2AE
6430
箘
箟
箍
箜
箚
箋
箒
箏
筝
箙
篋
篁
篌
篏
箴
篆
E2BE
6440
篝
篩
簑
簔
篦
篥
籠
簀
簇
簓
篳
篷
簗
簍
篶
簣
E2CE
6450
簧
簪
簟
簷
簫
簽
籌
籃
籔
籏
籀
籐
籘
籟
籤
籖
E2DE
6460
籥
籬
E2DE
6460
籵
粃
粐
粤
粭
粢
粫
粡
粨
粳
粲
粱
粮
粹
E2EE
6470
糅
糂
糘
糒
糜
糢
鬻
糯
糲
糴
糶
粽
糀
糸
缶
Shift JIS
JIS
E2EE
6470
F
絅
絋
紮
紲
紿
紵
絆
絳
絖
絎
絲
絛
綏
絽
綛
綺
綮
綣
綵
緇
綽
E35F
6540
綫
總
綢
綯
緜
綸
綟
綰
緘
緝
緤
緞
緻
緲
緡
縅
E36F
6550
縊
縣
縡
縒
縱
縟
縉
縋
縢
繆
繦
縻
縵
縹
繃
縷
E380
6560
縲
縺
繧
繝
繖
繞
繙
繚
繹
繪
繩
繼
繻
纃
緕
繽
E390
6570
辮
繿
纈
纉
續
纒
纐
纓
纔
纖
纎
纛
纜
E390
6570
缸
缺
E3BE
6640
E3CE
6650
E3CE
6650
E3DE
6660
E3DE
6660
E3DE
6660
E3EE
6670
虍
E
紆
綉
老
艸
D
糺
紊
耒
色
C
經
6640
艮
B
紕
6640
舟
A
絣
E3BE
舌
9
紜
E3BE
臼
8
絏
6630
至
7
紂
6630
臣
6
絮
E3AE
肉
5
絨
E3AE
聿
4
6520
6620
耳
3
6530
6620
羽
2
E33F
E39E
羊
1
E34F
E39E
网
0
罅
羂
羸
耒
聳
胛
羆
罌
羃
罍
羈
罎
罐
网
罕
罔
罘
罟
罠
罨
罩
罧
罸
羌
羔
羞
羝
羚
羣
羯
羲
羹
羮
羶
翔
翡
翦
翩
翳
翹
飜
耆
耄
耋
聟
聢
聨
肬
羇
譱
耘
聲
翅
翆
翊
翕
耙
耜
耡
耨
聰
聶
聹
耿
耻
聊
聆
聿
肄
肆
肅
聒
聘
聚
聽
肛
肓
肚
肭
冐
胥
胙
胝
胄
胚
胖
脉
胯
胱
脛
脩
脣
脯
腋
E43F
6720
隋
腆
脾
腓
腑
胼
腱
腮
腥
腦
腴
膃
膈
膊
膀
E44F
6730
膂
膠
膕
膤
膣
腟
膓
膩
膰
膵
膾
膸
膽
臀
臂
膺
E45F
6740
臉
臍
臑
臙
臘
臈
臚
臟
臠
E45F
6740
臺
臻
臾
舁
舂
舅
E45F
6740
E45F
6740
E46F
6750
E46F
6750
E46F
6750
E480
6760
E480
6760
E480
6760
E480
6760
E490
6770
E49E
6820
臧
與
舊
舍
舐
舖
舩
艢
艨
艪
艫
舫
舸
舳
艀
艙
艘
艝
艚
艟
艤
艸
艾
芍
芒
芫
芟
芻
芬
苡
舮
艱
艷
苣
苟
苒
苴
苳
苺
莓
范
苻
苹
苞
茆
苜
茉
苙
茵
茴
茖
茲
茱
荀
茹
荐
荅
茯
茫
茗
茘
莅
莚
E4AE
6830
莪
莟
莢
莖
茣
莎
莇
莊
荼
莵
荳
荵
莠
莉
莨
菴
E4BE
6840
萓
菫
菎
菽
萃
菘
萋
菁
菷
萇
菠
菲
萍
萢
萠
莽
E4CE
6850
萸
蔆
菻
葭
萪
萼
蕚
蒄
葷
葫
蒭
葮
蒂
葩
葆
萬
E4DE
6860
葯
葹
萵
蓊
葢
蒹
蒿
蒟
蓙
蓍
蒻
蓚
蓐
蓁
蓆
蓖
E4EE
6870
蒡
蔡
蓿
蓴
蔗
蔘
蔬
蔟
蔕
蔔
蓼
蕀
蕣
蕘
蕈
E53F
6920
蕁
蘂
蕋
蕕
薀
薤
薈
薑
薊
薨
蕭
薔
薛
藪
薇
E54F
6930
薜
蕷
蕾
薐
藉
薺
藏
薹
藐
藕
藝
藥
藜
藹
蘊
蘓
E55F
6940
蘋
藾
藺
蘆
蘢
蘚
蘰
蘿
E55F
6940
虍
乕
虔
號
虧
205
虫
JIS
E55F
6940
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
虱
蚓
蚣
E56F
6950
蚩
蚪
蚋
蚌
蚶
蚯
蛄
蛆
蚰
蛉
蠣
蚫
蛔
蛞
蛩
蛬
E580
6960
蛟
蛛
蛯
蜒
蜆
蜈
蜀
蜃
蛻
蜑
蜉
蜍
蛹
蜊
蜴
蜿
E590
6970
蜷
蜻
蜥
蜩
蜚
蝠
蝟
蝸
蝌
蝎
蝴
蝗
蝨
蝮
蝙
E59E
6A20
蝓
蝣
蝪
蠅
螢
螟
螂
螯
蟋
螽
蟀
蟐
雖
螫
蟄
E5AE
6A30
螳
蟇
蟆
螻
蟯
蟲
蟠
蠏
蠍
蟾
蟶
蟷
蠎
蟒
蠑
蠖
蠕
蠢
蠡
蠱
蠶
蠹
蠧
蠻
衄
衂
衒
衙
衞
衢
衫
袁
E5BE
6A40
血
E5BE
6A40
行
E5BE
6A40
E5BE
6A40
E5CE
6A50
衾
袞
衵
衽
袵
衲
袂
袗
袒
袮
袙
袢
袍
袤
袰
袿
E5DE
6A60
袱
裃
裄
裔
裘
裙
裝
裹
褂
裼
裴
裨
裲
褄
褌
褊
E5EE
6A70
褓
褻
褶
褸
襌
褝
襠
襞
E63F
6B20
E63F
6B20
襾
覃
覈
覊
E63F
6B20
覓
覘
覡
覩
E64F
6B30
觴
觸
訃
訖
衣
襾
見
角
言
谷
E64F
6B30
E64F
6B30
覬
覯
覲
覺
覽
覿
觀
觚
觜
觝
觧
訛
訝
訥
訶
詁
詛
詒
詆
詈
詼
詭
詬
詢
誅
誄
誨
誡
誑
誥
誦
誚
誣
諄
諍
諂
諚
諫
諳
諧
E680
6B60
諤
諱
謔
諠
諢
諷
諞
諛
謌
謇
謚
諡
謖
謐
謗
謠
E690
6B70
謳
鞫
謦
謫
謾
謨
譁
譌
譏
譎
證
譖
譛
譚
譫
譟
譬
譯
譴
譽
讀
讌
讎
讒
讓
讖
讙
讚
E69E
6C20
E69E
6C20
6C30
辛
襄
襷
訌
E6AE
車
襁
襴
誂
豕
身
褫
襯
訐
6C30
足
褪
襪
6B50
6C30
走
褥
襭
6B40
E6AE
赤
褞
襤
E65F
E6AE
貝
覦
襃
襦
E66F
豆
豸
206
Shift JIS
E6AE
6C30
E6BE
6C40
E6BE
6C40
E6CE
6C50
E6CE
6C50
E6DE
6C60
E6DE
6C60
E6DE
6C60
E6EE
6C70
E73F
6D20
E74F
6D30
E74F
6D30
E75F
6D40
谺
豁
谿
豈
豌
豎
豐
豕
貔
豼
貘
賽
賺
賻
豢
豬
豸
豺
貂
貉
貅
貊
貍
貎
賚
戝
貭
貪
貽
貲
貳
貮
貶
賈
賁
賤
賣
贄
贅
贊
贇
贏
贍
贐
齎
贓
賍
贔
贖
赧
赭
赱
赳
趁
趙
跂
跟
趾
趺
跏
跚
跖
跌
跛
跋
跪
跫
跣
跼
踈
踉
跿
踝
踞
踐
踟
蹂
踵
踰
踴
蹊
蹇
蹉
蹌
蹐
蹈
蹙
蹤
蹠
踪
蹣
蹕
蹶
蹲
蹼
躁
躇
躅
躄
躋
躊
躓
躑
躔
躙
躪
躡
躬
躰
軆
躱
躾
軅
軈
E75F
6D40
軋
軛
軣
軼
軻
軫
軾
輊
輅
輕
輒
輙
輓
輜
E76F
6D50
輟
輛
輌
輦
輳
輻
輹
轅
轂
輾
轌
轉
轆
轎
轗
轜
E780
6D60
轢
轣
轤
E780
6D60
辜
辟
辣
辭
辯
迴
E780
6D60
E790
6D70
E79E
6E20
E7AE
6E30
逅
邂
辷
迚
迥
迢
迪
迯
邇
迹
迺
逑
逕
逡
逍
逞
逖
逋
逧
逶
逵
逹
迸
遏
遐
遑
遒
逎
遉
逾
遖
遘
遞
遨
遯
遶
隨
遽
邁
邀
邊
邉
邏
遲
Shift JIS
JIS
E7AE
6E30
E7BE
6E40
E7BE
6E40
E7CE
6E50
釆
E7CE
6E50
里
E7CE
6E50
邑
酉
金
門
阜
0
鄒
醫
E7CE
6E50
E7DE
6E60
釵
E7EE
6E70
鉋
E83F
6F20
E84F
6F30
E85F
6F40
E86F
6F50
E86F
6F50
釶
鈞
釿
釁
鈔
鈬
鈕
鈑
鉞
鉗
鉅
釖
釟
釡
釛
釼
鉉
鉤
鉈
銕
鈿
鋺
鍄
錮
鎰
鎬
鎭
鎔
鎹
鏖
鏗
鏨
鏥
鏘
鏃
鏝
鏐
鏈
鏤
鐚
鐔
鐓
鐃
鐇
鐐
鐶
鐫
鐵
鐡
鐺
鑁
鑒
鑄
鑛
鑠
鑢
鑞
鑪
鈩
鑰
鑵
鑷
鑽
鑚
鑼
鑾
钁
鑿
閂
閇
閊
閔
閖
閘
閙
闖
7040
霎
7050
靜
7070
釀
鍖
E8BE
7070
釋
醺
錏
E8CE
E8EE
釉
醴
鍮
7030
E8EE
醢
鋩
7030
7060
醂
鍼
E8AE
7060
醉
銷
E8AE
E8DE
醋
鍠
隹
E8DE
酲
酣
銹
6F70
韭
酳
酘
鍜
E890
7060
酩
酖
鋏
闢
E8DE
酥
酊
錻
閭
韋
F
鄂
鉚
闥
7050
E
郛
錵
閧
7060
D
扈
銛
闡
E8CE
C
郤
錺
閨
E8DE
B
郢
銓
關
7050
A
邵
錣
閠
7050
9
邱
銖
6F70
E8CE
8
邯
錚
6F60
E8CE
7
邨
銜
7020
頁
醵
E880
非
6
鄰
E890
面
5
錢
7030
音
醪
4
鉐
E89E
革
醯
鄲
3
錙
E8AE
青
鄙
2
釐
隶
雨
1
陝
隶
閼
閻
閹
閾
闊
濶
闃
闍
闌
闕
闔
阡
阨
阮
阯
陂
陌
陏
陋
陷
陜
陞
隧
隱
隲
隰
隴
雹
霄
霆
霈
霓
陟
陦
陲
陬
隍
隘
隕
隗
險
隹
雎
雋
雉
雍
襍
雜
霍
雕
隸
霑
霏
霖
霙
靤
靦
靨
鞨
鞦
鞣
霤
霪
霰
霹
霽
霾
靄
靆
靈
靂
靉
勒
靫
靱
靹
鞅
靼
鞁
靺
鞆
鞋
鞏
鞳
鞴
韃
韆
韈
韋
韜
韭
齏
韲
靠
鞐
鞜
竟
韶
韵
頏
頌
顴
顳
E93F
7120
風
E93F
7120
E93F
7120
食
E94F
7130
餔
餘
餡
餝
饑
饒
饌
饕
顱
頸
頤
頡
頷
頽
顆
顏
颪
颯
颱
颶
飄
飃
飆
餞
餤
餠
餬
餮
餽
餾
馗
馘
顋
顫
顯
顰
飩
飫
餃
餉
餒
饂
饉
饅
饐
饋
E95F
7140
首
E95F
7140
香
E95F
7140
E95F
7140
馭
馮
馼
駟
駛
駝
駘
駑
駭
馬
E96F
7150
駮
駱
駲
駻
駸
騁
騏
騅
駢
騙
騫
騷
驅
驂
驀
驃
E980
7160
騾
驕
驍
驛
驗
驟
驢
驥
驤
驩
驫
驪
E980
7160
骭
骰
骼
髀
E990
7170
E990
7170
髷
骨
高
E990
7170
E99E
7220
鬥
E99E
7220
鬯
E99E
7220
鬲
E99E
7220
髟
馥
髏
髑
髓
體
髞
髻
鬆
鬘
鬚
髟
髢
髣
鬟
鬢
鬣
髦
髯
髫
髮
髴
髱
鬥
鬧
鬨
鬩
鬪
鬮
鬯
鬲
207
鬼
魚
鳥
Shift JIS
JIS
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
E9AE
7230
魄
魃
魏
魍
魎
魑
魘
B
C
D
E
F
魴
鮓
鮃
鮑
鮖
鮗
鮟
鮠
鮨
7240
鮴
鯀
鯊
鮹
鯆
鯏
鯑
鯒
鯣
鯢
鯤
鯔
鯡
鰺
鯲
鯱
E9CE
7250
鯰
鰕
鰔
鰉
鰓
鰌
鰆
鰈
鰒
鰊
鰄
鰮
鰛
鰥
鰤
鰡
E9DE
7260
鰰
鱇
鰲
鱆
鰾
鱚
鱠
鱧
鱶
鱸
E9DE
7260
鳧
鳬
鳰
鴉
鴈
鳫
E9EE
7270
EA3F
7320
鴃
鴆
鴪
鴦
鶯
鴣
鴟
鵄
鴕
鴒
鵁
鴿
鴾
鵆
鵈
鵝
鵞
鵤
鵑
鵐
鵙
鵲
鶉
鶇
鶫
鵯
鵺
鶚
鶤
鶩
鶻
鶸
鶺
鷆
鷏
鷂
鷙
鷓
鷸
鷦
鷭
鷯
鷽
鹵
鹹
鹽
麁
麈
麋
麌
麒
麕
麑
麝
麥
麩
黨
黯
7330
鶲
鷄
鷁
鸚
鸛
鸞
鹵
EA5F
7340
鹿
EA5F
7340
EA5F
7340
EA6F
7350
麻
EA6F
7350
黄
EA6F
7350
黎
EA6F
7350
EA6F
7350
EA80
7360
黹
EA80
7360
黽
EA80
7360
皷
EA80
7360
鼠
EA80
7360
鼻
EA80
7360
齊
EA80
7360
EA80
7360
EA90
7370
龍
EA90
7370
龜
EA90
7370
EA90
7370
EA9E
7420
龠
A
7230
7340
齒
9
E9AE
EA4F
黒
8
E9BE
EA5F
麥
7
麸
麪
麭
靡
黌
黎
黏
黐
黔
黴
黶
黜
點
皷
鼕
黝
黠
鼡
鼬
黥
黷
黹
黻
黼
黽
鼇
鼈
鼾
齊
齒
齔
齣
齟
齠
齡
齦
齧
齬
齪
齷
齲
齶
龕
龜
龠
堯
槇
遙
瑤
凛
煕
User Registration Character Font
The character which can be registered as a user's registration character is 50 kinds to 8121-8152 of JIS code.
The following character fonts are previously registered at 8121(HEX) to 8129(HEX) in the character font by user registration
installed in the CD-ROM.
User Registration
Character
208
Shift JIS
JIS
F13F
8120
F14F
8130
F15F
8140
F16F
8150
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
Index
Index
File Name ………………………………………
File No. Change ……………………………………
File Registration ………………………………
Number
76
Functional character ………………………………
54
Functions for Safety Measures ……………………
29
Guide LD Display …………………………………
50
Human Readable Text Setting ……………………
73
G
A
Alarm ………………………………………………… 181
Arbitrary Point Radiation Condition ………………
85
Arbitrary Point Radiation Coordinate and Time …
84
H
ASCII Code ………………………………………… 193
B
I
Bar Code Marking Condition …………………
Bar Code Marking Data …………………
64, 141
I/O Environment ……………………………… 118, 167
62, 63, 140
J
C
JIS Level-1 Font …………………………………… 195
CAD Condition ……………………………………… 150
JIS Level-2 Font …………………………………… 201
CAD File …………………………………………… 149
Character Code Table …………………………… 192
Character Condition …………………
87, 88, 91, 152
Command List …………………………………
L
43, 120
Laser Check …………………………………… 116, 166
Command Reception Permission ………… 28, 47, 124
Common Bar Code Condition ……………………
75
Communication Data Format ……………………
34
Communication Sequence ………………………
38
Connection Check …………………………………
29
Control Sample ……………………………………
30
Counter …………………………………………
Laser Control …………………………………
47, 125
Laser Power …………………………………… 101, 160
Laser Pulse Cycle …………………………… 102, 161
Layer Condition ……………………………………
Line Width Correction ……………………………… 162
58, 136
CW Pulse Cycle/Duty ……………………………… 161
D
Logo Condition………………………………………
78
Logo File ……………………………………………
77
Lot Character String …………………………
61, 139
Lot Condition …………………………………
60, 138
Low Power Detect Level……………………………
Data Matrix Code Pattern ………………………… 148
M
Delay …………………………………………… 106, 164
DIP Switch …………………………………………
13
DXF Logo Condition ………………………………
79
113
LP-F10 Mode ……………………………………… 119
Data Matrix Code Data …………………………… 146
Data Matrix Code Marking Condition …………… 147
92
Line Speed ………………………………………… 165
Counter Reset ……………………………………… 136
Main Power Indicator ………………………………
Marking Character String ………………
35
53, 131, 132
Marking Interval ……………………………… 107, 164
E
Marking Operation and Command Transmission
28
Marking Quality Adjustment ……………………… 104
Emergency Stop Switch ……………………………
Marking Status Transmission Permission 49, 113, 114,
35
127
Encoder Signal ……………………………… 108, 165
Marking Trigger ………………………………
Era Year ……………………………………… 117, 167
Error Indication …………………………………… 181
Ethernet………………………………………………
210
51
52, 130
Flying Object Wait ………………………………… 107
2D Code Pattern ……………………………………
F
52, 130
25
50, 128
O
Offset ………………………………………………… 157
97, 157
Warning ……………………………………………… 185
Original Font ………………………………………… 194
Week Setting ……………………………………… 118
Offset Condition ………………………………
Output Power Measurement ……………………… 109
Overall Condition ………………………………
86, 151
P
Y
Year/Month/Date/Time ……………………… 117, 166
Power Check ………………………………… 109, 111
Processing Condition Setting ……………………
83
Processing Element Setting ………………………
80
Q
QR Code Data ……………………………………… 143
QR Code Marking Condition ……………………… 144
QR Code Pattern …………………………………… 145
R
Rank Character String ………………………
57, 135
Rank Condition ………………………………
57, 135
Reception Timeout …………………………………
38
Response data format for abnormal receiving …
36
Response data format for normal receiving ……
35
RS-232C ………………………………………… 23, 24
S
Scan Speed …………………………………… 101, 160
Serial Data Input ………………………………
55, 134
Serial Offset …………………………………………
95
Shift to Remote Mode ………………………………
12
Shutter …………………………………………
48, 125
Status Request ………………………………
48, 126
Step & Repeat Condition …………………………
Step & Repeat Fine Adjustment ……………
98
99, 158
T
Test Marking …………………………………………
115
Timing Chart…………………………………………
14
Trademarks ……………………………………………
2
Trigger Condition ……………………………… 105, 163
Troubleshooting …………………………………… 169
U
User Registration Character Font………………… 209
V
VEC Logo Conditions …………………………
78, 150
W
211
MEMO
212
No.9000-0046-80V
No.9000-0046-80V
Panasonic Industrial Devices SUNX Co., Ltd.
Overseas Sales Division (Head Office): 2431-1 Ushiyama-cho, Kasugai-shi, Aichi, 486-0901, Japan
Telephone: +81-568-33-7861 Facsimile: +81-568-33-8591
panasonic.net/id/pidsx/global
About our sales network, please visit our website.
Panasonic Industrial Devices SUNX Co., Ltd. 2013 - 2014
October, 2014 PRINTED IN JAPAN
9000-0046-80V
Shin Jeongho